JP7740422B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines and slot machines, have multiple settings that vary the probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-024234

By the way, it is important for gaming machines to attract attention and interest in the game, thereby increasing players' motivation to play.

The object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the attention and interest in the game, thereby enhancing the player's motivation to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each piece of numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
a numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for, when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), a plurality of specific information (numbers) indicating a plurality of specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information in a distinguishable manner during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing;
Equipped with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information for the specified period in a predetermined display order;
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

1 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 2 is a development view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a development view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a gaming board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing an example of an opening and closing door provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4 . 5 is a diagram showing an example of an opening/closing door, a crane device, and a game ball accumulation section provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view taken along the X1-X1 cutting line in FIG. 6; A diagram to explain the specific period for which game balls are retained in the game ball retention section, the predetermined period for which the number of game balls that have entered the special out ball port of the Krun device is accumulated, and the specified period for which specific information indicating a non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display section. 10A is a cross-sectional view taken along the X2-X2 cutting line in FIG. 8, and FIG. 10B and FIG. 10C are cross-sectional views taken along the X3-X3 cutting line in FIG. Figure 11(A) is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display unit provided on the game board shown in Figure 4, Figure 11(B) is a diagram showing an example of displaying numbers on the 7-segment display unit, and Figure 11(C) is a diagram showing an example of displaying alphabets on the 7-segment display unit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a table used in the main control device. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device. FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a performance information display device of a main control device. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display on a performance display monitor of the performance information display device. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display on a setting value display unit of the performance information display device. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the start winning processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of Figure 20. A flowchart showing an example of the steps of the first pending command setting process executed in the start winning process of Figure 21. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by the main control device. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for variable game control processing executed in the main processing of Figure 23. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for data setting processing executed in the variable game control processing of Figure 24. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for variable start processing executed in the variable game control processing of Figure 24. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a setting value change process executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a display control process of the performance display monitor executed in the main process of FIG. 23 . 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a sub-timer interrupt process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 . 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a display order setting process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34; FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a number display order determination table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 35 . 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34; A figure showing an example of a first stop pattern selection table and a variation type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of Figure 37. A figure showing an example of a presentation pattern type selection table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of Figure 37. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a setting value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34; 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a 7-segment display control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40 . FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a seven-segment display control information storage area set in the voice lamp control device. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining an example of control of a seven-segment display unit and an example of updating a seven-segment display unit control information storage area. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a control example of a 7-segment display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams for explaining an example of updating a 7-segment display control information storage area; 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for an ending additional image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40 . A figure showing an example of screen transition during the ending presentation of a jackpot game. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a setting value suggestion process executed by a voice lamp control device of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a 7-segment display control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48 . 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the ending additional image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48 . 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a display order setting process executed by a voice lamp control device of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a table referenced in the display order setting process of FIG. 51 . FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in Figure 53. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure for sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in Figure 53. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation detection process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 55 . 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation button operation detection process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 56 . 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation detection pattern determination process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 56 . 10 is a table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation situations. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing an example of screen transition on the pattern display unit in a standby state. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a standby state screen transition process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 55; 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a standby state screen transition process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 55; 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a 7-segment history selection screen process executed in the standby state screen transition process of FIG. 62 . FIG. 13 is a front view showing an example of a gaming board of a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. A block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in Figure 64. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of lighting on and off in a lamp display section. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a setting value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34; 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of updating a 7-segment display control information storage area set in the voice lamp control device. FIG. A figure showing an example of screen transition during round play when the lamp display unit is controlled during jackpot play. A figure showing an example of a display screen during the ending presentation of a jackpot game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of the lamp display unit.

The following describes first to fifth embodiments of the present invention with reference to the accompanying drawings to aid in understanding the present invention. Furthermore, each of the following embodiments is merely an example of how the present invention is embodied, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[General configuration of gaming machine 10]
1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the expressions front, back, left, right, and up and down used in this embodiment are defined by the front-back direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS. 1 to 3.

As shown in Figures 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine comprising a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is installed in an amusement hall by fixing the outer frame 14 to the hall's island equipment (not shown). Note that, in this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines such as reel-type gaming machines (slot machines), arrange ball gaming machines, and jankyu gaming machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 is rotatably supported at its left end by the outer frame 14, allowing it to be opened and closed relative to the outer frame 14. The inner frame 12 is rotatably supported at its left end by the front frame 11, allowing it to be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. The back pack unit 13 is rotatably supported at its left end by the inner frame 12, allowing it to be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an illumination unit 27.

The operation button 20 is located in front of the upper tray 23. The operation button 20 is equipped with an operation switch 20a (see Figure 12) that switches the input signal to the sound lamp control device 5 (described below) depending on whether or not it is pressed. This allows the sound lamp control device 5 to determine the operation state (operation or no operation) of the operation button 20. This operation button 20 is operated to execute an operation button effect, which is executed in response to a player's operation of the operation button 20 during a predetermined operation acceptance period in a variable game effect executed in a variable game that clearly shows the player the results of the jackpot lottery.

The location of the operation button 20 is not limited to being in front of the upper tray 23, but may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it is a position that can be operated by the player. Furthermore, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

In addition, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel may be provided that displays touch keys and accepts operation of those touch keys by the player. The operation buttons 20 may also be equipped with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation of the touch panel or panel 25 during variable game presentations will be reflected in the operation button presentations, etc.

The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle that the player operates to launch game balls. In the gaming machine 10, basic gameplay is carried out by launching game balls from the game ball launch mechanism 32 (described below) with a force that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, when the player is operating the launch handle 22, the game ball launch mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the play area every 0.6 seconds.

The upper tray 23 is located below the panel 25 and is used to store game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 132 of the dispensing mechanism 130 (described below) and to guide the stored game balls in a single row to the game ball launching mechanism 32. The lower tray 24 is located further below the upper tray 23 and is used to store game balls that are surplus to the upper tray 23.

The panel 25 is made of colorless, transparent, or colored, transparent glass or synthetic resin, allowing the player to view the game board 31 in the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers located on the left and right sides of the upper end of the front frame 11, and produce an audio output effect. Note that the installation location of the speakers 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. The illumination unit 27 also incorporates a light source such as an indicator lamp or LED, and produces a lamp effect by changing its color, flashing on or off, or other flashing modes.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. As described above, the inner frame 12 is rotatably supported at its left end by the front frame 11, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Therefore, the game board 31, the game ball launching mechanism 32, and the control unit 33 can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Note that the surface of the game board 31 is not shown in FIG. 2 to simplify the illustration.

The control unit 33 is located on the rear side of the gaming board 31 and has a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, commands (control signals) are sent in one direction from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 to instruct the control content. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub-control unit 332 will be described later.

As shown in Figure 4, the game board 31 is provided with an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, an outlet 318, a variable display unit 34, a main display section 36, a crane device 37, a game ball retention section 38, and a 7-segment display section 39.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the game area on the surface of the game board 31. After being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that do not enter the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the outlet 318.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launch rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and guides game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 23 one by one onto the launch rail 321. The solenoid 323 is a driving means that launches game balls supplied onto the launch rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to operation of the launch handle 22 by the player, and game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 onto the game board 31. Note that the game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that launches game balls using other driving means, such as a motor, instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 4, the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the outlet 318 have openings formed that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-to-rear direction. Furthermore, on the back side of the game board 31, ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, and 316a (see Figure 12) that can individually detect the entry of game balls are provided corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316. Furthermore, game balls that pass through the openings of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the outlet 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31 and are detected by the outlet ball sensor 318a (see Figure 12), which will be described later. Variable winning opening 316 is located in the center of the right side of gaming board 31, and can be entered by gaming balls shot into the right area of gaming board 31. Gaming balls that pass through opening 316b of variable winning opening 316 are guided to crane device 37 by guide path 316c (see FIG. 6), which will be described later. Through gate 317 is a gate through which gaming balls can pass, and has a ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 12) that can individually detect gaming balls passing through through gate 317. On gaming board 31, there is a possibility that gaming balls shot into the right area of gaming board 31 may pass through through gate 317, and when the passage of a gaming ball through through gate 317 is detected, a regular winning lottery is held to determine whether second winning opening 315 should be opened.

The entrance ball sensors 313a-317a, the out ball sensor 318a, and the special out ball sensor 384 (see Figure 12) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the entrance ball sensors 313a-317a, the out ball sensor 318a, and the special out ball sensor 384 are input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) sends a command to the payout control device 7 to pay out game balls based on the detection results of the entrance ball sensors 313a-317a. Hereinafter, the detection of an entrance ball by the entrance ball sensors 313a-316a may be referred to as a winning ball. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) also counts the number of out balls based on the detection results of the out ball sensor 318a. The number of out balls counted here matches the number of launched game balls launched onto the game board 31 by the game ball launching mechanism 32.

Furthermore, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) sets a special out ball detection command indicating that the game ball detected based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37 described below, and sends this special out ball detection command to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1301 in the main processing of Figure 23. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls.

Note that the ball entry sensors 313a-317a, out ball sensor 318a, and special out ball sensor 384 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but may also be any sensors capable of individually detecting game ball entry using other detection methods.

The second winning opening 315 is also provided with an electric device (electric device) 315b that switches between restricting and restricting the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315. The electric device 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the gaming board 31. On the gaming board 31, opening the electric device 315b allows game balls to enter the second winning opening 315, and closing the electric device 315b restricts the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 315.

Furthermore, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319 that switches whether or not game balls are restricted from entering the variable winning opening 316. The opening/closing door 319 is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. On the game board 31, opening the opening/closing door 319 allows game balls to enter the variable winning opening 316, and closing the opening/closing door 319 restricts game balls from entering the variable winning opening 316. Note that the opening/closing door 319 is moved to a position that opens the variable winning opening 316 during round play in the opening/closing execution mode in jackpot play, and is otherwise kept waiting in a position that closes the variable winning opening 316. This allows game balls 99 shot into the right area of the game board 31 during round play in jackpot play to enter the variable winning opening 316.

As shown in Figures 5 and 6, the opening/closing door 319 has a base 319a, a pair of guard walls 319b, and a pair of guides 319c. The base 319a has a pair of mounting portions 319d for rotatably mounting the opening/closing door 319 to the game board 31, and protrudes slightly above horizontal from the game board 31 when the opening/closing door 319 is in the operating position. This allows the opening/closing door 319 to receive game balls 99 that are launched into the right area of the game board 31 when in the operating position. The pair of guard walls 319b extend from the left and right edges of the base 319a, preventing game balls 99 received by the base 319a from spilling out from the left and right sides of the base 319a. The pair of guides 319c also guide the game balls 99 received by the base 319a to the variable winning opening 316. The pair of guides 319c extend from the guard wall 319b to the vicinity of the variable winning opening 316, forming a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass. The variable winning opening 316 also has a through-hole 316b that discharges the game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 to the rear side of the game board 31. This through-hole 316b is connected to a guide path 316c provided on the rear side of the game board 31. The guide path 316c extends in the vertical direction D2 and has a lower opening. The game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 enters the variable winning opening 316 and is guided to the crane device 37 via the through-hole 316b and the guide path 316c. A ball entry sensor 316a is provided on the guide path 316c. As a result, the game ball 99 that enters the variable winning opening 316 is detected as it passes through the through-hole 316b and is introduced into the guide path 316c. This ball entry sensor 316a is electrically connected to the main control unit 331. As a result, the detection results of the ball entry sensor 316a are input to the main control unit 331, which can detect that a game ball 99 has entered the variable winning opening 316.

In the gaming machine 10, when the ball entry sensor 314a or the ball entry sensor 315a detects the entry of a gaming ball into the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, the main control unit 331 conducts a jackpot lottery. The main control unit 331 then controls the display on the main display unit 36 according to the results of the jackpot lottery. The results of the lottery by the main control unit 331 are also transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, which then controls the display on the variable display unit 34 according to the results of the lottery.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the ball entry sensors 313a-316a detect the entry of game balls into the general prize opening 313, the first prize opening 314, the second prize opening 315, and the variable prize opening 316, a preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when a ball enters the general prize opening 313 is 10, the number of prize balls when a ball enters the first prize opening 314 or the second prize opening 315 is 3, and the number of prize balls when a ball enters the variable prize opening 316 is 10. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, if the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the machine transitions to a jackpot game state (special game state), and a round game (unit game) described below in which the variable prize opening 316 is opened is repeated a predetermined number of times (e.g., 5 or 16 times), so that a large number of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Furthermore, when a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, a jackpot lottery is held. If the lottery results in a win, the game transitions to a predetermined jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R variable probability jackpot gaming state) and a 16R variable probability jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot gaming state is a gaming state that includes an open/close execution mode in which the variable winning slot 316 is opened for five rounds (unit games) until a predetermined time has elapsed or until the upper limit number (e.g., 9) or more gaming balls enter the variable winning slot 316. The 16R probability jackpot gaming state is a gaming state that includes an open/close execution mode in which 16 rounds of play (unit play) are played, and is more advantageous to the player than the 5R jackpot gaming state, as it is expected to pay out more prize balls than the 5R jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a symbol display section 341, such as a liquid crystal display, that is arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed in the approximate center of the game board 31. This symbol display section 341 displays still or moving images, and the display content of the symbol display section 341 is controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the symbol display section 341 produces various image effects, such as a variable display effect of decorative symbols corresponding to the results of a jackpot lottery conducted by the main control unit 331 in response to a ball entering the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, and a variable game effect executed in conjunction with the variable display effect. The symbol display section 341 may also be a dot matrix display, plasma display, organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or plasma display and an organic EL display.

For example, the decorative pattern variable display effect in the pattern display unit 341 is performed by scrolling multiple types of decorative patterns numbered "1" to "9" in order vertically, horizontally, diagonally, etc. Note that secondary patterns such as other letters or designs may be displayed between the decorative patterns. In this embodiment, there are no secondary patterns, and there are nine types of decorative patterns numbered "1" to "9."

In the gaming machine 10, during variable play, the display of variable decorative symbols is executed so that the variation of all decorative symbols stops after a preset variation display time has elapsed since the start of the variable symbol display on the symbol display unit 341. More specifically, in the display of variable decorative symbols, all decorative symbols first vary along a preset variation direction (for example, horizontally, vertically, etc.), and then the variation of multiple decorative symbols stops in sequence. Then, once the variation of decorative symbols on all lines has stopped and a predetermined time has elapsed, the display of variable decorative symbols ends.

When the display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341 has finished changing, the symbol display unit 341 will display the decorative symbols lined up on one or more active lines. At this time, the stopped state of the decorative symbols will clearly indicate or suggest the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, if the lottery result is a "5R jackpot," a "16R jackpot," or a "5R regular jackpot," decorative symbols of the same type lined up on active lines will be displayed, clearly indicating that a jackpot has occurred. Furthermore, the type of jackpot may be indicated by the combination of decorative symbols on active lines, but this is not always the case. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result is a "16R jackpot," a decorative symbol combination such as "777," which is set as a symbol combination indicating a 16R jackpot, will be displayed lined up on active lines, or a combination of the same decorative symbols other than "777" will be displayed lined up on active lines. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "5R probability variable jackpot," a combination of decorative symbols, such as "333," which has been set as a symbol combination indicating a 5R probability variable jackpot, is displayed lined up on the active line, or a combination of the same decorative symbols, such as "777" or "333," other than the symbol combinations indicating a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot, is displayed lined up on the active line. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot," a combination of the same decorative symbols, such as "222" or "444," which has been set as a symbol combination indicating a normal jackpot, is displayed lined up on the active line. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "loss," a different combination of decorative symbols (such as "323" or "723") is displayed lined up on the active line.

In addition, the symbol display unit 341 displays a variable game effect suggesting the likelihood that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, along with the display of changing decorative symbols during variable play. If the lottery result is a "16R probability jackpot" and a jackpot symbol combination other than the decorative symbol combination indicating a 16R probability jackpot is displayed lined up on an active line, a suggestion effect is executed as a variable game effect suggesting that it will be a 5R probability jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot. In this case, a promotion effect is executed in the jackpot game effect, clearly indicating that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability jackpot. Similarly, if the lottery result is a "5R probability jackpot" and a jackpot symbol combination other than the decorative symbol combination indicating a probability jackpot is displayed lined up on an active line, a suggestion effect is executed as a variable game effect suggesting that it will be a 5R regular jackpot. In this case, during the jackpot game presentation, an upgrade presentation will be executed to clearly indicate that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R probability jackpot.

Furthermore, when the game state transitions to a jackpot game state, the symbol display unit 341 displays jackpot game effects including an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect.

It is also possible to provide a magnetic sensor or a radio wave sensor (neither shown) on the game board 31. The magnetic sensor is provided, for example, near the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316. The magnetic sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the magnetic sensor are input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent behavior in the event of an attempt to fraudulently use a magnet to guide a game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316. On the other hand, a radio wave sensor is provided, for example, near the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the radio wave sensor are input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent behavior in the event of an attempt to fraudulently input radio waves to the ball entry sensors 314a, 315a, resulting in a false detection of a game ball entry. The radio wave sensor is capable of detecting radio waves, for example, from 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

As shown in Figure 4, the crane device 37 distributes game balls that enter the variable winning opening 316 to either the normal out ball opening 378 or the special out ball opening 373 (see Figures 7 and 8), which will be described later. Here, Figure 6 shows an example of the opening/closing door 319, crane device 37, and game ball retention section 38 provided on the game board 31 shown in Figure 4, Figure 7 is a perspective view of the crane device 37, and Figure 8 is a cross-sectional view along the X1-X1 cutting line in Figure 6.

As shown in Figures 6 to 8, the crane device 37 is dish-shaped and has a bottom wall 371 and an annular peripheral wall 372 that surrounds the bottom wall 371. The bottom wall 371 is circular in plan view and has a high bottom portion 371a, a low bottom portion 371b, and a left-downward sloping portion 371c provided between the high bottom portion 371a and the low bottom portion 371b.

The high bottom portion 371a constitutes the right portion of the bottom wall 371 and slopes downward to the right. A special out ball passage 374 with a special out ball port 373 (special discharge port) is provided in the high bottom portion 371a. This special out ball passage 374 is adjacent to the right edge of the sloped portion 371c and is located in the center of the high bottom portion 371a in the front-to-back direction D1, extending in the up-down direction D2. This special out ball passage 374 is cylindrical with an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. A first guide member 375 is connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374. This first guide member 375 guides the game ball 99 passing through the special out ball passage 374 to the game ball retention section 38. The first guide member 375 has an upper opening 375a and a lower opening 375b connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374. The lower opening 375b is located to the right of the upper opening 375a, and releases the game balls 99 from the special out ball passage 374 from the right side of the special out ball passage 374 toward the game ball accumulation section 38.

The first guide member 375 can also be given the function of retaining game balls 99 that cannot be retained in the game ball retention section 38. In this embodiment, a number (specific information) corresponding to a non-set value, which is a game setting value other than the set value, which is the game setting value set for the gaming machine 10, is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of game balls 99 that enter the special outlet ball port 373 of the crane device 37 during a specified period (see Figure 9) (the number of specific conditions satisfied during the specified period). In this embodiment, the 7-segment display unit 39 has seven segments (excluding dot points DP), so seven pieces of information can reliably identify one non-set value. Furthermore, since there are six game setting values, from 1 to 6, there are five non-set values, and therefore 35 pieces of information can identify all non-set values. In other words, the gaming machine 10 is required to be able to display at least 35 pieces of information (the specified number). Therefore, it is preferable that the game ball retention section 38 be configured to retain more than a specified number of game balls 99 for a specific period (see FIG. 9 ), as described below. However, depending on the arrangement of various components of the gaming machine 10, it may be difficult to configure the game ball retention section 38 to retain more than a specified number of game balls 99. In this case, by providing the first guide member 375 with the function of storing game balls 99, it is possible to use the first guide member 375 to retain a number of game balls 99 that would be difficult to retain using the game ball retention section 38 alone. This makes it possible to retain more than a specified number of game balls 99 for a specific period, and presents information necessary to identify all non-set values. Similarly, game balls 99 may also be retained in the special out ball passage 374 to which the first guide member 375 is connected. As a result, when it is difficult to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 due to the arrangement of various components, even by providing the first guide member 375 with the function of retaining game balls 99 in addition to the game ball retention section 38, it becomes possible to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 by using the special out ball passage 374. As a result, it becomes possible to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 for a specific period of time, and it is possible that the information necessary to identify all non-set values will be presented.

On the other hand, it is also possible to set a limit on the number of game balls 99 that can be retained during a specific period. For example, the limit can be set to the specified number (the limit can be set to the specified number). In this case, for example, if information corresponding to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special outlet ball opening 373 (individual pieces of specific information) is presented, it is possible that information required to identify all non-set values during a single specific period will be presented. Also, if information corresponding to the number of game balls 99 that meet specified conditions and enter the special outlet ball opening 373, for example, the number of game balls that win a lottery, is presented, information corresponding to the expected number of game balls that will be retained during a single specific period will be presented. However, since this expected number of game balls is generally smaller than the specified number, it is possible that not all of the information required to identify all non-set values will be presented. This prevents the set value from being identified based on the number of game balls 99 that entered the special outlet ball opening 373 during a single specific period. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from prematurely ending play on the gaming machine 10 when the set value is low (when the probability of winning a jackpot is low).

One possible means for setting a limit on the number of game balls 99 that can be retained during a specific period of time is to employ a configuration in which game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, the first guide member 375, and the special out ball passage 374, and when a limited number of game balls 99 enter the special out ball passage 374, the game balls 99 can be positioned near the special out ball opening 373 (causing a ball jam) to limit the number of game balls 99 that can enter the special out ball passage 374. Such a configuration makes it possible to limit the number of game balls 99 retained during a specific period of time to a limited number using a simple mechanical configuration, without requiring complex configuration or control.

On the other hand, the game ball retention section 38 has a retention lane 381 that slopes downward to the left, as described below. In other words, the first guide member 375 guides the game ball 99 to the right (upstream side) of the retention lane 381 in the game ball retention section 38. A game ball 99 that enters the special out ball port 373 will not enter any of the various winning ports 313-316, nor will it pass through the through gate 317. Therefore, a game ball 99 that enters the special out ball port 373 is treated as an out ball when it is no longer expected to enter any of the various winning ports 313-316 or pass through the through gate 317, for example, when it is introduced into the special out ball passage 374 (when it is detected by the special out ball sensor 384).

The low bottom portion 371b forms the left portion of the bottom wall 371 and is inclined downward toward the center. A normal passage 376 having a normal outlet ball opening 378 is provided in the low bottom portion 371b. This normal passage 376 is provided adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 371c, extending in the vertical direction D2 except for the portion along the peripheral wall 372 of the low bottom portion 371b. This normal passage 376 guides game balls 99 that enter through the normal outlet ball opening 378 to the rear side of the game board 31 and is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a larger opening area than the special outlet ball opening 373. A second guide member 377 is connected to the lower end of the normal passage 376. This second guide member 377 collects game balls 99 passing through the normal passage 376 to the rear side of the game board 31, similar to game balls that pass through the opening of the outlet 318. The game balls 99 collected by the second guide member 377 are then detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see Figure 12) and counted as out balls.

As described above, game balls 99 that are launched into the right area of the game board 31 and received by the opening/closing door 319 are guided to this type of crane device 37 via the guide path 316c. The game balls 99 guided to the crane device 37 then move along the peripheral wall 372 and onto the bottom wall 371. This slows the flow of the game balls 99 down the crane device 37. Most of the game balls 99 moving along the bottom wall 371 enter the normal out ball port 378, for example, due to their reduced kinetic energy or by colliding with the peripheral wall 372 of the crane device 37 or other game balls 99. Game balls 99 that enter the normal out ball port 378 travel along the normal passage 376 and the second guide member 377 and are guided to a position where they can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see Figure 12).

Meanwhile, some of the game balls moving on the bottom wall 371 have their direction of movement changed by collisions with the periphery of the normal out ball opening 378 or with other game balls, and enter the special out ball opening 373. The game ball 99 that enters the special out ball opening 373 is released toward the game ball accumulation section 38 via the special out ball passage 374 and the first guide member 375.

Here, the probability that a gaming ball 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 will land in the special out ball opening 373 is set, for example, between 0.5% and 5%, and preferably between 1% and 3%. In other words, the expected number of balls that will land in the special out ball opening 373 per 10 rounds of play is set, for example, between 0.5 and 5%, and preferably between 1 and 3. By setting the ball landing probability or the expected number of balls that will land in this range, it is possible to prevent the player from prematurely determining the setting value while also making it possible to realistically determine the setting value. This prevents the player from ending play on the gaming machine 10 when the setting value is determined prematurely, such as when the setting value is low, while also making it possible to prevent the player from ending play on the gaming machine 10 due to boredom caused by being unable to determine the setting value.

In this embodiment, the special outlet ball opening 373 is located at the higher bottom 371a of the bottom wall 371, and the normal outlet ball opening 378 has a larger opening area than the special outlet ball opening 373, making it significantly more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special outlet ball opening 373 than the normal outlet ball opening 378. However, instead of or in addition to all or part of these measures, it is also possible to make it more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special outlet ball opening 373 by using other means. For example, it is possible to provide an obstruction means around the special outlet ball opening 373 to prevent the game ball 99 from entering the special outlet ball opening 373. Examples of obstruction means include an obstacle that obstructs the game ball from entering the special outlet ball opening 373, such as a wall surrounding the special outlet ball opening 373; a means for generating a magnetic or electromagnetic force that repels the game ball 99 around the special outlet ball opening 373; or a means for forming an air curtain by spraying air around the special outlet ball opening 373.

In addition, an opening/closing section may be provided to open and close the special out ball opening 373, making it difficult for game balls to enter the special out ball opening 373. In this case, the special out ball opening 373 may be provided on the same plane as the normal out ball opening 378, and the normal out ball opening 378 may be formed to have the same or approximately the same opening area as the special out ball opening 373.

Furthermore, the distribution means for distributing the game balls 99 that enter the variable winning opening 316 between the normal out ball opening 378 and the special out ball opening 373 is not limited to the crane device 37, and other means may be used. For example, distribution between the normal out ball opening 378 and the special out ball opening 373 may be achieved by using a rotating member such as a switching valve, a rotary member, or by adjusting the arrangement of nails driven into the game board 31.

As shown in Figures 4 and 8, the game ball retention unit 38 receives game balls 99 that have entered the special outlet ball opening 373 of the Kroon device 37 and retains the game balls 99 until a specific period of time has elapsed. After the specific period has elapsed, segments A through G of the 7-segment display unit 39 (described below) are controlled, and a number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the cumulative number of game balls 99 that have entered the special outlet ball opening 373 by the time the specified period has elapsed. Figure 9 is a diagram illustrating the specific period for retaining game balls in the game ball retention unit, the specified period for accumulating the number of game balls that have entered the special outlet ball opening of the Kroon device, and the specified period for displaying specific information indicating a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit.

Note that, hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 9, a specific period will be described as a period during which game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, a predetermined period will be described as a period during which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special outlet ball port 373 of the crane device 37 is cumulatively counted, and a "prescribed period" will be described as a period during which all or part of a number (specific information) indicating a non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special outlet ball port 373 of the crane device 37 during the specific period. However, the "specific period" is not limited to the period during which game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, and the "prescribed period" is not limited to the period during which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special outlet ball port 373 of the crane device 37 is cumulatively counted. In other words, the "specific period," "prescribed period," and "prescribed period" include at least the periods described below.

As shown in Figures 9(A) and 9(B), the specific period during which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retention section 38 is from the start of the jackpot game (opening) to the end of the opening/closing execution mode for that jackpot game (the start of the ending), and a specific period is set for each jackpot game that starts within a predetermined period. In other words, the start of the specific period is the time when the jackpot game starts, and the end of the specific period is the time when the opening/closing execution mode for that jackpot game ends (the start of the ending). Specifically, as shown in Figure 9(A), if a normal jackpot is won in low probability mode (if the first hit is a normal single jackpot), the specific period is from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode for that jackpot game. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9(B), if a probability variable jackpot is won in low probability mode (if the first hit is a probability variable jackpot and a jackpot streak begins), and if a normal jackpot is won in high probability mode, for all jackpot games executed until the jackpot streak ends with the normal jackpot game, the period from the start of each jackpot game to the end of the open/close execution mode for that jackpot game is set as a specific period. In other words, for a jackpot streak, multiple specific periods are set corresponding to the number of jackpot games executed during the jackpot streak.

In other words, regardless of the type of jackpot or the timing of winning, segments A through G of the 7-segment display unit 39 (described below) corresponding to the number of gaming balls 99 that enter the special outlet ball opening 373 of the crane device 37 during a specific period of a single jackpot game are subject to lighting control at the end of the jackpot game, which is the specified period. In other words, the specified period is set as a period during which the 7-segment display unit 39 displays numbers indicating game setting values (multiple non-set values) other than the game setting value (set value) that specifies the probability that the jackpot lottery result will be a jackpot, based on the number of gaming balls 99 that enter the special outlet ball opening 373 of the crane device 37 during the specified period.

If the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 during a specific period of one jackpot game is 7 or more but less than 14, a number specifying a game setting value (multiple non-set values) other than the game setting value (set value) that determines the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery set in the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot will be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending (specified period) after the specific period of the jackpot game has elapsed, in accordance with the display order set in the display order setting process of Figure 36 described below. Furthermore, at the ending (prescribed period) after a specific period of a jackpot game has elapsed, if the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 during the specific period of a single jackpot game is 14 or more but less than 20, two numbers specifying multiple non-set values are displayed in the 7-segment display unit 39 in the order specified by the display sequence; if the number is 21 or more but less than 28, three numbers specifying multiple non-set values are displayed in the order specified by the display sequence; if the number is 28 or more but less than 35, four numbers specifying multiple non-set values are displayed in the order specified by the display sequence; and if the number is 35 or more, five numbers specifying multiple non-set values (all numbers) are displayed in the order specified by the display sequence. Note that if the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 during the specific period of a single jackpot game is less than seven, no numbers specifying multiple non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during the ending (prescribed period) after the specific period of a single jackpot game has elapsed.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, each time a jackpot game is executed, one to five numbers specifying multiple non-set values may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 (described below) based on the number of gaming balls 99 that enter the special outlet ball port 373 of the crane device 37 during a specific period, and the display of the numbers specifying five non-set values makes it possible to identify the set value. For example, the display of the number 1 on the 7-segment display unit 39 identifies that game set value 1 is a non-set value, the display of the number 2 on the 7-segment display unit 39 identifies that game set value 2 is a non-set value, the display of the number 3 on the 7-segment display unit 39 identifies that game set value 3 is a non-set value, the display of the number 4 on the 7-segment display unit 39 identifies that game set value 4 is a non-set value, the display of the number 5 on the 7-segment display unit 39 identifies that game set value 5 is a non-set value, and the display of the number 6 on the 7-segment display unit 39 identifies that game set value 6 is a non-set value. Furthermore, when five numbers 2 to 6 are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, it can be determined that the non-set values are game set values 2 to 6, and therefore the set value can be determined to be game set value 1. Similarly, when five numbers 1 and 3 to 6 are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, it can be determined that the set value is game set value 2, when five numbers 1, 2, and 4 to 6 are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, it can be determined that the set value is game set value 3, when five numbers 1 to 3, 5, and 6 are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, it can be determined that the set value is game set value 4, when five numbers 1 to 4 and 6 are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, it can be determined that the set value is game set value 5, and when five numbers 1 to 5 are displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39, it can be determined that the set value is game set value 6.

The numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 can also be ascertained before all segments A through G are controlled. For example, if segments A through G are controlled in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, when segment A, the first controlled segment, is turned off, the candidate numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are "1" and "4." Then, when segment F, the sixth controlled segment, is turned on, the number can be recognized as "4," and when segment F is turned off, the number can be recognized as "1." In other words, the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when segment F, the sixth controlled segment, becomes the controlled segment before all segments A through G are controlled. When segment A, the first controlled segment, is turned on, the candidate numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are "2," "3," "5," and "6." Then, when segment B, the second control target, is turned on, it can be determined to be either "2" or "3," and when segment B is turned off, it can be determined to be either "5" or "6." Furthermore, when segment C, the third control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "3," and when segment C is turned off, it can be recognized as "2." In other words, the numbers "2" or "3" can be recognized when segment C, the third control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become control targets. Furthermore, when segment E, the fifth control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "6," and when segment E is turned off, it can be recognized as "5." In other words, the numbers "5" or "6" can be recognized when segment E, the fifth control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become control targets. That is, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized when segment C, the third control target, is lit or extinguished; the numbers "5" and "6" can be recognized when segment E, the fifth control target, is lit or extinguished; and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when segment F, the sixth control target, is lit or extinguished. In this embodiment, even if a number indicating a non-set value is recognized before all segments A through G of the 7-segment display unit 39 become control targets, control for displaying the next number of priority is not initiated until all segments A through G become control targets. Thus, in order to identify all non-set values, more specific conditions must be satisfied than when control for displaying the next number of priority is initiated when numbers corresponding to non-set values can be recognized. As a result, the difficulty of identifying all non-set values, and therefore the difficulty of recognizing set values, can be increased, preventing set values from being recognized within a short game time. Therefore, even if the set value is low, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly learning the set value, thereby preventing a decrease in playing time on the gaming machine 10 and suppressing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

In addition, if a number indicating a non-set value is recognized before all segments A through G of the seven-segment display unit 39 are controlled, control to display the number of the next priority may be initiated. For example, if the priority of numbers is "1" → "2" → "3" → ... and segment F, which is sixth in the control order for the number "1," is selected as the control target, and it is recognized that the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 is "1," control to display the number of the next priority, "2," may be initiated without selecting segment G, which is seventh in the control order, as the control target. Incidentally, if segments A through G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all segments A through G have been controlled, even if the number displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39 can be recognized before all segments A through G have been controlled, control of segments A through G to display the next number to be displayed will not be initiated until all segments A through G have been controlled. Therefore, even if a player recognizes a number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 before all segments A through G are controlled, information identifying the number already recognized by the player is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the next number to be displayed begins to be displayed. In other words, if segments A through G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all segments A through G have been controlled, information unnecessary to the player may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, raising concerns that the player's interest in the game may decrease during the period in which such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. In contrast, if control to display the next number with priority is initiated when a number indicating a non-set value is recognized before all segments A through G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled, segments A through G that do not contribute to guessing the non-set value will not be controlled after one non-set value has been identified. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to segments A through G being unnecessarily controlled.

On the other hand, the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 entering the special outlet ball port 373 of the Kroon device 37 is the period from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in low probability mode to the end of the normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode. In other words, the start of the predetermined period is the time when the jackpot game for the jackpot in low probability mode starts, and the end of the predetermined period is the time when the normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode ends (the time when the ending of the normal jackpot game starts). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9(A), when a normal jackpot is won in low probability mode (when the first hit is a normal single jackpot), the predetermined period is the time from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot opening/closing execution mode for the jackpot game. In other words, in the case of a single jackpot, the predetermined period coincides with the specific period for retaining the game ball 99 in the game ball retention section 38. Also, as shown in FIG. 9(B), when a probability variable jackpot is won in low probability mode (when the first hit is a probability variable jackpot and a series of jackpots begins), the predetermined period is the period from the start of the probability variable jackpot game for the first hit that triggers the series of jackpots to the end of the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game for the normal jackpot that triggers the series of jackpots. In other words, in the case of a series of jackpots, the predetermined period does not coincide with the specific period for which game balls 99 are retained in game ball retention section 38, but is set to multiple periods depending on the number of jackpot games that begin within the predetermined period.

Once a jackpot game has begun, unless there are special circumstances, the game will not be ended midway through the jackpot game or in the middle of a series of jackpots. Therefore, a specific period for retaining game balls 99 in the game ball retention section 38 is set for each jackpot game, preventing the player from ending the game before the specific period ends. Furthermore, a predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that enter the special outlet ball port 373 of the crane device 37 is set from the start of the jackpot game for a jackpot in low probability mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode for the jackpot game for a normal jackpot, preventing the player from ending the game before the predetermined period ends. Then, in the jackpot game, at the ending (prescribed period) after the specific period has elapsed, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled based on the number of game balls 99 trapped in the game ball trapping unit 38 during the specific period (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special outlet ball opening 373 of the crane device 37), thereby displaying information that allows the non-set value to be identified or guessed (all or part of the numbers corresponding to the non-set value), and at the ending after the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game for a normal jackpot has elapsed, information that allows the non-set value to be identified or guessed (all or part of the numbers corresponding to the non-set value) is displayed in accordance with the cumulative number of game balls 99 that entered the special outlet ball opening 373 of the crane device 37 during the specified period. This prevents a player who does not know the timing at which non-set values other than the set value can be identified or guessed from ending the game before the timing at which the non-set value can be identified or guessed. Therefore, even players who do not know the timing at which non-set values can be identified or guessed can identify or guess the non-set values, and by identifying all non-set values, it becomes possible to identify the set values. In addition, it is possible to eliminate so-called hyena behavior by other players who play aiming for timing at which non-set values can be identified or guessed.

Furthermore, by setting a specific period for each jackpot game that starts within a predetermined period, in the case of consecutive jackpots, the predetermined period is set to span from the first jackpot to the final jackpot game in the jackpot series. Therefore, in the case of consecutive jackpots, the predetermined period is longer than in the case of a single jackpot, and the more jackpot games are played, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, in the case of consecutive jackpots, there is a higher probability that a greater number of game balls 99 will enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kroon device 37 than in the case of a single jackpot, and in the case of consecutive jackpots, the greater the number of consecutive jackpots, the greater the probability that a greater number of game balls 99 will enter the special out ball port 373. As a result, the more consecutive jackpots a player has, the greater the expected value of the game value that can be acquired. This not only increases the number of consecutive jackpots a player has, but also provides the player with more information for identifying or guessing non-set values, making it easier to guess or identify non-set values and ultimately set values.

The start of the specific period during which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retention section 38 may be set during a jackpot game, and may be set not only at the start of the jackpot game but also at the point when the opening/closing execution mode begins (the opening of the first jackpot ends). The end of the specific period may be set during a jackpot game, or may be set during the ending transition that occurs after a regular jackpot game. Preferably, the specific period is set as a single interval including the opening/closing execution mode for one jackpot game. This allows information for identifying a non-set value to be displayed on the 7-segment display 39 after the specific period has elapsed, based on the number of specific conditions that are met when the game ball 99 enters the variable winning opening 316 in the opening/closing execution mode (based on the number of game balls 99 that have passed through the special out ball opening 373 of the crane device 37). As a result, in the open/close execution mode, you can enjoy playing by focusing on whether or not the game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373, and after the open/close execution mode ends, that is, after a specific period of time has passed, you can enjoy playing by focusing on the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 and identifying or guessing the non-set value based on the displayed content.

In addition, the start of the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special outlet ball port 373 of the Kroon device 37 is not limited to the start of the jackpot game for the first hit (jackpot in low probability mode), but may be set to the jackpot game. Preferably, it may be the start of the jackpot game for the first hit (jackpot in low probability mode), for example, the start of the opening/closing execution mode for the jackpot game for the first hit (jackpot in low probability mode) (end of the opening of the first hit). In this way, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the jackpot game for the first hit, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single jackpot or a consecutive jackpot, and therefore at least one opportunity to guess or identify a non-set value for each first hit is guaranteed.

On the other hand, the end of the specified period is not limited to the end of the open/close execution mode of the normal jackpot game, but may be set during the jackpot game; for example, it may be set at the ending of the jackpot game, typically the ending of the normal jackpot game. The end of the specified period may also be the end of the normal jackpot game (the end of the ending of the jackpot), or the end of the time-saving mode transitioned to after the normal jackpot. Furthermore, while this embodiment is described assuming a loop probability variable machine, it is also conceivable that the specified period may be set according to the type of gaming machine, such as an ST machine, a V-ST machine, or a type 1/2 mixed machine. For example, in a V-ST machine, if there is no V win on the first hit (normal jackpot), the predetermined period is set in the same way as for a normal jackpot on a loop probability variable machine, and if there is a V win on the first hit (probable variable jackpot), the start of the predetermined period could be the start of the first jackpot game or the start of the opening and closing execution mode, and the end of the predetermined period could be the end of the opening and closing execution mode on a jackpot without a V win, or the end of a specified number of jackpot draws in the high probability mode.

The predetermined period can also be set to the period during which variable play is executed (the period from the end of a jackpot game to the start of a new jackpot game) regardless of whether a jackpot game is being played. For example, the predetermined period can be set according to the type of condition (specific condition) under which all or part of the specific information (numbers) indicating a non-set value is displayed, and can be set to the period during which the player stays in the normal play state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode) (the period from the end of the time-saving mode to the start of the next jackpot), the period during which the player stays in the time-saving mode (the period from the end of a normal jackpot to the transition to the normal play state), the period during which the player stays in the low probability mode (the period from the end of a normal jackpot to the start of the next jackpot game), the period until a predetermined number of jackpot lottery draws are received in either or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, the period during which a predetermined number of jackpot draws are received in either or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, or the period during which a predetermined number of jackpot draws are received in either or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. Examples of such a predetermined period include the period until a normal winning lottery is drawn, the period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 enter the normal winning slot 313 in either or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, the period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 enter the first winning slot 314 in either or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, the period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 enter the second winning slot 315 in either or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, the period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 pass through the through gate 317 in either or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, and the period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are shot onto the game board 31 in either or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. The predetermined period may also be set for each variable game. That is, the predetermined period may be set from the start of the variable game (the start of the display of the decorative symbols) to the end of the variable game (the end of the display of the decorative symbols). In this case, the predetermined period may be the entire period of one variable game, or a portion of one variable game. If a portion of one variable game is set as the predetermined period, the predetermined period could be the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until the decorative symbols reach a ready state, the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until a development effect such as a special ready state starts, the period from when the decorative symbols reach a ready state until a development effect starts, the period from when the decorative symbols reach a ready state until the development effect ends, or the period during which a development effect is executed.

In this way, by setting a predetermined period during which variable play is executed, it becomes possible to identify or guess non-set values and recognize or guess set values even outside of the period during which jackpot play is executed. This makes it possible to enjoy the progress of play while identifying or guessing non-set values (set values) during the period during which variable play is executed.

If the specified period is set as the period during which variable play is performed, the distribution means such as the crane device 37 can be located in a position where the game ball 99 is distributed between the normal out ball outlet 378 and the special out ball outlet 373 when a left-handed shot is performed, in which the game ball 99 shot into the left area of the game board 31 is normally shot. This could be in the left area of the game board 31 (above or below the normal winning slot 313) or the central area (above or to the side of the first winning slot 314). In this case, it is possible to identify or guess the non-set value (set value) without performing a special shot (a right-handed shot that shoots the game ball 99 into the right area of the game board 31). This allows the player to enjoy identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) while playing normally, without reducing the probability of the game ball 99 entering the normal winning slot 313 or the first winning slot 314.

Furthermore, depending on the type of specific condition, the start of the specified period may be set when the main power supply for the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Furthermore, depending on the type of specific condition, the end of the specified period may be set when the main power supply for the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

Note that the specific condition may be that, instead of the game ball 99 distributed by a distribution means such as the Kroon device 37 entering the special out ball opening 373 during a specified period, the game ball 99 passes through a specific area other than the special out ball opening 373, such as the game ball 99 passing through the through gate 317 or the game ball 99 entering one of the various winning openings 313 to 316.

In addition, game balls 99 that enter the general winning slot 313 or first winning slot 314, or that pass through the through gate 317, may be guided to a distribution means such as the crane device 37, and a specific condition may be that the game balls 99 distributed by the distribution means enter the special out ball slot 373. In this case, too, players can enjoy identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) while playing the game as usual, without having to perform any special launching.

The specific condition may also be the occurrence of a specific event that may occur during the course of a game. In this case, the specific event may be either an advantageous or disadvantageous event for the player. If the specific event is advantageous to the player, the player may further obtain all or part of the specific information indicating a non-set value (set value) in addition to the benefit obtained by the occurrence of the specific event. On the other hand, if the specific event is disadvantageous to the player, the player may further obtain all or part of the specific information indicating a non-set value (set value) as a remedy for the disadvantage caused by the occurrence of the specific event. Possible specific events include, for example, winning the jackpot a predetermined number of times (including once) or more (a jackpot game being played a predetermined number of times (including once) or more), winning a special or regular jackpot a predetermined number of times (a special or regular jackpot game being played a predetermined number of times (including once) or more), achieving a predetermined number of consecutive jackpots (winning special jackpots a predetermined number of times or more in succession before winning a regular jackpot), achieving a predetermined number of jackpot draws before winning a jackpot, and winning more than the upper limit of 99 game balls (over-winning) during round play in the open/close execution mode of the jackpot game.

The specific event may also be the execution of a specific effect that is set in advance in variable play or jackpot play. The specific effect in this case is not particularly limited and may be set to either a non-reach effect or a reach effect, or to any of an opening effect, a round play effect, or an ending effect. Typical examples of the specific effect include a premium effect in variable play that confirms a jackpot or a guaranteed jackpot, and an effect that indicates that a series of reserved wins will be executed after the end of a jackpot game (i.e., the lottery result includes a jackpot among the reserved wins at a specific point in the jackpot game, such as the start of the jackpot game, the start of the open/close execution mode, the end of the open/close execution mode, or the end of the jackpot game). Furthermore, a specific event may also be a stop display or a provisional stop display (intermediate stop display) of decorative symbols in a specific combination on the symbol display unit 341. For example, in the symbol display unit 341, the decorative symbol may stop and be displayed as "777," or may stop and be displayed as "767" with a specific out-of-reach symbol, or as "367" with a specific non-out-of-reach symbol (variant symbol). In addition, a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) may be considered to indicate that a development effect will be executed when a development effect such as a super reach effect or special reach effect is executed as a reach effect. A temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) indicating that a development effect will be executed may be, for example, "7 Development 7," where the decorative symbols on the left and right are temporarily displayed as a reach state (intermediate stop display), and a symbol such as "Development" is temporarily displayed as a center symbol indicating that a development effect will be executed. Furthermore, the specific condition may be the occurrence of multiple specific events resulting from a specific combination.

The specific condition may also be established in relation to a set value. In other words, the specific condition may include a set value; for example, the specific condition may be established when a specific event occurs at a specific set value. In this case, while the type of specific condition depends on the set value, the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined by the set value, as described below. Therefore, the numbers indicating non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in different orders depending on the type of specific condition. This makes it possible to set the display order for each set value based on, for example, whether the probability of winning a jackpot is high or low, and it also becomes possible to characterize the display of multiple numbers indicating non-set values for each set value.

Furthermore, the specified period during which specific information or a portion thereof (special information) indicating a non-set value is displayed when certain conditions are met is not limited to being set for each ending of a jackpot game; it may be set at other times, depending on its relationship to a specified period, a specific period, or specific conditions. For example, as described in the second embodiment below, the specified period may be set only at the ending of a 5R normal jackpot game, which typically sets the end of the specified period, or it may be set for a time other than a jackpot game, such as after the end of a jackpot game. Furthermore, when the specified period is set during the execution of a variable game, possible examples of the specified period include the start of the change in decorative symbols in variable game, the timing of the temporary stop display when the decorative symbols are in a reach state, the timing when a development effect such as a super reach effect or a special reach effect begins, or during the execution of a development effect. In other words, the specified period may be set during the execution of a variable game. When the specified period is set during the execution of a variable game, it becomes possible to display specific information indicating a non-set value along with the result of the jackpot lottery. For example, when the result of a jackpot lottery is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by displaying a changing decorative symbol, it is also possible to simultaneously display specific information on the symbol display unit 341. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in variable play by displaying specific information.

Here, Figure 10(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X2-X2 cutting line in Figure 8, Figure 10(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X3-X3 cutting line in Figure 8 when the stopper portion 383 (described below) is in its upper limit position, and Figure 10(C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X3-X3 cutting line in Figure 8 when the stopper portion 383 is in its lower limit position. The configuration of the game ball retention portion 38 will be explained below with reference to Figures 6 and 8 in addition to Figure 10.

As shown in Figures 6, 8, and 10, the game ball retention unit 38 retains game balls 99 that enter the special outlet ball port 373 for a specific period of time, and includes a retention lane 381, a discharge lane 382, and a stopper unit 383.

The retention lane 381 receives game balls 99 that have entered the special outlet ball port 373 of the crane device 37 and allows these game balls 99 to remain. The retention lane 381 is open at the top and slopes downward to the left. The depth of the retention lane 381 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, making at least a portion of the game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 visible (see Figure 4). This makes it possible to visually confirm that game balls 99 have been retained in the retention lane 381, as well as the number of retained game balls 99, i.e., the number of game balls 99 that entered the special outlet ball port 373 of the crane device 37 within a specific period of time. Furthermore, the retention lane 381 is preferably made transparent, such as from a resin. This makes it easier to determine the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381. Instead of or in addition to making the game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 visible, the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 may be displayed. The number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 may be displayed, for example, by the number of lit lamps or by displaying an image on the pattern display unit 341.

The discharge lane 382 is connected to the left end of the retention lane 381 and guides the game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 to a predetermined location, such as a position where they can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see Figure 12).

In addition, a special out ball sensor 384 is provided on the discharge lane 382. This special out ball sensor 384 detects game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 as they move along the discharge lane 382. In other words, the special out ball sensor 384 is used to count the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381, i.e., the number of special out balls that enter the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37 within a specific period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12 , the special out ball sensor 384 is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and the MPU 41 monitors the output from the special out ball sensor 384, allowing the MPU 41 to determine whether a game ball 99 has moved along the discharge lane 382. Furthermore, when a gaming ball 99 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command and sends this special out ball detection command to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. 23 described below. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives a special out ball detection command, it counts the number of special out balls using the MPU 51 and controls the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of special out balls and the set value (see the command determination process of FIG. 37 and the set value suggestion process of FIG. 40).

The special out ball sensor 384 may be, for example, an electromagnetic induction proximity sensor, but other detection methods (for example, an optical sensor) may also be used to detect the game balls 99. The special out ball sensor 384 may also be connected to the sound and lamp control device 5. In this case, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 does not set a special out ball detection command, but the sound and lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls based on the output from the special out ball sensor 384.

The stopper portion 383 is provided between the retention lane 381 and the discharge lane 382, and is moved up and down between an upper limit position and a lower limit position by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the gaming board 31. The upper limit position is a position where the tip protrudes upward, and when the stopper portion 383 is in the upper limit position, gaming balls 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 (see Figure 10 (B)). On the other hand, the lower limit position is a position where the tip does not protrude upward, and when the stopper portion 383 is in the lower limit position, gaming balls 99 in the retention lane 381 can be discharged via the discharge lane 382 (see Figure 10 (C)). The gaming balls 99 guided to the discharge lane 382 are then guided to a position where they can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see Figure 12).

The means for allowing game balls 99 to be retained in the retention lane 381 and for allowing game balls 99 in the retention lane 381 to be discharged to the discharge lane 382 is not limited to the stopper portion 383 that can move up and down, and may be other means, such as a stopper portion that can move back and forth or a stopper portion that can rotate between an upright position and a prone position. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the game balls 99 are retained by preventing them from moving using magnetic or electromagnetic force, and the game balls 99 are discharged by releasing the magnetic or electromagnetic force. Furthermore, by configuring the retention lane 381 to be movable up and down, it is possible to realize a state in which the game balls 99 are retained and a state in which they are discharged. For example, the retention lane 381 may be configured to wait at a lower position than the discharge lane 382 to retain the game balls 99, while the retention lane 381 may be configured to move to a higher position than the discharge lane 382 to move the game balls 99 to the discharge lane 382. Alternatively, an opening may be provided in the gaming board 31 to allow gaming balls 99 to be discharged to the rear side of the gaming board 31, and the retention lane 381 may be configured to move up and down between a position where gaming balls 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 and a position where gaming balls 99 can be discharged from the opening to the rear side of the gaming board 31. Also, instead of the retention lane 381, it is possible to move a box-shaped movable body to allow gaming balls 99 to be retained in the movable body and to be discharged to the rear side of the gaming board 31.

Here, Figure 11(A) is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display unit 39 provided on the gaming board 31 shown in Figure 4, Figure 11(B) is a diagram showing an example of how numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display unit, and Figure 11(C) is a diagram showing an example of how alphabets are displayed on the 7-segment display unit.

As shown in FIG. 11(A), the 7-segment display unit 39 consists of seven segments A through G and a dot point DP. Each segment A through G and dot point DP can be individually lit or extinguished, and can display at least the numbers 1 through 6 as shown in FIG. 11(B), and at least the letters A through F as shown in FIG. 11(C). In this embodiment, the 7-segment display unit 39 displays numbers (specific information) indicating each of the multiple (five) game setting values (non-set values (specific numerical information)) other than the game setting values (set values (predetermined numerical information)) set to determine the jackpot probability of the gaming machine 10 from the multiple (six) game setting values (numerical information) corresponding to the jackpot probability of the jackpot lottery result (see FIG. 14(A) and FIG. 14(B)). The 7-segment display unit 39 displays numbers by lighting or extinguishing each segment A through G. Specifically, on the 7-segment display unit 39, if the non-set value is game setting value 1, segments B and C are lit to display the number 1; if the non-set value is game setting value 2, segments A, B, D, E, and G are lit to display the number 2; if the non-set value is game setting value 3, segments A through G are lit to display the number 3; if the non-set value is game setting value 4, segments B, C, F, and G are lit to display the number 4; if the non-set value is game setting value 5, segments A, C, D, F, and G are lit to display the number 5; and if the non-set value is game setting value 6, segments A, C through G are lit to display the number 6. In this embodiment, when a number corresponding to a non-set value is displayed, a dot point DP is lit to clearly indicate that a number corresponding to a non-set value has been displayed.

In addition, numbers corresponding to non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39 are displayed in an order determined when the main power is turned on (powered on) or when the set value is changed, as described below (see Figures 35 and 36). Also, as described below, the control order for lighting or extinguishing each of segments A to G on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set (fixed) to segment A, segment B, segment C, segment D, segment E, segment F, and segment G.

Then, as described below, the 7-segment display unit 39 controls the lighting of the segments corresponding to the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kroon device 37 during a predetermined period (the number of specific conditions satisfied during the predetermined period), and displays a number or a portion of a number on the 7-segment display unit 39. Here, the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 indicates a non-set value other than the set value after the game set value. Therefore, the portion of the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 does not indicate the game set value, but rather indicates a portion of specific information indicating a non-set value, and corresponds to special information. In other words, the special information is displayed using a portion of the multiple segments A through G on the 7-segment display unit 39. In this way, by displaying not only the number indicating a non-set value but also a portion of the number (special information) on the 7-segment display unit 39, the player can not only identify the non-set value when a number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, but can also infer the non-set value based on the portion of the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, even if no numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, players can still enjoy guessing the non-set value based on part of the numbers, which increases the fun of the game.

Note that whether or not each segment A to G is subject to control on the 7-segment display unit 39 may or may not be clearly indicated to the player. When it is clearly indicated that each segment A to G is subject to control, it is easier to guess the set value than when it is not clearly indicated. In this embodiment, the control order of each segment A to G is fixed, so it is not clearly indicated that each segment A to G is subject to control, and a method is used that makes it difficult to guess the set value. Note that when it is clearly indicated to the player that each segment A to G is subject to control, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the segment is subject to control by, for example, flashing the segment to be controlled, or by lighting it in a color different from when the segment to be controlled is lit.

In addition, the 7-segment display unit 39 may display information for identifying non-set values using letters corresponding to the non-set values. For example, if the non-set value is game set value 1, the letter A may be displayed; if the non-set value is game set value 2, the letter B may be displayed; if the non-set value is game set value 3, the letter C may be displayed; if the non-set value is game set value 4, the letter D may be displayed; if the non-set value is game set value 5, the letter E may be displayed; and if the non-set value is game set value 6, the letter F may be displayed (see FIG. 11(C)).

The main display unit 36 includes a normal symbol display unit 361, a first special symbol display unit 362, a second special symbol display unit 363, a first reserved number display unit 364, and a second reserved number display unit 365, all located in the upper right corner of the game board 31.

The normal symbol display unit 361 includes a pair of LEDs representing the normal symbol (normal symbol), and displays the result of the normal symbol lottery, which is triggered by a win at the through gate 317, to determine whether or not to open the electric device 315b, by combining the on and off of the pair of LEDs. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the pair of LEDs to flash (displaying a changing normal symbol) when a win at the through gate 317 occurs, and after the changing display time has elapsed, turns each LED on or off to display the result of the normal symbol lottery.

The first special symbol display unit 362 includes a 7-segment display device as the first special symbol (first special symbol), and displays the results of the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) which determines whether or not a jackpot game will be played when a ball wins at the first winning slot 314, by combining the lighting and extinguishing of seven segments on the 7-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the seven segments of the 7-segment display device to flash (display the first special symbol in a variable manner) when a ball wins at the first winning slot 314, and displays the results of the jackpot lottery by lighting or extinguishing each segment after the variable display time has elapsed.

The second special symbol display unit 363 includes a 7-segment display device as the second special symbol (second special symbol), and displays the results of the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) which is triggered by a win in the second winning slot 315 and determines whether or not a jackpot game will be played by combining the lighting and extinguishing of seven segments on the 7-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) causes the seven segments of the 7-segment display device to flash (variably display the second special symbol) in response to a win in the second winning slot 315, and after the variable display time has elapsed, turns each segment on or off to display the result of the jackpot lottery.

The first reserved number display unit 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the reserved number N of the first special symbol, which is displayed in a variable display when a winning jackpot is won at the first winning slot 314, by the number of lit LEDs.

The second reserved number display unit 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the reserved number M of the second special symbol, which changes when a winning jackpot is won at the second winning slot 315, by the number of lit LEDs.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140 .

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores game balls supplied from the arcade's island equipment (not shown), and a payout device 132 that pays out game balls from the tank 131 onto the upper tray 23. When the upper tray 23 is saturated with game balls, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out onto the lower tray 24.

As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in response to operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts the power supplied from the island equipment (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level and supplies it to the control devices and drive means provided within the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main control unit 331]
12, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that mainly controls the game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transitioning to a preset jackpot game state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is a computing device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. It also has built-in ROM 411 and RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing in accordance with control programs stored in ROM 411 and elsewhere. Some or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may also be performed by electronic circuits.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main control unit 4 and outputs control signals from the main control unit 4. The input/output I/F 42 is also connected to the ball entry sensors 313a-317a, the out ball sensor 318a, and the special out ball sensor 384. The MPU 41 determines whether balls have entered the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316, and whether a game ball 99 has passed through the through gate 317, based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 318a. The input/output I/F 42 is also connected to the sound lamp control unit 5, the payout control unit 7, the firing control unit 8, and the power supply control unit 9.

Then, the MPU 41 outputs commands to the audio and lamp control device 5, such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a round game start command, a round game end command, an ending start command, a jackpot game end command, a special out ball detection command, and a setting value change command.

The variation pattern command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the result of the jackpot lottery, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it also includes information regarding the type of jackpot. The variation pattern command is set in step S1605 of the variation start processing in Figure 26 described below, based on information stored in the reserve storage area 412b described below, when the main display unit 36 starts displaying varying patterns. Note that the variation pattern command may also be a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, the command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of the result of the jackpot lottery and the type of jackpot is set as a separate command from the variation pattern command.

The first and second hold commands are commands that notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery results, fluctuation pattern, and hold number N or M of the jackpot lottery for the increased hold when the hold number N or M stored in the hold storage area 412b described below increases. The first and second hold commands are set based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b described below when the hold number N or M increases (step S1207 or step S1209 of the first hold command setting process in Figure 22 described below).

The shift command is a command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that the win/loss information indicating the result of the jackpot lottery in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 or the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 has shifted when the reserved number N or reserved number M decreases. The shift command is set in step S1508 of the data setting process in Figure 25, which will be described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that a jackpot game is about to begin, i.e., that the game state is about to transition to a jackpot game state. It is set during the game state transition process in the main processing of FIG. 23, which will be described later, when transitioning to a jackpot game state. Furthermore, since the jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that a jackpot game is about to begin, by receiving the jackpot game start command, the voice and lamp control device 5 can determine that not only is the jackpot game about to begin, but also that the opening has begun. However, it is also possible to set an opening start command separately from the jackpot start command, and have the voice and lamp control device 5 determine that the opening has begun by using the opening start command.

The round game start command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 of the start of each round game in the open/close execution mode during jackpot game play, and of round number information indicating which round the round game is. It is set in the jackpot game control process in the main processing of Figure 23, which will be described later. Note that the audio and lamp control device 5 can determine that the opening has ended and the open/close execution mode has begun by the round game start command, but it is also possible to set an opening end command separately from the round game start command when the opening has ended, or to set an open/close execution mode start command when the open/close execution mode has begun. Furthermore, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game that is about to begin may be set separately from the round game start command at the start of round game play, and this command may be sent to the audio and lamp control device 5.

The round play end command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the round play is to end in the open/close execution mode during jackpot play, and is set in the jackpot play control process in the main processing of Figure 23, which will be described later.

The jackpot game end command is a command that notifies the audio and lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is ending, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main processing of Figure 23, which will be described later.

The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37, and is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process in Figure 20, which will be described later. The voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls in a specified period based on the special out ball detection command, and determines the control content of the 7-segment display unit 39.

The setting value change command is a command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that a setting value has been changed and the changed setting value, and is set in step S1710 of the setting value change process in Figure 27 described below.

Note that commands other than those mentioned above may be output from the main control unit 4 to the voice and lamp control unit 5, but their explanation will be omitted.

The main control unit 4 also includes an oscillator circuit and a frequency divider circuit as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41. The oscillator circuit outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and the frequency divider circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillator circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 (described below) is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency divider circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the divider circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (e.g., 4 msec), and the MPU 41 activates and executes the main timer interrupt process described below each time the clock signal rises (or falls). Note that oscillator circuits and divider circuits are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and peripheral control unit 140 as needed, and supply operating clocks for the main controls in the sub-control unit 332 and peripheral control unit 140. A clock signal may also be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 and peripheral control unit 140.

ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are pre-stored. RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by MPU 41. For example, RAM 412 is used to set commands to be sent to the voice lamp control device 5, etc. Note that RAM 412 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

Now, with reference to Figure 13, we will explain the memory area used by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform jackpot lottery and other operations. Specifically, the MPU 41 performs jackpot lottery and variable display time settings, etc., using counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, reserved storage area 412b, and electric role reserved area 412c of the RAM 412.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used to draw the jackpot win, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot, and a reach random number counter C3 used to determine the type of miss. The lottery counter 412a also includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variable type counter CS1 that determines the variable display time in the main display unit 36 and the symbol display unit 341. The lottery counter 412a also includes a normal win random number counter C4 used to draw the lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric feature 315b of the second winning slot 315, and a normal win initial value counter CIN2 used to set the initial value of the normal win random number counter C4. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are described collectively, they will be simply referred to as "counters."

Counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short intervals and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referenced by the MPU 41 when setting the jackpot lottery and variable display time, etc.

The reserve storage area 412b includes a first reserve storage area REA, a second reserve storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserve storage area REA includes a first reserve area REA1, a second reserve area REA2, a third reserve area REA3, a fourth reserve area REA4, and a reserve number memory area NAA. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which a jackpot lottery is conducted based on the values stored in the first reserve storage area REA and in which the first special symbol display unit 362 displays a variable and stationary display may be referred to as a first special symbol game. The second reserve storage area REB includes a first reserve area REB1, a second reserve area REB2, a third reserve area REB3, a fourth reserve area REB4, and a reserve number memory area NAB. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which a jackpot lottery is conducted based on the values stored in the second reserved storage area REB and the second special symbol display unit 363 displays a variable and static display may be referred to as a second special symbol game.

When a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 stored in RAM 412 is acquired as win/loss information to be used in the jackpot lottery and stored in one of the first reserve areas REA1 to REA4 of the first reserve storage area REA. When a gaming ball enters the second winning slot 315, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 stored in RAM 412 is acquired as win/loss information to be used in the jackpot lottery and stored in one of the first reserve areas REB1 to REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB. The win/loss information acquisition process is performed by the MPU 41, which functions as the determination means of the present invention, by executing processing in accordance with a control program. Additionally, a lottery counter 412a (such as a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1) may be provided individually for each of the first reserved storage area REA and the second reserved storage area REB.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 is stored in one of the first reserve area REA1 to fourth reserve area REA4 of the first reserve storage area REA and the first reserve area REB1 to fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB.

As a result, in addition to the results of the jackpot lottery for 19 variable games that are executed based on the win/loss information stored in the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 and the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB, it is also possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the variable symbol display displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

Specifically, when a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314, the win/loss information is stored in the available area in the following order of priority: first holding area REA1, second holding area REA2, third holding area REA3, and fourth holding area REA4. The number of holding areas NAA in which win/loss information is stored is stored as the holding number N.

In addition, when a gaming ball enters the second winning slot 315, the win/loss information is stored in the available area in the following order of priority: first holding area REB1, second holding area REB2, third holding area REB3, fourth holding area REB4. The number of holding areas NAB in which win/loss information is stored is stored as the holding number M.

In other words, the gaming machine 10 can store up to four pieces of winning/losing information as winning history for the first winning slot 314 and the second winning slot 315, using a total of eight memory areas corresponding to the maximum number of reserves in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4.

In another embodiment, a holding area with a maximum holding capacity of eight tickets may be provided in both the first winning slot 314 and the second winning slot 315, and in this case, it is possible to hold a total of up to eight pieces of winning/losing information as winning history. The process of storing winning/losing information is performed by the MPU 41 by executing processing in accordance with the control program.

The execution area AE is a memory area used to move the win/loss information stored in the first reserve area REA1 of the first reserve storage area REA or the first reserve area REB1 of the second reserve storage area REB when the display of changing symbols begins in the main display unit 36 and the symbol display unit 341. Specifically, the win/loss information in the first reserve area REB1 of the second reserve storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE with priority, and if there is no win/loss information in the first reserve area REB1 of the second reserve storage area REB and the number of holds memory area NAB is 0, the win/loss information in the first reserve area REA1 of the first reserve storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

In another embodiment, if the difference between the number of reserved balls M stored in the number of reserved balls memory area NAA of the first reserved ball storage area REA and the number of reserved balls N stored in the number of reserved balls memory area NAB of the second reserved ball storage area REB is 2 or more, the value of the reserved ball area with the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE.In another embodiment, the win/loss information of the first reserved ball area REA1 of the first reserved ball storage area REA and the first reserved ball area REB1 of the second reserved ball storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

At the start of a single round of variable play, the MPU 41 conducts a jackpot lottery and the like based on the numerical information stored as win/loss information in the execution area AE. At this time, if the first reserve area REA1 of the first reserve storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the win/loss information stored in the second reserve area REA2 is shifted to the first reserve area REA1, the win/loss information stored in the third reserve area REA3 is shifted to the second reserve area REA2, and the win/loss information stored in the fourth reserve area REA4 is shifted to the third reserve area REA3.

Similarly, if the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the win/loss information stored in the second holding area REB2 is shifted to the first holding area REB1, the win/loss information stored in the third holding area REB3 is shifted to the second holding area REB2, and the win/loss information stored in the fourth holding area REB4 is shifted to the third holding area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 637, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 goes through one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1 (0 to 738). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically and stored in the reserved storage area 412b when a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315.

The random number value that results in a jackpot is set to two values, corresponding to the low probability mode and the high probability mode, which is a guaranteed jackpot game state, using a win/loss table stored in the win/loss table storage area in ROM 411. Here, Figure 14(A) shows an example of a low probability mode win/loss table corresponding to the low probability mode, and Figure 14(B) shows an example of a high probability mode win/loss table corresponding to the high probability mode.

In the examples shown in Figures 14(A) and 14(B), a plurality of low-probability mode win/loss tables and high-probability mode win/loss tables are provided, each with a different probability of the lottery result in a jackpot (jackpot probability) depending on the game setting value. The low-probability mode win/loss table and high-probability mode win/loss table each include six win/loss tables corresponding to the six game setting values 1 to 6. The game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1 have a higher jackpot probability of the lottery result in a jackpot, which is more advantageous to the player.

For game setting value 1, of the 65,536 random number values between 0 and 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 206 (0-205) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 821 (0-820) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, for game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/318.1 (206/65,536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/79.9 (820/65,536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

For game setting value 2, of the 65,536 random number values between 0 and 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 212 (0-211) for the low probability mode win/lose table and 845 (0-844) for the high probability mode win/lose table. In other words, for game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/309.1 (212/65,536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/77.6 (845/65,536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

For game setting value 3, of the 65,536 random number values between 0 and 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 218 (0-217) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 869 (0-868) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, for game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/300.6 (218/65,536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/75.4 (869/65,536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

At game setting value 4, of the 65,536 random number values between 0 and 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 224 (0-223) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 893 (0-892) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/292.6 (224/65,536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/73.4 (893/65,536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

At game setting value 5, of the 65,536 random number values between 0 and 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 230 (0-229) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 917 (0-916) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/284.9 (230/65,536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/71.5 (917/65,536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

At game setting value 6, of the 65,536 random number values between 0 and 65,535, the number of random number values that will result in a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is 236 (0-235) for the low probability mode hit/miss table and 941 (0-940) for the high probability mode hit/miss table. In other words, at game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in low probability mode is approximately 1/277.7 (236/65,536), and the jackpot probability in high probability mode is approximately 1/69.6 (941/65,536), which is about four times that of low probability mode.

If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a random number other than the ones that result in a jackpot win, the result of the jackpot lottery will be a loss.

Here, the low probability mode win/lose table and the high probability mode win/lose table share the same random numbers that result in a jackpot in a jackpot lottery for the same game setting value, but it is also possible that the random numbers that result in a jackpot are not the same. Furthermore, the random numbers that result in a jackpot may not be consecutive values, but may be partially or entirely discrete values.

Furthermore, six low-probability mode win/loss tables and six high-probability mode win/loss tables are provided, corresponding to the six game setting values, but there only needs to be one win/loss table for each mode. In other words, the game setting values are not limited to six levels. It is also possible to provide multiple low-probability mode win/loss tables corresponding to multiple game setting value levels, while providing one high-probability mode win/loss table. In other words, it is also possible to provide multiple game setting value levels for the low probability mode, and not provide multiple game setting value levels for the high probability mode, with a uniform jackpot probability. Of course, it is also possible to provide a uniform jackpot probability in the low probability mode, and multiple game setting value levels for the high probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by one within the range of 0 to 19, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b when a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two jackpot types, the special jackpot and the normal jackpot, is set by the allocation table stored in the allocation table storage area in ROM 411.

Here, Figure 14(C) is a diagram showing an example of an allocation table. In the example shown in Figure 14(C), when the type of variable game is a first special symbol game triggered by winning in the first winning slot 314, the number of random numbers that result in a 5R special jackpot is ten numbers from 0 to 9, the number of random numbers that result in a 16R special jackpot is five numbers from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that result in a 5R regular jackpot is five numbers from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of variable game is a second special symbol game triggered by winning in the second winning slot 315, the number of random numbers that result in a 5R special jackpot is five numbers from 0 to 4, the number of fourth random numbers that result in a 16R special jackpot is ten numbers from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that result in a 5R regular jackpot is five numbers from 15 to 19. In other words, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop probability variable machine in which the probability of a probability variable jackpot is the same in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of a 16R probability variable jackpot is set higher in the second special symbol game than in the first special symbol game. That is, in the probability variable game state (high probability mode and high-frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric device 315b is high), the expected value of game balls acquired in the event of a jackpot lottery result is set higher than in the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode) or the normal game state (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric device 315b is low).

In this embodiment, individual allocation tables are set for the first winning slot 314, which triggers the execution of the first special symbol game upon winning, and the second winning slot 315, which triggers the execution of the second special symbol game upon winning. The allocation probability for the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315, but it is also possible for the allocation probability for the jackpot type to be the same for the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop probability variable machine, and it is also possible for it to be configured as a so-called ST machine, V-ST machine, type 1/2 mixed machine, etc.

Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R variable jackpot," a "16R variable jackpot," a "5R normal jackpot," or a "miss."

Here, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which the round play in which the variable prize opening 316 is opened is repeated five times during the jackpot game. Also, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which the round play is repeated 16 times during the jackpot game.

In the case of a 5R or 16R probability jackpot, after the jackpot play ends, the game transitions to a probability jackpot game state, which is a high probability mode with a high probability of winning a jackpot and a high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric device 315b. In this embodiment, the probability jackpot game state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R probability jackpot," "16R probability jackpot," or "5R normal jackpot."

On the other hand, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a time-saving game state, which is a low-probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot is low and a high-frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric device 315b is high. In this embodiment, the time-saving game state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) continues until the results of a predetermined number of jackpot lottery draws, such as 50 or 100, have been notified to the player, or ends if the player is informed that the results of the jackpot lottery draws have resulted in a jackpot before the specified number of draws have elapsed.

Incidentally, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or V-ST machine rather than a loop probability variable machine, after the jackpot game ends when a probability variable jackpot occurs, a preset number of jackpot draws (for example, 50 or 100 draws) are executed in the probability variable game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), and if the result of the jackpot lottery does not result in a jackpot by the time the specified number of draws has elapsed, the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and the high frequency support mode ends. Another possible embodiment is to conduct a draw to drop from the probability variable game state to the time-limited game state or the normal game state during variable game play. Note that if the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss, the game does not transition to the jackpot game state or the time-limited game state. In this embodiment, an example will be described in which the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpots: a 5R probability jackpot, a 16R probability jackpot, and a 5R normal jackpot; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and other jackpot types may also be considered, such as a 2-round probability jackpot, a 2-round normal jackpot, or a 16R normal jackpot.

Furthermore, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically and stored in the reserved storage area 412b when the gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stopping result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the result of the jackpot lottery is a miss. Specifically, the miss type table stored in the miss type table storage area in ROM 411 sets the values of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to three types of misses: a front-to-back miss reach, in which the final stopping symbol stops just one symbol before or after the reach symbol after a reach has occurred; a non-front-to-back miss reach, in which the final stopping symbol stops anywhere other than before or after the reach symbol after a reach has occurred; and a complete miss, in which no reach occurs.

Here, Figure 14 (D) is a diagram showing an example of a miss type table. In the example shown in Figure 14 (D), the random number value that results in a front or rear miss reach is 0 to 8, the random number value that results in a reach other than a front or rear miss is 9 to 38, and the random number value that results in a complete miss is 39 to 238. Note that in variable play resulting in a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot, i.e., in variable play that transitions to open/close execution mode, the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Here, "reach" refers to a variable state in which a decorative symbol combination indicating a jackpot is likely to occur between the time when the symbol display unit 341 starts to display a variable symbol and the time when the symbol is displayed stationary. In one example, the same symbol is displayed stationary at two of the three positions on the pay line in the symbol display unit 341, and the displayed symbol corresponding to the remaining position changes. Furthermore, during the reach variable state in the symbol display unit 341, a story presentation process is executed in which a video of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, and a player-participation operation presentation process is executed in which the player's operation of the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation. Note that during these presentation processes, the variable display in the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged form.

The electric feature release counter C4 is incremented by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 250, and is reset to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. The electric feature release counter C4 is updated periodically and stored in the electric feature holding area 412c in RAM 412 when a gaming ball enters the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the electric feature 315b will be opened for a predetermined period of time based on the value of the electric feature release counter C4 stored in the electric feature holding area 412c. For example, a win is considered when the electric feature release counter C4 is between 0 and 199, and a loss is considered when the electric feature release counter C4 is between 200 and 250.

The variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 199, and is reset to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 based on the result of the jackpot lottery. By determining the variation pattern type in this way, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a general variation game presentation type, such as high-speed variation presentation (basic presentation, non-reach presentation), normal reach presentation, super reach presentation, or special reach presentation, based on the variation pattern type (variation display time). The variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main processing described below is executed by the MPU 41, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the reserve storage area 412b when a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and a preset fluctuation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of fluctuation pattern by referencing a normal jackpot fluctuation table, a special jackpot fluctuation table, or a miss fluctuation table pre-stored in the fluctuation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these fluctuation tables may be provided separately for the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Also, special jackpot fluctuation tables may be provided separately for the 5R special jackpot and the 16R special jackpot.

Here, Figures 15(A), 15(B), and 15(C) are diagrams showing examples of a normal jackpot fluctuation table, a special jackpot fluctuation table, and a loss fluctuation table. As shown in Figures 15(A), 15(B), and 15(C), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the special jackpot fluctuation table, and the loss fluctuation table, fluctuation patterns are pre-associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The MPU 41 then refers to the normal jackpot fluctuation table when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "5R normal jackpot," the special jackpot fluctuation table when the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot" or a "16R special jackpot," and the loss fluctuation table when the lottery result is a "loss," to identify the type of fluctuation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in Figures 15(A) and 15(B), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table and the special jackpot fluctuation table, one of fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected depending on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Here, when fluctuation pattern "01" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the normal reach presentation pattern with a fluctuation display time of 30 seconds as the fluctuation type (presentation pattern type), and the normal reach presentation pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341. The normal reach presentation pattern is a presentation pattern in which the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a normal reach presentation. Furthermore, when fluctuation pattern "02" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the super reach presentation pattern with a fluctuation display time of 60 seconds as the fluctuation type (presentation pattern type), and the super reach presentation pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341. The super reach presentation pattern is a presentation pattern in which the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a super reach presentation. Furthermore, when variation pattern "03" is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines the special reach presentation pattern, which has the longest variation display time of 90 seconds, as the variation type (presentation pattern), and the special reach presentation pattern is executed on the symbol display unit 341. The special reach presentation pattern is a presentation pattern in which the final individual presentation type in the variable game presentation is a special reach presentation.

As shown in Figure 15 (C), the miss variation table defines a correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern for each stop type at the time of a miss (reach for a miss before or after, reach other than a miss before or after, complete miss) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. More specifically, if the stop type at the time of a miss is reach for a miss before or after or reach other than a miss before or after, one of the variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected depending on the value of the variation type counter CS1. On the other hand, if the stop type at the time of a miss is a complete miss, one of the variation patterns "04" or "05" is selected depending on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Note that if variation pattern "04" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach presentation pattern (non-reach presentation pattern) with a variation display time of 7 seconds as the variation type (presentation pattern type), and the non-reach presentation pattern is executed in the symbol display unit 341. Furthermore, when variation pattern "05" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach presentation pattern (non-reach presentation pattern) with a variation display time of 10 seconds as the variation type (presentation pattern type), and the non-reach presentation pattern is executed on the symbol display unit 341.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, as the variable display at the time of a loss corresponding to variable pattern "04," a variable display of a loss pattern is executed in which the variable display stops on a loss symbol without any advance notice such as the display of characters, messages, etc. Also, in the gaming machine 10, as the variable display at the time of a loss corresponding to variable pattern "05," a variable display of a loss pattern is executed in which the variable display stops on a loss symbol accompanied by advance notice such as the display of characters, messages, etc. Also, when the variable display at the time of a loss corresponding to variable pattern "05" is executed, a player-participation operation effect in which the player's operation of the operation button 20 is reflected may be executed as an advance notice effect.

The types of variation patterns are not limited to the examples shown in Figures 15(A), 15(B), and 15(C). Also, separate probability variable jackpot variation tables may be provided for the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot.

For example, in gaming machine 10, multiple types of normal reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to variation pattern "01," and one of these normal reach effects is selected and executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of super reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the super reach effects executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to variation pattern "02", and one of these super reach effects is selected and executed. The super reach effect is a reach effect with a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, and is executed to suggest to the player that the probability (expectation) of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is higher than with the normal reach effect, but lower than with the special reach effect.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 provides multiple types of special reach effects with different characters and stories as special reach effects executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to variation pattern "03," and one of these special reach effects is selected and executed. A special reach effect is a reach effect with a longer variation time than a normal reach effect, and is an effect that develops from, for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect. A special reach effect is executed to suggest to the player that the probability (expectation level) of winning a jackpot is higher than with a normal reach effect or a special reach effect.

Note that the presentation patterns corresponding to the variation patterns may include player-participation type presentations, such as presentations in which the operation status of the player on the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation, such as a single operation presentation in which a single operation is reflected in the presentation, a rapid-press operation presentation in which the player's rapid pressing of the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation, and a long-press operation presentation in which the player's long-press operation of the operation button 20 is reflected in the presentation.

Then, when the MPU 41 identifies a variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the first special symbol display unit 362 or second special symbol display unit 363 and symbol display unit 341 of the main display unit 36, it inputs a variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the result of the jackpot lottery to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, if the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot," the MPU 41 outputs one of the variation pattern commands "A01" to "A03," with an "A" added before the variation pattern "01" to "03," indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "5R special jackpot," the MPU 41 outputs one of the variation pattern commands "B01" to "B03," with a "B" added before the variation pattern "01" to "03," indicating that it is a 5R special jackpot. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "16R probability variable jackpot," the MPU 41 outputs one of the variation pattern commands "C01" to "C03," with a "C" added before the variation pattern "01" to "03," indicating a 16R probability variable jackpot. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 outputs one of the variation pattern commands "D01" to "D05," with a "D" added before the variation pattern "01" to "05," indicating a miss. This allows the voice and lamp control device 5 to determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern command, and to determine the details of the variation mode, such as the variation type and effect type, to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 based on the variation pattern and the lottery result. The voice and lamp control device 5 then causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute a variation display based on the determined details of the variation mode, plays audio from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variation display, and turns on, flashes, or extinguishes the illumination unit 27.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process to determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation display time) for the fluctuation display on the symbol display unit 341 based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation table. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured with an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the jackpot lottery. Furthermore, because the details of the fluctuation mode actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of fluctuation modes.

Here, Figure 16 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 of the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine shown in Figure 1. The game information storage area 412d stores game information related to game history, ball payout performance, etc. In this embodiment, the game information storage area 412d stores the following game information: "Number of Out Balls," "Number of Balls Paid from General Winning Port," "Number of Balls Paid from First Winning Port," "Number of Balls Paid from Second Winning Port," "Number of Balls Paid from Variable Winning Port," "Set Value," "Base Information," "Continuous Device Ratio Information," "Device Ratio Information," "Cumulative Number of Jackpot Draws," "Number of Unit Jackpot Draws," "Number of Jackpots," and "Number of Consecutive Misses." Of this game information, the "Set Value," "Base Information," "Continuous Device Ratio Information," "Device Ratio Information," and "Number of Unit Jackpot Draws" correspond to game information (performance information) related to ball payout performance.

The "number of out balls" is the cumulative number of game balls fired onto the game board 31 in normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of out balls" is stored as a count of the out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process in Figure 20, which will be described later.

The "number of balls paid out from the general prize opening" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a win at the general prize opening 313 in normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). When a win at the general prize opening 313 is detected by the ball entry sensor 313a in normal game mode, this "number of balls paid out from the general prize opening" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out from the current win when setting the prize ball command to cause the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to a win at the general prize opening 313 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of Figure 23 described below.

The "number of balls paid out from the first winning slot" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a win at the first winning slot 314 in normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). When a win at the first winning slot 314 is detected by the ball entry sensor 314a in normal game mode, this "number of balls paid out from the first winning slot" is updated to a value adding the number of balls paid out for the current win when setting the prize ball command to cause the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to the win at the first winning slot 314 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of Figure 23 described below.

The "number of balls paid out from the second winning slot" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a win at the second winning slot 315 in the time-saving play mode (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). When a win at the second winning slot 315 is detected by the ball entry sensor 315a in the time-saving play mode, this "number of balls paid out from the second winning slot" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out for the current win when setting the prize ball command to cause the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to the win at the second winning slot 315 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of Figure 23 described below.

The "number of balls paid out from variable prize opening" is the cumulative number of game balls paid out in response to a prize into the variable prize opening 316 during a jackpot game state. When a prize into the variable prize opening 316 is detected by the ball entry sensor 316a during a jackpot game state, this "number of balls paid out from variable prize opening" is updated to a value that includes the number of balls paid out for the current prize when setting the prize ball command that causes the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls corresponding to a prize into the variable prize opening 316 during the prize ball command setting process in step S1303 of the main processing in Figure 23 described below.

The "setting value" is used to select the low-probability mode hit/miss table (see Figure 14(A)) and high-probability mode hit/miss table (see Figure 14(B)) used in the jackpot lottery (hit/miss determination). In other words, the "setting value" specifies the jackpot probability in low-probability mode and high-probability mode. In this embodiment, six levels of setting value (six types of low-probability mode hit/miss tables (see Figure 14(A)) and high-probability mode hit/miss tables (see Figure 14(B)) with different jackpot probabilities) are prepared, as described below. The "setting value" is updated during the setting value change process in Figure 27, described below.

"Base information" refers to information about the "base," which is the payout rate (ball payout rate) in normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "base" is the ratio of the combined number of paid-out balls (the "number of balls paid out from the general prize slot" and the "number of balls paid out from the first prize slot)) to the "number of balls out" in normal game mode. Expressed mathematically, "base" = 100 x ("number of balls paid out from the general prize slot" + "number of balls paid out from the first prize slot") / "number of balls out." "Base information" includes information about the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the two-previous 60,000 ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the two-previous 60,000 ball base B2 are updated each time the number of balls out reaches 60,000 balls in the specific performance information update process of Figure 28 described below (steps S1805 and S1806). Specifically, the "base" when the most recent number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls is set as the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the "base" when the previous number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls is set as the second-to-last 60,000 ball base B2, and each is saved as "base information" in the game information storage area of RAM 412. Furthermore, until the counter value for the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls, it is calculated as the current base BL (step S1804), and the current base BL is saved as "base information" in the game information storage area of RAM 412. Furthermore, when the counter value for the number of out balls is calculated as the current base BL until it reaches 60,000 balls, the "base information" stores the "number of balls paid out from the general prize slot," "number of balls paid out from the first prize slot," and "number of out balls" for base calculation, in addition to the "number of balls paid out from the general prize slot," "number of balls paid out from the first prize slot," and "number of out balls" described above.

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes the "current base BL," the "previous 60,000 ball base B1," and the "previously previous 60,000 ball base B2," and the past two 60,000 ball bases are kept as history, but it is also possible to keep the past three or more 60,000 ball bases as history. Furthermore, the "base information" may also include the cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present.

The "continuous feature ratio information" is information relating to the "continuous feature ratio," which is the ratio of the number of balls paid out from variable prize slots to the total number of balls paid out from all prize slots that pay out prize balls (general prize slot 313, first prize slot 314, second prize slot 315, and variable prize slot 316). The "continuous feature ratio" can be expressed mathematically as "continuous feature ratio" = 100 x "number of balls paid out from variable prize slots" / "total number of balls paid out." The "continuous feature ratio information" is updated, for example, during the specific performance information update process shown in Figure 28, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the "continuous feature ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous feature ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. Note that "continuous feature ratio information" may be the consecutive feature ratio for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (e.g., 100), the period until a certain number of jackpot draws are executed in normal gaming mode (e.g., 1,000), or the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, "continuous feature ratio information" may include both the cumulative consecutive feature ratio and the consecutive feature ratio for a certain period.

The "role ratio information" is information relating to the "role ratio," which is the ratio of the combined number of balls paid out from the second prize slot to the total number of balls paid out from all prize slots that pay out prize balls (general prize slot 313, first prize slot 314, second prize slot 315, and variable prize slot 316). The "role ratio" can be expressed mathematically as follows: "role ratio" = 100 x (number of balls paid out from second prize slot + number of balls paid out from variable prize slot) / total number of balls paid out. The "role ratio information" is updated, for example, during the specific performance information update process shown in Figure 28, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the "role ratio information" is stored as the cumulative role ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present. The "role ratio information" may be the role ratio for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (e.g., 100), the period until a certain number of jackpot draws are executed in normal gaming mode (e.g., 1,000), or the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "continuous role ratio information" may include both the cumulative role ratio and the role ratio for a certain period of time.

The "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is the number of jackpot draws that have been performed in normal gaming mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) since the gaming machine 10 was first started before the opening of the gaming hall. In other words, the "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is also the cumulative number of times a symbol change display has been executed in the first special symbol display unit 362 of the main display unit 36 in response to a winning entry into the first winning slot 314 in normal gaming mode. The "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is incremented by one each time the symbol change display in the main display unit 36 is started in step S1606 of the change start processing in FIG. 26 (described below). The "cumulative number of jackpot draws" is also cleared from the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "unit number of jackpot draws" is the number of jackpot draws triggered by a winning entry into the first winning slot 314 (the number of times the symbol change display in the first special symbol display unit of the main display unit 36 is executed) per a certain number of minus ball difference in normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). In this embodiment, the certain number is "250 balls," and the difference balls is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the "number of balls paid out to the normal winning slot" and the "number of balls paid out to the first winning slot" from the "number of balls out." In other words, the "unit number of jackpot draws" is the number of times the first special symbol change display in the first special symbol display unit 362 is executed (the number of jackpot draws) per 1,000 yen when 250 balls are loaned for 1,000 yen at an amusement parlor. Note that the "unit number of jackpot draws" may also be the number of jackpot draws triggered by a certain number of minus ball difference in normal game mode. The "number of unit jackpot draws" is updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 , which will be described later. In this embodiment, the "number of unit jackpot draws" is stored as the cumulative number of unit jackpot draws since the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall up to the present. The "number of unit jackpot draws" may also be for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpot draws (e.g., 100 draws), a period until a certain number of jackpot draws (e.g., 1,000 draws) are executed in normal gaming mode, or a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (e.g., 60,000 balls)). Of course, both the cumulative number of unit jackpot draws and the number of unit jackpot draws over a certain period may also be stored as gaming information as the "number of unit jackpot draws."

The "number of jackpots" is the number of jackpot draws that have resulted in a jackpot since the gaming machine 10 was first started up before the opening of the amusement hall until the present. The "number of jackpots" is incremented by one each time the gaming state is transitioned to a jackpot gaming state in the gaming state transition process executed in step S1306 of the main processing in Figure 23, which will be described later. In addition, the "number of jackpots" is cleared from the gaming information storage area 412d of RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "number of consecutive losses" is the number of consecutive losses in the jackpot lottery in the normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and is cleared to 0 if the lottery result is a jackpot. When the symbol variation display on the main display unit 36 is started in step S1606 of the variation start processing in FIG. 26 described below, the "number of consecutive losses" is incremented by one if the result of the win/loss determination based on the low probability mode win/loss table in step S1603 is a miss, and is cleared to 0 if the result of the win/loss determination is a jackpot. In this embodiment, the "number of consecutive losses" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the "number of consecutive losses" may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 12, the performance information display device 4A displays "base information" and "setting values" stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in RAM 412. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a setting value display unit 45, a setting value change operation unit 46, and a ROM 47. Here, Figure 17 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 17, the performance display monitor 43 displays the "base information" of the gaming machine 10 and is located in a position that is visible when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (see FIG. 3). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of multiple (four in this embodiment) seven-segment displays 431-434 and is known as a four-digit seven-segment display. While the performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided on the main control device 4, it may also be provided on a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, or on another component of the game other than the main control unit 331. It is also possible to display the "base information" using the first special symbol display section 362 and/or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36.

The seven-segment displays 431-434 are capable of displaying the numbers "0" through "9" and the letters "A" through "F." When displaying the letter "B" on the seven-segment displays 431-434, a dot is lit to display "8." to distinguish it from the number "8," and when displaying the letter "D," a dot is lit to display "0." to distinguish it from the number "0." Furthermore, when displaying any of the letters "A" through "F," it is also possible to light up a dot to clearly indicate that it is a letter.

Of the four seven-segment displays 431-434, the performance display monitor 43 has four seven-segment displays: the left two 7-segment displays 431, 432, which are identification segments that display the "base type" as an abbreviation, and the right two 7-segment displays 433, 434, which are ratio segments that display the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41. For example, if the current base BL is 31%, the left two 7-segment displays 431, 432, which are identification segments, display the abbreviation "BL" for the current base BL as "8." and "L," while the right two 7-segment displays 433, 434, which are ratio segments, display the base value "31" as "3" and "1." In other words, the four seven-segment displays 431-434, from left to right, display "8.", "L," "3," and "1."

The performance display switch 44, when pressed, turns the power to the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431-434) on and off collectively, and is located in a position that allows easy operation when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (see Figure 3). In the illustrated example, pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44 turns the power on, and pressing the lower half turns the power off. When the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn the power on, power is supplied to the four 7-segment displays 431-434, allowing the display of base information on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, when the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn the power off, power is cut off to the four 7-segment displays 431-434, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. The performance display switch 44 may be located somewhere other than the main control unit 4.

Figure 18(A) shows an example display on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in Figure 18(A), when the performance display switch 44 is off, the seven-segment displays 431-434 are off, and the base information is not displayed. As shown in Figures 18(B) to 18(D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, the "base information" is displayed repeatedly at regular intervals in the following order: current base BL → previous 60,000 ball base B1 → previous 60,000 ball base B2 → current base BL, unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off. The example shown in Figure 18(B) indicates that the current base BL is 28%, the example shown in Figure 18(C) indicates that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%, and the example shown in Figure 18(D) indicates that the previous 60,000 ball base B2 is 32%. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 18 (A), when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the seven-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed.

The programs necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, such as programs that calculate the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2, and programs that display the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 in sequence at regular intervals on the performance display monitor 43, are stored in ROM 47 provided in the main control unit 4 separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41. This reduces the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has sufficient capacity, the programs necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in ROM 411. The programs necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may also be stored in a storage device such as a ROM provided separately from the main control unit 4.

Furthermore, the performance display monitor 43 may display other performance information stored in the game information storage area 412d, such as "continuous feature ratio information" or "feature ratio information," instead of or in addition to "base information."

Furthermore, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured with other types of display, such as a dot matrix display, liquid crystal display, or organic EL display.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 17, the setting value display unit 45 displays the above-mentioned setting values for selecting the low-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 14 (A)) and high-probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 14 (B)) to be referenced in the jackpot lottery, and is configured with a 7-segment display. Note that the setting value display unit 45 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured with other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display, LCD display, or organic EL display, and the setting values may be displayed using the performance display monitor 43.

The setting value change operation unit 46 switches the power of the 7-segment display on and off when pressed, and allows the setting value to be changed when rotated when the 7-segment display is on. The setting value change operation unit 46 functions as a contact switch that is turned on and off when pressed, and as a rotary switch that switches contacts when rotated (by a predetermined angle). Here, Figure 19 shows an example of the display on the setting value display unit 45 of the main control device.

As shown in FIG. 19(A), when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the setting value display unit 45 is off, the seven-segment display is energized and a number is displayed on the setting value display unit 45. The number displayed at this time is the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412 and indicates the current setting value. In the illustrated example, the setting value is "1." On the other hand, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the setting value display unit 45 is on, the power to the seven-segment display is cut off and the setting value display unit 45 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 19 (B), when the setting value display unit 45 is lit and the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated, the number displayed in the setting value display unit 45 changes. In the illustrated example, rotating the setting value display unit 45 to the right increases the number displayed in the setting value display unit 45, and rotating the setting value display unit 45 to the left decreases the number displayed in the setting value display unit 45. When the number displayed in the setting value display unit 45 is changed by rotating the setting value display unit 45, the changed number is saved as the setting value in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412. Therefore, if the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the number corresponding to the desired setting value is displayed in the setting value display unit 45 and the power to the 7-segment display is turned off, the number displayed immediately before the power was turned off is determined as the setting value. This allows the MPU 41 to perform a jackpot lottery based on the low-probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(A)) or the high-probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(B)) selected according to the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412.

The method for changing the setting value is not limited to rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 and then turning off the power to the setting value display unit 45. For example, the setting value may be determined by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), or by repeatedly pressing or holding the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) to change the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 and then turning off the power to the setting value display unit 45, or by inserting a key into a keyhole provided on the main control unit 4 or the like and turning the key to change the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 and then removing the key.

Here, the performance information display device 4A equipped with the setting value display unit 45 is provided in the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33. The control unit 33 is also provided on the rear side of the gaming board 31 and can be opened and closed relative to the front frame 11. Therefore, the setting value display unit 45 is provided on the rear side of the gaming board 31, and by opening and closing the control unit 33 together with the gaming board 31 relative to the front frame 11, it is possible to select between a state where it is visible from outside the gaming machine 10 (the front side of the front frame 11) and a state where it is not visible. In other words, by closing the gaming board 31 (control unit 33) relative to the front frame 11, the setting value display unit 45 cannot be seen, whereas by opening the gaming board 31 (control unit 33) relative to the front frame 11, the setting value display unit 45 can be seen. As a result, when a player plays on the gaming machine 10, the setting value display unit 45 is not visible unless the gaming board 31 is opened, preventing the player from learning the setting value from the numbers displayed on the setting value display unit 45. When the setting value display unit 45 is lit, it is turned off by pressing the setting value change operation unit 46. Therefore, by keeping the setting value display unit 45 turned off during the gaming hall's business hours, it is possible to prevent the player from learning the setting value from the setting value display unit 45, even if the setting value display unit 45 becomes visible when the gaming board 31 is opened due to a ball jam on the gaming machine 10, etc.

On the other hand, when the setting value display unit 45 is off, pressing the setting value change operation unit 46 turns it on, and the number corresponding to the setting value is hidden. Therefore, outside of the gaming hall's business hours, by opening the gaming board 31 to the front frame 11 and pressing the setting value change operation unit 46, the setting value display unit 45 turns on, allowing the setting value to be confirmed based on the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45, and the setting value can be changed by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46. This ensures the confidentiality of the setting value during business hours, while allowing the setting value to be changed outside of business hours with a simple operation.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in Figure 12, the sub-control unit 332 is equipped with a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and performs pattern change display and performance display in the pattern display section 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331.

[Audio and lamp control device 5]
The voice and lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51 and an input/output I/F 52. The MPU 51 is a computing device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 51 also includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are pre-stored. ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds and lamp flashing patterns used in variable game presentations, jackpot game presentations, etc. RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by MPU 51. Note that RAM 512 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

The audio and lamp control device 5 inputs commands (control signals) to the display control device 6 based on commands (control signals) input from the main control device 4 by using the MPU 51 to execute processing in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM 511, thereby controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341. The audio and lamp control device 5 also controls the playback audio output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, when executing the variable game presentation and jackpot game presentation described below, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the playback audio output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52. Commands such as a variation pattern command, first hold command, second hold command, and shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5. The voice lamp control device 5 also outputs display variation pattern commands and the like to the display control device 6. Note that another possible embodiment is a configuration in which the display control device 6 receives commands from the main control device 4 and inputs those commands to the voice lamp control device 5. Another possible embodiment is a configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 includes a single control device that has the functions of both the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The input/output I/F 52 is also connected to the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27. In the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the audio output from the speaker 26, the flashing pattern of the illumination unit 27, the up and down movement of the stopper unit 383 of the game ball retention unit 38, the 7-segment display unit 39, and the like, based on commands input from the main control device 4. The MPU 51 controls the up and down movement of the stopper unit 383 of the game ball retention unit 38, thereby selecting a state in which game balls (special out balls) that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37 are retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention unit 38, and a state in which game balls (special out balls) retained in the retention lane 381 are discharged via the discharge lane 382. The MPU 51 also controls the lighting and extinguishing of each of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39. In addition, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the operation switch 20a. This allows the MPU 51 to detect when an operation is performed on the operation button 20, and based on the detection results, it can also control image game effects executed by the symbol display unit 341, audio output effects in which sound is output from the speaker 26, and lamp effects based on the flashing pattern of the illumination unit 27.

The MPU 51 performs predetermined calculations based on commands such as the variation pattern command, first hold command, second hold command, and shift command input from the main control unit 4.

Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 determines the variation pattern (decorative symbol stop symbol combination (see Figure 38 (A)), variation display time, variation type (see Figure 38 (B))) and presentation pattern type (see Figures 39 (A) to 37 (C)) based on the variation pattern command, sends a display variation pattern command corresponding to that variation pattern to the display control device 6 (see step S2105 in the command determination process in Figure 37), and starts the pattern variation display in the symbol display unit 341. At this time, if the variation pattern command indicates a miss, the symbol display unit 341 displays the decorative symbol combination corresponding to the miss.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display unit 341 based on commands (control signals) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display unit 341 based on display variation pattern commands input from the voice lamp control device 5, thereby executing pattern variation display and performance display.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output I/F 62, to which the voice and lamp control device 5 and the pattern display unit 341 are connected. Note that bidirectional communication may be possible between the voice and lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is a computing device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and has built-in ROM 611 and RAM 612. The display control device 6 also has built-in other circuits, such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing in accordance with control programs stored in the ROM 611 and elsewhere. Some or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may also be executed by electronic circuits.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 stores multiple types of images, such as decorative symbols and other variable symbols used in the variable symbol display on the symbol display unit 341, preview effect images, reach effect images, jackpot effect images, and miss effect images. The images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 include still images and videos. The ROM 611 also stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the type of image to be used, the display timing, and the variable display time of the variable symbol. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays images on the symbol display unit 341 in accordance with the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing the variable symbol display and effect display.

RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by MPU 61. Note that RAM 612 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Dispensing control device 7]
The dispensing control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71 and an input/output I/F 72. The MPU 71 is a computing device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 also has a built-in ROM 711 and RAM 712.

ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are pre-stored. RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by MPU 71. RAM 712 may also be a non-volatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the payout control device 7 and outputs control signals from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the input/output I/F 72 is connected to the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100.

As mentioned above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and is equipped with a drive unit 132a, such as a motor, that drives a ball stopping member that switches between paying out and not paying out game balls, and a payout sensor 132b that detects each game ball being paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out any number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection results from the payout sensor 132b. The payout control device 7 also has a state recovery switch 73. The state recovery switch 73 is operated, for example, to clear the ball jam (return to normal operation) when a payout error such as ball jamming occurs in the payout device 132.

The ball dispensing device 100 is installed in an island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball dispensing device 100 can dispense and lend to a player a number of gaming balls equivalent to a preset amount within the range of amounts stored on a recording medium such as a card inserted into the ball dispensing device 100 in response to the operation of a ball dispensing operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. Specifically, when a control signal indicating the dispensing of a predetermined number of gaming balls is input from the ball dispensing device 100 to the payout control device 7, the MPU 71 controls the payout device 132 to dispense the predetermined number of gaming balls. The recording medium is not limited to a card; it may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium with an integrated IC chip. The ball dispensing device 100 may also be capable of dispensing a predetermined number of gaming balls according to the amount of cash inserted.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the operation of the game ball launching mechanism 32. Specifically, while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeder 322 of the game ball launching mechanism 32, thereby supplying game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launch rail 321. The launch control IC 81 then detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launching mechanism 32 in accordance with the amount of operation, thereby launching the game balls on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeder 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset cycle (e.g., 0.6 seconds) as a drive signal. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, one game ball is launched toward the play area every 0.6 seconds.

The launch handle 22 is also equipped with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation by the player, and a voltage is input to the launch control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 adjusts the voltage applied to the solenoid 323 based on the voltage value input according to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 so that the greater the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22, the stronger the launch strength of the game balls from the game ball launch mechanism 32.

The launch handle 22 is also provided with a touch sensor 21a for detecting whether the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b that the player operates to stop the launch of the game balls at will. Using the touch sensor 21a and ball stop switch 21b, the launch control IC 81 stops the launch of the game balls by the game ball launch mechanism 32 when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is detected to be operated by the player. This prevents play when the launch handle 22 is not being touched, for example, by fixing the launch handle 22 in a rotating position. The player can also stop the launch of the game balls by operating the ball stop switch 21b with their thumb or other device at any time while rotating the launch handle 22.

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a +12V voltage for driving various sensors, drive units, etc., and a +5V voltage for the logic used in the control device. The power supply control device 9 then supplies the generated +12V or +5V voltage to the main control device 4, audio and lamp control device 5, display control device 6, payout control device 7, launch control device 8, etc.

The power supply control device 9 is also provided with a power switch 90 for turning the power supply to the gaming machine 10 ON/OFF, and a RAM erase switch 91 that is operated to return the gaming machine 10 to its initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

The power supply control device 9 is also equipped with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means that are charged with power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is retained for a predetermined period of time using power discharged from the capacitor. Also, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be operated for a predetermined period of time using power discharged from the secondary battery.

Furthermore, if the power supply control device 9 determines that the power supply has been cut off, it inputs a power outage signal to the main control device 4, voice lamp control device 5, dispensing control device 7, etc. For example, if the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset 24V DC voltage based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, it will determine that a power outage has occurred if that DC voltage falls below the preset 22V. Note that when the main control device 4, voice lamp control device 5, dispensing control device 7, etc. receive a power outage signal from the power supply control device 9, they will interrupt the control they are currently performing and execute a specified NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main control device 4]
Next, with reference to Figures 20 to 33, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 executes a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, a main timer interrupt process that is started periodically, and an NMI interrupt process that is executed in the event of a power outage. Note that in this embodiment, a description of the startup process, NMI interrupt process, etc. will be omitted, and only the main timer interrupt process and main process will be described. Furthermore, in the startup process, it is confirmed whether the RAM 412 is operating normally, and execution of the main timer interrupt process is permitted on the condition that the RAM 412 is operating normally.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main control device 4]
20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure for main timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, every 2 msec. The main timer interrupt processing will be described below with reference to FIG. 20.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 20 , in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process to determine the detection status of sensors connected to the main control device 4. For example, the MPU 41 determines the detection status of the ball entry sensors 313a-317a, the out ball sensor 318a, and the special out ball sensor 384. If the MPU 41 detects a game ball entering any of the ball entry sensors 313a-317a, it stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information. Furthermore, if the MPU 41 detects an out ball by the out ball sensor 318a, it adds one to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to update the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d. Furthermore, if the MPU 41 detects a special out ball by the special out ball sensor 384, it sets a special out ball detection command and stores the special out ball detection command in the RAM 412.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Step S1003>
Next, in step S1003, the MPU 41 executes updates to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to each of the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
Thereafter, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process in response to a win in the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315 (step S1004), and executes a launch control process (step S1005). Details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, the launch control process is a process that enables the launch of game balls on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch has not been operated. The launch control process also disables the launch of game balls when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b has been operated. When the launch of game balls is enabled, the MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game balls.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 executes a through-gate process in which a normal win lottery is executed to determine whether or not the electric role device 315b of the second winning slot 315 is set to an electric role open state based on the normal win random number counter C4 stored in the electric role reserve area 412c. Specifically, in the through-gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the high-frequency support mode based on the high-frequency support mode flag. Then, when the high-frequency support mode is not active, the MPU 41 determines a normal win when the normal win random number counter C4 is between 0 and 29, and determines a loss when the normal win random number counter C4 is between 30 and 249. Furthermore, when the high-frequency support mode is active, the MPU 41 determines a normal win when the normal win random number counter C4 is between 0 and 199, and determines a loss when the normal win random number counter C4 is between 200 and 249. When the MPU 41 determines that a normal win has occurred in the through gate process, it opens the electric device 315b for a predetermined time, thereby enabling a win in the second winning hole 315 at the upper right of the game board 31 where the electric device 315b is arranged.

[Start-up winning process]
Here, Fig. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of Fig. 20. The start winning process will be described below with reference to Fig. 21.

<Step S1101>
21, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a prize has been won at the first prize slot 314. If the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been won at the first prize slot 314 (step S1101: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1102, and if the MPU 41 determines that a prize has not been won at the first prize slot 314 (step S1101: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the reservation number N stored in the reservation number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum reservation number (4 in this embodiment). If the reservation number N is the maximum reservation number (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1106. On the other hand, if the reservation number N is not the maximum reservation number (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the reservation number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 acquires the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of Figure 20, and the variable type counter CS1, which is updated in the main processing described below (steps S1302 and S1312 of Figure 23), and stores the counter values in the first empty reserve area among the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 of the first reserve storage area REA of the reserve storage area 412b in RAM 412.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 checks the content of the win/loss information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 before it becomes the subject of judgment of whether or not it is a jackpot in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described later, and executes a first hold command setting process to set the first hold command in RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. The details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 22.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a win has been made at the second winning slot 315. If the MPU 41 determines that a win has been made at the second winning slot 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107. If the MPU 41 determines that a win has not been made at the second winning slot 315 (step S1106: No), the MPU 41 ends the initial winning process and proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether the reserved number M stored in the reserved number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum reserved number (4 in this embodiment). If the reserved number M is the maximum reserved number (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and proceeds to step S1005 in Fig. 20. On the other hand, if the reserved number M is not the maximum reserved number (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the reserved number M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 acquires the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of Figure 20, and the variable type counter CS1, which is updated in the main processing described below (steps S1302 and S1312 of Figure 23), and stores the counter values in the first empty holding area among the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB of the holding storage area 412b in RAM 412.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 executes a second reserved command setting process in which the content of the win/loss information for the second reserved command acquired in step S1109 is confirmed before the information is used to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described below, and sets a second reserved command in RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Here, the second reserved command setting process is the same as the first reserved command setting process described below with reference to FIG. 22, so a detailed description will be omitted. Note that the second reserved command setting process can be performed by replacing the "first reserved command" with the "second reserved command" and the "reserved number N" with the "reserved number M" in the first reserved command setting process in FIG. 22.

[First pending command setting process]
22 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first pending command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 of the start winning process in FIG. 21. The first pending command includes information indicating that the command is the first pending command, as well as information such as the type of the first pending command (jackpot type or miss), the fluctuation pattern, and the number of pending commands N. The first pending command setting process will be explained below with reference to FIG. 22.

<Step S1201>
As shown in Figure 22, the MPU 41 reads the reserved number N from the reserved number memory area NAA of the first reserved storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first reserved number from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode is the high probability mode, and if the mode is the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203, and if the mode is not the high probability mode (step S1202: No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode is the high probability mode based on a high probability mode flag that is set to ON when transitioning to the high probability mode in a game state transition process (step S1306 in FIG. 23) in the main process described below, and is set to OFF when transitioning from the high probability mode to another game state such as a jackpot game state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads out the high-probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 14(B)) saved in accordance with the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change processing of FIG. 27 described later, and performs a hit/miss determination based on the high-probability mode hit/miss table to determine whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out in step S1201 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads out the low-probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 14(A)) saved in accordance with the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change processing of FIG. 27 described later, and performs a hit/miss determination based on the low-probability mode hit/miss table to determine whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out in step S1201 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win.

In steps S1203 and S1204, the pass/fail determination is performed based on the high probability mode pass/fail table or low probability mode pass/fail table saved according to the setting value in step S1712 of the setting value change process in Figure 27 described below. However, in steps S1203 or S1204, the setting value saved in step S1710 of the setting value change process in Figure 27 described below can be read, and the high probability mode pass/fail table or low probability mode pass/fail table corresponding to that setting value can be selected one by one to perform the pass/fail determination.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win. If the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot win (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206. If the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 does not correspond to a jackpot win (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads out the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, if the win/loss information is stored in the third reserve area REA3 in step S1104 in the start-up winning process of Figure 21, the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 included in the win/loss information stored in the third reserve area REA3 are read out. Note that the reserve area in which the win/loss information is stored in step S1104 in the start-up winning process of Figure 21 among the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 can be determined by the value of the reserve number N stored in the reserve number memory area NA.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the reserved number N in the first reserved command. In this way, since the first reserved command includes the reserved number N read out in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first reserved command can recognize which of the first to fourth reserved areas REA1 to REA4 the win/loss information stored in the first reserved command corresponds to by referring to the reserved number N included in the first reserved command.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a miss, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of reservations N in the first reservation command (step S1209).

The first hold command that is set to ON in the first hold command setting process is stored in RAM 412, and is erased after being sent to the voice lamp control device 5 along with other commands in step S1301 of the main process in Figure 23, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 and will be described later. Furthermore, the content of the first hold command described here is merely an example, and is not limited to what is described here, as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp content similar to the hold command. For example, it is possible that some or all of the information in the first hold command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main control device 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to Figure 23. In the main processing, main control processing for the progress of variable play and jackpot play is executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1301 to S1309 is executed as periodic processing, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S1310 to S1312 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing of steps S1301 to S1309 until the next cycle.

<Step S1301>
23, in step S1301, the MPU 41 executes external output processing to transmit output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 20 or the previous main processing to a control device such as the sub-control unit 332 or the peripheral control unit 140. For example, if commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a setting value change command, or a unit jackpot lottery count update command are set in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 transmits the command to the voice lamp control device 5. Furthermore, if a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting processing of step S1303 (described later) in the main processing, the MPU 41 transmits the prize ball command to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether a prize has been won in the general prize opening 313, the variable prize opening 316, or the like, based on the winning detection information stored in RAM 412. If a prize has been won, the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with that prize. At this time, in the normal game mode (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), if a prize has been won in the general prize opening 313 or the first prize opening 314, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out from the general prize opening or the first prize opening stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out due to the current prize. Furthermore, in the time-saving game mode (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the guaranteed variable game mode (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), if a win occurs in the second winning slot 315, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out from the second winning slot stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out from the current winning. Furthermore, in the jackpot game mode, if a win occurs in the variable winning slot 316, the MPU 41 updates the number of balls paid out from the variable winning slot stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out from the current winning.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game mode. Details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to Fig. 24, but in the variable game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed and a variable pattern command required for the variable pattern display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 sets a variable pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variable display time in the RAM 412 based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of Fig. 20, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in steps S1302 and S1312 of this process.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the jackpot game. The jackpot game control process executes control processes for the jackpot game, including an opening, an open/close execution mode, and an ending. In the open/close execution mode, the MPU 41 controls the opening and closing of the open/close door 319 to execute rounds of play in which the variable winning slot 316 is opened, the number of rounds corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery (jackpot type) that triggered the transition to the jackpot game. For example, the MPU 41 executes five rounds of play if the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R variable probability jackpot, and executes 16 rounds of play if the jackpot type is a 16R variable probability jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game control process, a round game start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting each round of play in the open/close execution mode, and an ending start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting an ending.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state based on the result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the fluctuation start process in Fig. 26 described later. In the game state transition process, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the MPU 41 transitions the game state to a jackpot game state in which an open/close execution mode is executed, a probability variable game state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a time-saving game state which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a normal game state which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, or the like.

For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 transitions the game state to the jackpot game state after the variable game that notifies the result of the lottery has ended. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag stored in RAM 412 to ON. Furthermore, when the jackpot game has ended, the MPU 41 transitions the game state from the jackpot game state to a predetermined game state depending on the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R special jackpot or a 16R special jackpot, the MPU 41 transitions the game state to the special jackpot game state after the jackpot game has ended, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R regular jackpot, the MPU 41 transitions the game state to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game has ended. Additionally, when the notification of the results of the specified number of jackpot draws has finished during the time-saving game mode, the game mode will transition to the normal game mode after the variable game mode has ended.

Furthermore, when the MPU 41 transitions the gaming state, it sets the flag for the gaming state before the transition to off, while setting the flag for the gaming state after the transition to on. For example, when the gaming state transitions from a jackpot gaming state to a probability variable gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming flag to off, while setting the high probability mode flag to on. On the other hand, when the gaming state transitions from a probability variable gaming state to a jackpot gaming state, it sets the high probability mode flag to off, while setting the jackpot gaming flag to on.

Furthermore, when the MPU 41 transitions the gaming state to a jackpot gaming state, it sets a jackpot gaming start command in RAM 412 and adds 1 to the "number of jackpots" stored in the gaming information storage area 412d set in RAM 412.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a setting value change process. In this setting value change process, a process is executed to control whether a setting value is displayed or not, or to change a setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d, depending on an operation performed on the setting value change operation unit 46. Details of the setting value change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

In addition, in this embodiment, the setting value change process is executed during the main process, but it is also possible to limit its execution to the startup process that is initiated when the power is turned on, or the period from the startup process until the game balls start being shot. This prevents the setting values from being changed after the player has started playing until the next time the power is turned on, preventing the setting values from being changed during the game hall's business hours.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes a process for updating specific performance information included in the game information. In this embodiment, the specific performance information includes the base information, the number of unit jackpot draws, the consecutive bonus feature ratio, and the bonus feature ratio. Details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes display control processing for the performance display monitor 43. In this display control processing for the performance display monitor 43, processing is executed to display the base information updated in step S1308 on the performance display monitor 43. Details of the display control processing for the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 determines whether the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, i.e., whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. If the MPU 41 determines that the timing for executing the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1301 and executes the processes from step S1301 onward. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the timing for executing the next main process has not arrived (step S1310: No), the MPU 41 repeatedly executes steps S1310, S1311, and S1312 until the timing for executing the next main process arrives, i.e., for the remaining time until the timing for executing the next main process arrives (step S1310: Yes), until the MPU 41 determines that the timing for executing the next main process has arrived.

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values.

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. After updating the fluctuation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1310.

[Variable gaming control processing]
Here, Fig. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of Fig. 23. Hereinafter, the variable game control process will be described with reference to Fig. 24.

<Step S1401>
24, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming machine 10 is in a jackpot game, and if it is in a jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the MPU 41 terminates the variable game control process, and if it is not in a jackpot game (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. Whether a jackpot game is being executed is determined based on a jackpot game flag that is set to ON when transitioning to a jackpot game state and is set to OFF when transitioning from the jackpot game state to another game state, for example, in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main processing of FIG.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a variable pattern display is in progress, and if a variable pattern display is in progress (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if a variable pattern display is not in progress (step S1402: No), the process proceeds to step S1406. For example, whether or not a variable pattern display is in progress is determined based on a variable display in progress flag that is set to ON when the variable display starts in step S1606 in the variable start processing of FIG. 26 described later, and is set to OFF in step S1405 of the variable game control processing when the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes).

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the pattern variable display, and if it determines that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), it proceeds to step S1404, and if it determines that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), it terminates the variable game control processing.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
If the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 stops and displays a pattern corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game in the first special pattern display section 362 or the second special pattern display section 362 of the main display section 36 (step S1404), and sets the variable display in progress flag to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
If the variable symbol display is not in progress (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NAA of the reserved storage area 412b and the reserved number M stored in the reserved number storage area NAB are both 0 (step S1406). Here, if the MPU 41 determines that both the reserved number N and the reserved number M are 0 (step S1406: Yes), it terminates the variable game control process. On the other hand, if either the reserved number N or the reserved number M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a data setting process for the winning/losing information data stored in the reserved storage area 412b. When the MPU 41 completes the process in step S1407, the process proceeds to step S1408. Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a variable start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute a variable display based on the winning/losing information, and ends the variable game control process. Details of the variable start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

[Data setting process]
25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of Fig. 24. The data setting process will be described below with reference to Fig. 25.

<Step S1501>
25, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether the reserved number M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0 or not, and if the reserved number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1502. On the other hand, if the reserved number M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
If the reserved number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NAA (step S1502) and moves the pass/fail information from the first reserved area REA1 to the execution area AE (step S1503). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the pass/fail information in the second reserved area REA2 to the fourth reserved area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the pass/fail information in the second reserved area REA2 is moved to the first reserved area REA1, the pass/fail information in the third reserved area REA3 is moved to the second reserved area REA2, and the pass/fail information in the fourth reserved area REA4 is moved to the third reserved area REA3. When the processing of step S1504 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 is performed when the reservation number M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 is performed when both or either of the reservation number M and reservation number N is not 0 in step S1406 of Fig. 24 (step S1406: No). Therefore, when the reservation number M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the reservation number N is not 0, and therefore executes the processing of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the reserved number M stored in the reserved number storage area NAB (step S1505) and moves the win/loss information from the first reserved area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Next, the MPU 41 shifts the win/loss information in the second reserved area REB2 to the fourth reserved area REB4 by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the MPU 41 moves the win/loss information in the second reserved area REB2 to the first reserved area REB1, moves the win/loss information in the third reserved area REB3 to the second reserved area REB2, and moves the win/loss information in the fourth reserved area REB4 to the third reserved area REB3. When the processing of step S1507 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a shift command indicating that the win/lose information for the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 or the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 has shifted. The shift command set in step S1508 is then transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41. This changes the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display unit 341, etc. When the process of step S1508 is completed, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and proceeds to step S1408 in FIG. 24.

[Fluctuation start processing]
Here, Fig. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of Fig. 24. The fluctuation start processing will be described below with reference to Fig. 26.

<Step S1601>
26, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming state is in the high-probability mode. Whether the gaming state is in the high-probability mode is determined based on whether the high-probability mode flag, which is set to ON in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23, is set to ON. If the gaming state is in the high-probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1602. If the gaming state is not in the high-probability mode (step S1601: No), i.e., if the gaming state is in the low-probability mode, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit/miss information stored in the execution area AE of the reserved storage area 412b is a value corresponding to a jackpot win, based on the high-probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 14(B)) saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change processing of FIG. 27 described later. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit/miss information stored in the execution area AE of the reserved storage area 412b is a value corresponding to a jackpot win, based on the low-probability mode hit/miss table (see FIG. 14(A)) saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change processing of FIG. 27 described later.

In steps S1602 and S1603, the pass/fail determination is performed based on the high probability mode pass/fail table or low probability mode pass/fail table saved according to the setting value in step S1712 of the setting value change process in Figure 27 described below. However, in steps S1602 and S1603, the setting value saved in step S1710 of the setting value change process in Figure 27 described below may be read, and the high probability mode pass/fail table or low probability mode pass/fail table corresponding to that setting value may be selected one by one to perform the pass/fail determination.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variation display time of the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation game in the variation display time counter. Specifically, if the result of the hit/miss determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal jackpot, the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 15A). Also, if the result of the hit/miss determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a probability variable jackpot, the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variable jackpot variation table (see FIG. 15B). Furthermore, if the result of the hit/miss determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a miss, the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the miss variation table (see FIG. 15C).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets a fluctuation pattern command including the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the fluctuation game and the fluctuation pattern specified in step S1604 in the RAM 412. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main processing (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 executes the symbol fluctuation display by the symbol display unit 341 based on the fluctuation pattern command.

As mentioned above, when the lottery result is a "normal jackpot," the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 as a variation pattern command one of "A01" to "A03," which is a variation pattern "01" to "03" with an "A" added to it, indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot. Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "5R variable probability jackpot," the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 as a variation pattern command one of "B01" to "B03," which is a variation pattern "01" to "03" with an "B" added to it, indicating that it is a 5R variable probability jackpot. Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "16R variable probability jackpot," the MPU 41 sets in RAM 412 as a variation pattern command one of "C01" to "C03," which is a variation pattern "01" to "03" with an "C" added to it, indicating that it is a 16R variable probability jackpot. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 sets one of the variation patterns "01" to "08" with a "D" added to indicate a miss, "D01" to "D08," as a variation pattern command in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "miss," the MPU 41 includes information in the variation pattern command as to whether the result is a reach for a miss before or after, a reach other than a miss before or after, or a complete miss.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the variable symbol display on the main display unit 36 and ends the variable symbol start process. When the MPU 41 starts the variable symbol display on the main display unit 36, it sets a variable symbol display in progress flag to ON. This variable symbol display in progress flag is referenced in step S1402 of the variable symbol game control process of FIG. 24 to determine whether the variable symbol display on the main display unit 36 is currently in progress. When the MPU 41 starts the variable symbol display on the main display unit 36, it adds 1 to the "cumulative number of jackpot lottery draws" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Furthermore, when the result of the win/loss determination based on the low-probability mode win/loss table in step S1603 is a miss, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "number of consecutive misses" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and when the win/loss result is a jackpot, it clears the "number of consecutive misses" to 0.

[Setting value change process]
Fig. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the setting value change process executed in step S1307 of the main process in Fig. 23. The setting value change process will be described below with reference to Fig. 27.

<Step S1701>
27, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a pattern change is being displayed, and if a pattern change is being displayed (step S1701: Yes), the setting value change process is terminated, and if a pattern change is not being displayed (step S1701: No), the process proceeds to step S1702. For example, whether or not a pattern change is being displayed is determined based on the change display flag that is set to ON in step S1606 of the change start process in FIG.

<Step S1702>
If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game is in a jackpot game state (step S1702), and if the game is in a jackpot game state (step S1702: Yes), the setting value change process is terminated, and if the game is not in a jackpot game state (step S1702: No), the process proceeds to step S1703. For example, whether or not the game is in a jackpot game state is determined based on the jackpot game state flag that is set to ON in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23 .

<Step S1703>
If the game is not in a state where a symbol variation is being displayed or a jackpot is being played (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703), i.e., whether an operation to turn on the setting value display unit 45 has been performed using the setting value change operation unit 46. In other words, in this embodiment, if the game is in a state where a symbol variation is being displayed (step S1701: Yes) or a jackpot is being played (step S1702: Yes), the setting value is not displayed and cannot be changed. Here, if the power of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1704. If the power of the setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 (described later) (step S1704) and displays a number indicating the read setting value on the setting value display unit 45 (step S1705). This allows the current setting value to be confirmed. The MPU 41 then sets a setting value display flag to on, indicating that the setting value is being displayed on the setting value display unit 45 (step S1706), and terminates the setting value change process.

<Step S1707>
If the power of the setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the setting value display flag is set to on (step S1707). The setting value display flag indicates that a setting value is being displayed on the setting value display unit 45, as described above, and is set to on in step S1706. If the setting value display flag is set to on (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1708. If the setting value display flag is set to off (step S1707: No), i.e., if the setting value display unit 45 is off and the power is not being turned on, the MPU 41 ends the setting value change process.

<Step S1708>
If the setting value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether a rotation operation to change a setting value has been performed. If the setting value change operation unit 46 has been rotated a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1709. If the setting value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
When the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process (step S1709) to change the display on the setting value display unit 45. For example, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the right, the MPU 41 displays a number that is one larger than the number that was displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before the rotation. Conversely, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the left, the MPU 41 displays a number that is one smaller than the number that was displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before the rotation.

If the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before rotation is "6" and the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 will change to "1." If the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 before rotation is "1" and the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle, the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 will change to "6." Also, if the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is "6," it may be configured to not rotate further to the right, and if the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 is "1," it may be configured to not rotate further to the left.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites the setting value in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412 with the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 as the setting value, and ends the setting value change process. As a result, when the power of the setting value change operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the setting value stored in RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412 as the valid setting value. Therefore, by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 to change the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45, the setting value stored in RAM 412 is changed. Then, by turning off the power of the setting value display unit 45 while the number corresponding to the desired setting value is displayed on the setting value display unit 45, the setting value can be confirmed.

<Step S1711>
If the setting value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711), i.e., whether an operation to turn off the power of the setting value display unit 45 has been performed on the setting value change operation unit 46. If the power of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1712. If the power of the setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from on to off (step S1711: No), the MPU 41 terminates the setting value change process. Note that if the power of the setting value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the power to the 7-segment display of the setting value display unit 45 is cut off, causing the numbers indicating the setting value to turn off, and the setting value is confirmed as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 selects a low-probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(A)) and a high-probability mode win/loss table (see FIG. 14(B)) according to the setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710, and stores them in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag to off, and ends the setting value change process.

Here, in step S1712, a low probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 14(A)) and a high probability mode win/loss table (see Figure 14(B)) are selected according to the setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412. In other words, because win/loss tables with the same setting values are selected for the low probability mode win/loss table and the high probability mode win/loss table, changing the setting values is easy. However, it is also possible to change the setting values for low probability mode and high probability mode individually. In this case, it is possible to set different levels (numerical values) of setting values for low probability mode and high probability mode, for example, setting the setting value for low probability mode to "1" and the setting value for high probability mode to "6".

[Performance information update process]
Here, Fig. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for specific performance information update processing executed in step S1308 in the main processing of Fig. 23. Fig. 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update processing of Fig. 28. The specific performance information update processing will be described below with reference to Figs. 28 and 29.

<Steps S1801 and S1802>
28, the MPU 41 reads the number of out balls for base calculation of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and determines whether the read number of out balls has reached 60,000 (step S1802). If the number of out balls has reached 60,000 (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S1805, and if the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 (step S1802: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1803.

<Steps S1803 and S1804>
If the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 (step S1802: No), the MPU 51 reads the number of payout balls for the general winning slot and the number of payout balls for the first winning slot for the base calculation of the base information (step S1808).The MPU 51 then calculates the current base BL based on the number of out balls for the base calculation of the base information read in step S1801 and the number of payout balls for the general winning slot and the number of payout balls for the first winning slot for the base calculation of the base information read in step S1803, and overwrites and updates the current base BL of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of RAM 412 (step S1804) (see FIG. 29(A)).The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 x (number of payout balls for the general winning slot + number of payout balls for the first winning slot) / number of out balls.

<Steps S1805 to S1808>
If the number of outgoing balls reaches 60,000 (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (steps S1805 to S1807). Specifically, as shown in Figures 29A and 29B, the MPU 41 shifts the base information from the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the base information for the game before last (step S1805), shifts the current base BL to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S1806), and clears the current base BL to 0 (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of payout balls from the general winning slot, the number of payout balls from the first winning slot, and the number of outgoing balls stored as base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to 0 (step S1808).

<Step S1809>
When the processing of step S1804 or S1808 is completed, the MPU 51 reads various information from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, calculates other specific performances, updates the other specific performance information to the calculated values (step S1809), and terminates the specific performance information update processing. The specific performances in this case are, for example, the number of unit jackpot lotteries, the consecutive role ratio, the role ratio, etc.

[Display control process for performance display monitor]
30 to 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1309 of the main process of Fig. 23. The display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described below with reference to Figs. 30 to 33.

<Step S1901>
30, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is a flag indicating that a current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1906 (described later) or step S1930 in FIG. 33. If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1908 in FIG. 31. If the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: NO), the MPU 41 determines whether the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902). Here, the B1 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B1 was previously displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. 31, which will be described later. If the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: YES), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1917 of FIG. 32. If the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S1902: NO), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
If the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S1902: NO), the MPU 41 determines whether the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903). The B2 display flag indicates that the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous game is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1921 of FIG. 32, which will be described later. If the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: YES), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1926 of FIG. 33. If the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S1903: NO), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S1903: NO), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from OFF to ON (step S1904). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from OFF to ON (step S1904: YES), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1905. If the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from OFF to ON (step S1904: NO), the MPU 41 ends the display control process.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1905). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Figure 29(A), "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. If the base information is the example shown in Figure 29(B), "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that the current base BL is 0% are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1906), sets the BL display time counter to display the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1907), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), as shown in Fig. 31, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 of Fig. 30 (step S1908), and determines whether the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909). If the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1910, and if the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1913.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
If the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to OFF (step S1910) and displays the previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Figure 29 (A), "8.", "1", "3", and "3" indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. If the base information is the example shown in Figure 29 (B), "8.", "1", "2", and "9" indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to on (step S1912), sets the B1 display time counter to display the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1913), and terminates the display control process.

<Step S1914>
If the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1915. If the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1914: No), the display control process ends. Note that if the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off power to the 7-segment indicators 431 to 434, thereby turning off the letters and numbers indicating the current base BL.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1915), clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S1916), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
If the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), as shown in Fig. 32, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 of Fig. 31 (step S1917), and determines whether the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918). If the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1919, and if the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S1919) and causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous game, which is included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1920). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, the four seven-segment indicators 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43 will display "8.", "2,""3," and "2," indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous game is 32%. If the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29B, the four seven-segment indicators 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43 will display "8.", "2,""3," and "3," indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous game is 33%. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to on (step S1921), sets the B2 display time counter to correspond to a certain time for which the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous time is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1922), and terminates the display control process.

<Step S1923>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1924. If the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1923: No), the display control process ends. Note that if the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off power to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, thereby turning off the letters and numbers indicating the previous 60,000 ball base B1.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S1924), clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S1925), and terminates the display control process.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
If the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), as shown in Fig. 33, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of Fig. 32 (step S1926), and determines whether the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927). If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1928, and if the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1928) and causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1929). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in Figure 29(A), "8.", "L", "2", and "9" indicating that the current base BL is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. If the base information is the example shown in Figure 29(B), "8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that the current base BL is 0% are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1930), sets the BL display time counter to display the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1931), and terminates the display control process.

<Step S1932>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1933. If the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1932: No), the display control process ends. Note that if the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off power to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, thereby turning off the letters and numbers indicating the 60,000 ball base B2 from the previous game.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S1933), clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1934), and terminates the display control process.

[Processing of the voice and lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the voice and lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to Figures 34 to 47.

In another embodiment, some or all of the processing performed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 in this embodiment may be performed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. In addition, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also performs control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, startup processing when the voice lamp control device 5 is started up, and NMI interrupt processing in the event of a power outage, but a description of these processes will be omitted.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of voice lamp control device 5]
34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes the sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process with a cycle of 1 msec, for example.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the sub-timer interrupt processing, the MPU 51 executes a display order setting process (step S2000), a counter update process (step S2001), a command determination process (step S2002), a variable game effect process (step S2003), a jackpot game effect process (step S2004), and a setting value suggestion process (step S2005).

[Display order setting process]
In the display order setting process (step S2000), the MPU 51 determines and stores (sets) the order of numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period of time by referring to game setting values (setting values) set to determine the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10. In this embodiment, the setting value suggestion process is executed during a jackpot game for a predetermined period of time, causing five numbers specifying multiple (five) game setting values (non-setting values) other than the setting value to be displayed in a predetermined order on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, in the display order setting process, the order in which the five numbers specifying the multiple non-setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set. Here, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the display order setting process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34 , and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a number display order determination table referenced in the display order setting process of FIG. 35 . Details of the display order setting process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36 .

<Step S2011>
As shown in FIG. 35 , in the display order setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether the display order setting flag is set to ON (step S2011). The display order setting flag indicates that setting of the display order of numbers specifying non-set values in a jackpot game during a predetermined period has been completed, and is set to ON in step S2016 of the display order setting process. Furthermore, the display order setting flag is initially set to OFF when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, when the auxiliary timer interrupt process is executed by enabling the auxiliary timer interrupt process during the startup process of the audio lamp control device, the order of the numbers to be displayed by segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 during the predetermined period is set (steps S2014 to S2016, described below). That is, in the gaming machine 10, the order of the numbers to be displayed by segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 during the predetermined period is set when the power is turned on.

Incidentally, the gaming machine 10 is often powered on before the gaming hall opens. Therefore, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming fixed, preventing the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and preventing the display of information on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

Here, if the display order setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2012; if the display order setting flag is off (step S2011: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2014.

<Steps S2012 and S2013>
If the display order setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the setting value change flag is on (step S2012). The setting value change flag indicates that a game setting value (setting value) that is set to determine the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 has been changed. The setting value change flag is set to on in step S2121 of the command determination process in FIG. 37 (described later). If the setting value change flag is on (step S2012: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the setting value change flag to off (step S2013) and then proceeds to step S2014. That is, in the gaming machine 10, when a setting value is changed, the order of numbers to be displayed by segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period is set. Setting the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 when a setting value is changed in this way makes it possible to determine the display order of numbers according to the setting value, thereby preventing the presentation of information on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

On the other hand, if the setting value change flag is off (step S2012: NO), the MPU 51 terminates the display order setting process.

<Steps S2014 to S2016>
In step S2014, the MPU 51 acquires a setting value from the RAM 512, and further refers to the setting value and a number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) to set the order of numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2015). Here, FIG. 36(A) is a diagram showing an example of the number display order determination table, and FIG. 36(B) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the display order described in the number display order determination table shown in FIG. 36(A) and the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39.

As shown in Figure 36 (A), in the number display order determination table, the display order of numbers is determined by a random number value selected by lottery for each game setting value 1 to 6 (setting values 1 to 6) that is set to determine the probability of a jackpot on the gaming machine 10. There are 120 random number values selected from 0 to 119, and each random number value is associated with a display order, with the same probability of selection for each display order. The display orders include display order A1 to A120 selected for setting value 1, display order B1 to B120 selected for setting value 2, display order C1 to C120 selected for setting value 3, display order D1 to D120 selected for setting value 4, display order E1 to E120 selected for setting value 5, and display order F1 to F120 selected for setting value 6. For each setting value 1 to 6, 120 display orders are set, corresponding to all combinations of numbers indicating non-setting values.

The display sequence A1 to A120 selected when the setting value is 1 specifies the order in which the five numbers "2" to "6" specifying game setting values (non-setting values) 2 to 6 other than the number "1" specifying the setting value 1 are displayed (see Figure 36 (B)). In other words, when the setting value is 1 and one of the display sequences A1 to A120 is selected according to the lottery random number value, the number "1" specifying the setting value 1 will not be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

The display order B1 to B120 selected when the set value is 2 specifies the order in which the set values "1," "3," and "6" other than the number "2" that specifies the set value 2, and the five numbers "2" to "6" that specify the set values 2 to 6 are displayed (see Figure 36 (B)). In other words, when the set value is 2 and one of the display orders B1 to B120 is selected according to the lottery random number value, the number "2" that specifies the set value 2 will not be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

The display sequences C1 to C120 selected when the setting value is 3 stipulate the order in which the five numbers "1," "2," and "4" to "6" specifying setting values 1, 2, and 4 to 6 are displayed, excluding the number "3" specifying setting value 1 (see Figure 36 (B)). In other words, when one of the display sequences C1 to C120 is selected because the setting value is 3, the number "3" specifying setting value 3 will not be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

The display sequences D1 to D120 selected when the setting value is 4 stipulate the order in which the five numbers "1" to "3," "5," and "6" specifying the setting values 1 to 3, 5, and 6 are displayed, excluding the number "4" that specifies the setting value 4 (see Figure 36 (B)). In other words, when any of the display sequences D1 to D120 is selected because the setting value is 4, the number "4" that specifies the setting value 4 will not be displayed on the seven-segment display unit 39.

The display sequences E1 to E120 selected when the setting value is 5 stipulate the order in which the setting values 1 to 4 and the five numbers "1" to "4" and "6" specifying 6 are displayed, excluding the number "5" that specifies the setting value 5 (see Figure 36 (B)). In other words, when one of the display sequences E1 to E120 is selected because the setting value is 5, the number "5" that specifies the setting value 5 will not be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

The display order F1 to F120 selected when the setting value is 6 specifies the order in which the five numbers "1" to "5" specifying the setting values 1 to 5 are displayed, excluding the number "6" specifying the setting value 6 (see Figure 36 (B)). In other words, if one of the display orders F1 to F120 is selected because the setting value is 6, the number "6" specifying the setting value 6 will not be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

Then, when the order of the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 has been set (step S2015), the MPU 51 sets the display order setting flag to OFF (step S2016) and terminates the display order setting process. That is, when the power is turned on (step S2011: No) or when the setting value is changed (step S2013: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the order of the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the game setting values 1 to 6 (setting values 1 to 6) that are set to determine the jackpot probability on the gaming machine 10.

In this way, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table. After powering on, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table by changing the setting value. This makes it possible to display numbers (non-set values) on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined order for a specified period when a predetermined condition (e.g., powering on or changing the setting) is met. Since gaming halls often power on the gaming machine 10 before opening, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming fixed, thereby preventing the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and preventing the display of information on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

In the display order setting process of this embodiment, the display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the gaming machine 10 is powered on or when a setting value is changed. However, the display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 may also be set when other conditions (predetermined conditions) are met. The predetermined conditions in this case will be described in the third embodiment below. Examples of predetermined conditions include the start of a predetermined period, the start of a jackpot game, or the start of a jackpot game open/close execution mode. Even when the display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set due to the fulfillment of these predetermined conditions, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is prevented from becoming fixed, thereby preventing the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and preventing the display of information on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the number display order determination table shown in FIG. 36(A), the probability of all number display orders being selected is the same for the same setting value, but the probability of a number display order being selected does not necessarily have to be the same. For example, the number display order determination table could be set so that the probability of at least some number display orders being selected is different from other number display orders for the same setting value. That is, it is possible to make a specific display order more likely to be selected and, conversely, make a specific display order less likely to be selected. By setting the probability of at least some number display orders being selected differently depending on the setting value, it is possible to make a specific number display order more likely or more difficult to select depending on the setting value. That is, unlike when the probability of all number display orders being selected is the same, it is possible to make it easier to identify a specific non-setting value and, conversely, more difficult to identify a specific non-setting value. This makes it possible to adjust the likelihood of a high setting value or a low setting value. Specifically, for example, when the setting value is a low setting value (e.g., setting value 2 or less), the display order of the numbers indicating non-setting values corresponding to high setting values (e.g., setting value 5 or more) may be delayed. In this case, by leaving the possibility of the low setting value being a high setting value until the end, the player's anticipation of the high setting value is aroused, while preventing the player from prematurely identifying the low setting value. This prevents a decline in interest in the game, prevents premature termination of play on the gaming machine 10, and suppresses a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10. Conversely, when the setting value is a high setting value (e.g., setting value 5 or more), the display order of the numbers indicating non-setting values corresponding to low setting values (e.g., setting value 2 or less) may be delayed. In this case, the numbers corresponding to the high setting value and the numbers corresponding to the low setting value are not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 until just before the setting value is identified as a high setting value, thereby leaving the possibility of the low setting value until just before the player realizes that the setting value is a high setting value. This allows the player to focus on whether the setting is a high value that is advantageous to the player or a low value that is disadvantageous to the player, and enjoy the thrill of the moment right up until the moment when the player realizes that the setting is high. It is also possible to make it easier to select the last display order of the numbers corresponding to the lowest game setting among the non-setting values, rather than the last display order, regardless of the setting value. In this case, the number indicating the non-setting value that is least advantageous to the player is displayed last, so until the last number is displayed, the possibility remains of the most disadvantageous non-setting value for the player and a non-setting value that is even more advantageous to the player. This makes it difficult for the player to realize that the game setting value (jackpot probability) is least advantageous to the player, which prevents the player from ending play on the gaming machine 10 early and prevents a decrease in the gaming machine's operating rate.

It is also possible to set the number display order so that numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to high settings and numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to low settings are displayed later in the order of appearance. For example, it is possible to make it easier to select a number display order in which at least one of "1" and "2" corresponding to low settings and at least one of "5" and "6" corresponding to high settings are displayed later. In this case, too, until the player grasps the setting value, there is a possibility that it is a high setting value that is advantageous to the player, or a low setting value that is disadvantageous to the player, so the player can enjoy the thrill of wondering whether it is a high setting value or a low setting value until they grasp the setting value.

Also, except when the setting value is the highest setting value (setting value 6), it is possible to set the number display order so that numbers corresponding to non-set values higher than the setting value are displayed later. For example, it is possible to set the priority of numbers indicating non-set values with a higher probability of winning than the setting value to a higher selection rate than numbers indicating non-set values with a lower probability of winning than the setting value. By displaying numbers indicating non-set values higher than the setting value later in this way, players can anticipate the possibility that the setting value is higher than the actual setting value until just before they grasp the setting value. This allows players to enjoy guessing the non-set value (setting value) while anticipating the possibility that the setting value is high until just before they grasp the setting value. Conversely, it is possible to set the number display order so that numbers corresponding to non-set values lower than the setting value are displayed later in the selection rate than numbers indicating non-set values with a higher probability of winning than the setting value. For example, it is possible to set the priority of numbers indicating non-set values with a lower probability of winning than the setting value to a higher selection rate than numbers indicating non-set values with a higher probability of winning than the setting value. By delaying the display order of numbers indicating non-set values lower than the set value in this way, numbers indicating non-set values corresponding to game set values lower than the set value remain as hidden numbers just before the set value is grasped. This leaves the final candidates for the set value as the actual set value and a game set value (non-set value) lower than that set value. As a result, the player ultimately grasps the game set value that is more advantageous to the player as the set value, improving the player's enjoyment when the set value is grasped.

In addition, regardless of the setting value, it is possible to set the number display order so that numbers corresponding to high setting values (for example, setting value 5 or higher) are displayed later in the order they are chosen. Conversely, it is possible to set the number display order so that numbers corresponding to low setting values (for example, setting value 2 or lower) are displayed earlier in the order they are chosen. In this way, by displaying numbers corresponding to low setting values earlier and numbers corresponding to high setting values later, higher setting values are displayed later. This makes it possible to keep the player hopeful that the setting value will be advantageous to them until just before they realize it, allowing them to enjoy guessing non-setting values (setting values) while hoping that the setting value may be high.

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2001), the MPU 51 updates the first stop symbol type counter, the effect pattern type counter, the variable display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the effect type counter, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach their maximum values. The first stop symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of decorative symbol that will be stopped first based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. The effect pattern type counter is used to determine the effect type (effect pattern) based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. Meanwhile, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the variable display counter. This variable display counter is used to measure the variable display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variable display time reaches 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variation display counter, it is possible to know the remaining variation display time, whether a variation is in progress, whether the variation display on the pattern display section 341 has ended, and so on.

[Command Determination Processing]
In the command determination process (step S2002), the command received from the main control unit 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, Fig. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2002 in the sub-timer interrupt process of Fig. 34.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 37 , in step S2101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 4. If the MPU 51 has received a command (step S2101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2102. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S2101: No), the command determination process ends. Commands received from the main control unit 4 are stored in an unprocessed command storage area in RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received by referencing the unprocessed command storage area. If a command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have been received in step S2101 and is to be processed, the command is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area and stored, for example, in a processing work storage area.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a fluctuation pattern command. If the command is a fluctuation pattern command (step S2102: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2103. If the command is not a fluctuation pattern command (step S2102: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2106.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols and a presentation type (presentation pattern)) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern based on the variation pattern command, a first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 38(A)), a variation type table (see FIG. 38(B)), and a presentation type table (see FIGS. 39(A) to 39(C)) previously stored in the ROM 511, and the value of the presentation type counter stored in the RAM 512. Furthermore, if the variation pattern command includes information regarding the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets a jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 5R probability variable jackpot, sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the 16R probability variable jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 16R probability variable jackpot.

The decorative symbol combinations consist of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is the first decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is the second decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the final stop symbol is the last decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed. The effect type table includes a normal reach effect pattern type selection table (see Figure 39(A)) corresponding to normal reaches, a super reach effect pattern type selection table (see Figure 39(B)) corresponding to super reaches, and a special reach effect pattern type selection table (see Figure 39(C)) corresponding to special reaches.

Figure 38(A) shows an example of a first stop symbol selection table. As shown in Figure 38(A), the first stop symbol selection table determines the decorative symbol (first stop symbol) that is first displayed in the symbol display unit 341. Note that Figure 38(A) assumes that the decorative symbols are "1" to "9," that "333" is a symbol combination indicating a probability jackpot (either a 5R probability jackpot or a 16R probability jackpot), that "777" is a symbol combination indicating a 16R probability jackpot, and that any number other than "333" or "777" is a symbol combination indicating a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability jackpot, or a 16R probability jackpot.

If the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot," the first stopping symbol is not "3" or "7," and the first stopping symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from decorative symbols other than "3" and "7." In other words, if the lottery result is a "5R normal jackpot," the symbol combinations "333" or "777," which indicate a 5R probability variable jackpot or 16R probability variable jackpot (probability variable jackpot), will not be displayed.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "5R jackpot," there is no allocation of "7" as the first stopping symbol, and the first stopping symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from decorative symbols other than "7." In other words, when the lottery result is a "5R jackpot," the "777" symbol combination, which indicates a 16R jackpot, will not be displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is a "5R jackpot," a symbol combination other than the "333" symbol combination, which indicates a 5R jackpot, may be displayed. In other words, even when the lottery result is a "5R jackpot," a symbol combination other than the "333" symbol combination, which indicates a 5R regular jackpot, may be displayed as a decorative symbol. If the lottery result is a "5R probability variable jackpot," and a decorative symbol other than "3" and excluding "7" is determined as the first stopping symbol, the MPU 51 will execute a 5R probability variable promotion effect in the jackpot game, indicating that it is a 5R probability variable jackpot.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "16R jackpot," all decorative symbols from "1" to "9" are allocated, and the first stopping symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. In other words, even if the lottery result is a "16R jackpot," a symbol combination other than the "777" symbol combination indicating a 16R jackpot may be displayed as a stopped symbol. In other words, even if the lottery result is a "16R jackpot," a symbol combination other than the "777" symbol combination indicating a 5R jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot may be displayed as a stopped symbol. Then, when the lottery result is a "16R jackpot" and "7" is determined as the first stopping symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R promotion effect during the jackpot game, indicating that the jackpot is a 16R jackpot.

Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol if the lottery result is a jackpot, it determines the second and final stop symbols to be the same as the previously determined first stop symbol. This determines the stop symbol combination that will be displayed on the pay line of the symbol display unit 341 for that game round.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is a "miss," all decorative symbols from "1" to "9" are allocated, and the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a "miss," it determines the second stop symbol based on the loss type selected based on the loss type table (Figure 14 (D)) and the previously determined first stop symbol. For example, if the loss type is a front-to-back miss reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. Furthermore, if the loss type is a reach other than a front-to-back miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol and the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. Furthermore, if the loss type is a complete loss, the second stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first and second stop symbols. The stop symbol combination of decorative symbols may be determined by the display control device 6, or only the first stop symbol may be determined by the sound and lamp control device 5, and the second and final stop symbols may be determined by the display control device 6.

Figure 38 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in Figure 38 (B), the variation type table defines the variation display time and variation type (presentation pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command. For example, a variation pattern command "A01" for which the lottery result is a "normal jackpot" and the variation pattern is "01" is associated with a variation display time of "30 seconds" and a variation type of "normal reach presentation pattern." A variation pattern command "B02" for which the lottery result is a "5R certain jackpot" and the variation pattern is "02" is associated with a variation display time of "60 seconds" and a variation type of "super reach presentation pattern." A variation pattern command "C03" for which the lottery result is a "16R certain jackpot" and the variation pattern is "03" is associated with a variation display time of "90 seconds" and a variation type of "special reach presentation pattern." Furthermore, the variation pattern command "D04", where the lottery result is "miss" and the variation pattern is "04", is associated with a variation display time of "7 seconds" and a variation type of "non-reach presentation pattern", and the variation pattern command "D05", where the lottery result is "miss" and the variation pattern is "05", is associated with a variation display time of "10 seconds" and a variation type of "non-reach presentation pattern".

Furthermore, Figures 39(A) to 39(C) are diagrams showing examples of presentation pattern type selection tables. Presentation pattern type selection tables are set for each variation type (presentation pattern). Specifically, Figure 39(A) is a normal reach presentation pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual presentation type in a variable game presentation is a normal reach presentation, Figure 39(B) is a super reach presentation pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual presentation type in a variable game presentation is a super reach presentation, and Figure 39(C) is a special reach presentation pattern type selection table that is referenced when the final individual presentation type in a variable game presentation is a special reach presentation.

In this embodiment, an example is given in which there are five types of effect types corresponding to each variation type, but there may be six or more types of effect types. Also, in Figure 39, the effect type table for when the variation type is not a reach is omitted.

In the normal reach presentation pattern type selection table shown in Figure 39 (A), "presentation pattern X1" to "presentation pattern X5" are defined as presentation pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the presentation pattern type counter depending on the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R special jackpot, 16R special jackpot, or miss). If the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (presentation pattern) is a normal reach presentation pattern, it selects the presentation pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the presentation pattern type counter from the normal reach presentation pattern type selection table depending on the lottery result. Presentation patterns X1 to X3 included in the normal reach presentation pattern type selection table are presentations in which, for example, a normal reach presentation is executed in which the decorative symbols reach a reach state after a high-speed variation presentation in which the decorative symbols rapidly fluctuate ends, and the final individual presentation type is a normal reach presentation.

In addition, the super reach effect pattern type selection table shown in Figure 39 (B) defines "effect pattern Y1" to "effect pattern Y5" as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter depending on the lottery results. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is a super reach effect pattern, it selects the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter from the super reach effect pattern type selection table depending on the lottery results. Here, effect patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super reach effect pattern type selection table are, for example, effects in which a normal reach effect is executed after the end of a high-speed variation effect, and then the final individual effect type develops into a super reach effect, which has a higher probability of winning than a normal reach effect and a longer effect execution time than a normal reach effect. The super reach effect pattern type selection table may also include a super reach effect pattern that develops into a super reach effect after the end of a high-speed variation effect without going through a normal reach effect.

Furthermore, the special reach presentation pattern type selection table shown in Figure 39 (C) defines "presentation pattern Z1" through "presentation pattern Z5" as presentation pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the presentation pattern type counter based on the lottery results. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (presentation pattern) is a special reach presentation pattern, it selects the presentation pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the presentation pattern type counter from the special reach presentation pattern type selection table based on the lottery results. Here, presentation patterns Z1 through Z3 included in the special reach presentation pattern type selection table are presentations in which, for example, a normal reach presentation and a super reach presentation are executed after the end of a high-speed variation presentation, and the final individual presentation type develops into a special reach presentation, which has a higher jackpot expectation than a normal reach presentation or a super reach presentation and a longer presentation execution time than a normal reach presentation. The special reach presentation pattern type selection table may also include special reach presentation patterns that develop into a special reach presentation after the end of a high-speed variation presentation or a normal reach presentation, without passing through at least one of a normal reach presentation or a super reach presentation.

Then, the MPU 51 sets in the RAM 512 a display variation pattern command indicating the decorative symbol combination to be stopped, which is determined based on the variation pattern command, variation type table, effect type table, and effect type counter, and the variation type (effect pattern type).

<Step S2104>
Returning to the explanation of Fig. 37, in step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The variable display time is determined according to the variable pattern information included in the variable pattern command. The variable display counter is then decremented by one in the counter update process of step S2001 in the sub-timer interrupt process of Fig. 34, and the MPU 51 can determine whether the pattern variable display is in progress, the remaining time of the variable display time, etc., based on the variable display counter. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the pattern variable display has ended when the variable display counter reaches 0.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 for specifying the stopped symbol combination and variation type (effect pattern type) of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341, and ends the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stopped symbol combination and variation type (effect pattern type) of the decorative symbols determined in step S2103. Meanwhile, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores variation images and effect images of the decorative symbols corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes variation display and effect display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the stopped symbol combination, variation type, and effect type of the decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the variable display of multiple decorative symbols (e.g., three) until a preset variable display time has elapsed, and causes the multiple decorative symbols to display statically in sequence. While the variable decorative symbols are being displayed, various effects corresponding to the type of variation (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, speaker 26, illumination unit 27, etc.

In addition, when the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, it sets the variable game performance flag to ON. This variable game performance flag indicates that a variable game performance is being executed.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating the start of a jackpot game, and is set when the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 sets the jackpot game execution flag to ON at the start of a jackpot game, as described above. If the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2107. If the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2106: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2109.

<Step S2107>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a jackpot game effect determination process (step S2107). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process for determining effects to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 and the like when the gaming state transitions to a jackpot game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines an opening effect, an ending effect, and an opening/closing execution mode effect to be executed in the jackpot game.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game presentation start flag to ON and terminates the command determination process. The jackpot game presentation start flag is a flag that starts the jackpot game presentation (opening presentation), and is referenced when determining whether or not to execute the opening presentation start process in the jackpot game presentation process in step S2004 of the sub-timer interrupt process of Figure 34.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating the start of a round game in the open/close execution mode, and is set when a round game is to be started in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of Fig. 23. Here, if the received command is a round game start command (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2110, and if the received command is not a round game start command (step S2109: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2111.

<Step S2310>
If a round game start command is received (step S2108: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a round game effect start flag to ON (step S2310) and ends the command determination process. The round game start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to start a round game effect in the jackpot game effect in step S2004 of the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command. The round game end command is a command indicating that round game in the open/close execution mode is to be ended, and is set when round game is to be ended in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of Fig. 23. Here, if the received command is a round game end command (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2112, and if the received command is not a round game end command (step S2111: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2113.

<Step S2312>
When the round game end command is received (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to ON (step S2312) and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referenced when determining whether or not to end the round game effect in the jackpot game effect in step S2004 of the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special out ball detection command. The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the gaming ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37, and is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of Fig. 20. Here, if the received command is a special out ball detection command (step S2113: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2114, and if the received command is not a special out ball detection command (step S2113: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2115.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 sets the special out ball detection flag to ON and ends the command determination process. The special out ball detection flag is referenced when determining whether or not to increment the value of the special out ball counter in step S2208 of the setting value suggestion process in FIG. 40, which will be described later.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command that indicates the start of an ending in a jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of Fig. 23. If the received command is an ending start command (step S2115: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2116, and if the received command is not an ending start command (step S2115: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2117.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, the MPU 51 sets the ending start effect flag to ON and terminates the command determination process. The ending effect start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to start the ending effect process in the jackpot game effect process in step S2004 of the sub-timer interrupt process of Fig. 34. The ending effect start flag is also referenced when determining whether or not to move the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 down from the upper limit position to the lower limit position in step S2201 of the setting value suggestion process of Fig. 40.

<Step S2117>
In step S2117, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game should be ended, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of Fig. 23. If the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2117: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2118, and if the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2117: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2119.

<Step S2118>
In step S2118, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game presentation end flag to ON and terminates the command determination process. The jackpot game presentation end flag is a flag that terminates the jackpot game presentation (ending presentation), and is referenced when determining whether or not to execute the ending presentation end process in the jackpot game presentation process in step S2004 of the sub-timer interrupt process of Figure 34. The jackpot game presentation end flag is also referenced when determining whether or not to turn off the lit segments of the 7-segment display unit 39 in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process of Figure 41.

<Step S2119>
In step S2119, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a setting value change command. The setting value change command is a command that notifies the voice and lamp control device 5 that a game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and is set in step S1710 in the setting value change processing of FIG. 27. Here, if the received command is a setting value change command (step S2119: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2120, and if the received command is not a setting value change command (step S2119: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2121.

<Step S2120>
In step S2120, the MPU 51 changes the setting value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed setting value included in the setting value change command, stores the changed setting value, and ends the command determination process. The setting value stored in the RAM 512 is read out in step S2014 of the display order setting process in Figure 35 and is referenced to determine the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39.

<Step S2121>
In step S2121, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination processing.

[Variable game effect processing]
Returning to the explanation of Figure 34, in the variable game presentation processing (step S2003) of the sub-timer interrupt processing, in the variable game that notifies the result of the jackpot lottery, when a variable pattern command is received, a variable game presentation in accordance with the presentation pattern determined in step S2103 of the command determination processing of Figure 37 is executed by the pattern display unit 341, speaker 26, illumination unit 27, etc.

[Jackpot Game Presentation Processing]
In the jackpot game effect process (step S2004) of the sub-timer interrupt process, the opening effect, ending effect, and open/close execution mode effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of step S2107 of the command determination process of Fig. 37 are executed. In this embodiment, in the ending effect, an ending additional image showing the display result on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see Fig. 47).

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In the setting value suggestion process (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt process, the up and down movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is controlled, and the lighting and extinguishing of each of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled. Furthermore, in the setting value suggestion process, a process is executed in which, as an ending presentation of the jackpot game, an ending additional image showing the display result of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the jackpot game is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Here, Figure 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion process executed in the command determination process of Figure 37.

<Step S2201>
As shown in Fig. 40, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending presentation start flag is set to ON. The ending presentation start flag is a flag that starts the ending presentation, and is set to ON in step S2116 of the command determination process in Fig. 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time for the ending presentation to start based on the ending presentation start flag. Here, if the ending presentation start flag is ON (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds with the process to step S2202, and if the ending presentation start flag is OFF (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 proceeds with the process to step S2206.

<Step S2202>
If the ending effect start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 lowers the stopper portion 383 of the game ball accumulation portion 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202). That is, the MPU 51 lowers the stopper portion 383 of the game ball accumulation portion 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position at the timing when the ending effect starts. As a result, if a game ball 99 is accumulated in the accumulation lane 381 of the game ball accumulation portion 38, the game ball 99 is moved to the discharge lane 382. At this time, the special out ball sensor 384 detects the game ball 99 being moved from the accumulation lane 381 to the discharge lane 382.

<Steps S2203 to S2205>
When the stopper portion 383 of the game ball accumulation portion 38 is lowered from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202), the MPU 51 sets a stopper portion lowering flag, indicating that the stopper portion 383 is being lowered, to ON (step S2203). The stopper portion lowering flag is referenced in step S2206 to determine whether the game balls (special out balls) accumulated in the accumulation lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. The MPU 51 then sets a lowering time counter corresponding to the time required for the stopper portion 383 to return to the upper limit position (step S2204), and further sets the ending effect start flag to OFF (step S2205), thereby terminating the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S2206>
If the ending effect start flag is OFF (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the stopper unit lowering flag, which was set ON in step S2203, is ON (step S2206). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the timing is right for the special out ball sensor 384 to detect the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381. If the stopper unit lowering flag is ON (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2207. If the stopper unit lowering flag is OFF (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2216.

<Step S2207>
If the stopper unit lowering flag is on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the special out ball detection flag is set to on (step S2207). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a gaming ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to on in step S2114 of the command determination process in Fig. 37. Here, if the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2208, and if the special out ball detection flag is off (step S2207: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2210.

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
If the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out ball counter set in the RAM 512 (step S2208) and sets the special out ball detection flag to off (step S2209). That is, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls when special out balls that entered the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37 in the jackpot game open/close execution mode are retained in the game ball retention section 38. The number of special out balls counted in this way is referenced to control the lighting or extinguishing of segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 in the 7-segment display section control process in FIG. 41, which will be described later.

<Steps S2210 and S2211>
In step S2210, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the downward movement time counter set in step S2204. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the downward movement time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2211). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is time to return the stopper portion 383 of the game ball accumulation portion 38, which is at the lower limit position, to the upper limit position.

Whether or not it is time to return the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position may be determined by whether or not a special out ball has been detected for a certain period of time, i.e., whether or not the special out ball detection flag has been off for a predetermined number of consecutive times. If the condition for returning the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position is that a special out ball has not been detected for a certain period of time, then even if there are a large number of special out balls, these special out balls can be accurately counted.

Here, if the value of the downward movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2212; if the value of the downward movement time counter is not 0 (step S2211: No), the MPU 51 terminates the setting value suggestion process.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
If the value of the downward movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 raises the stopper portion 383 of the game ball accumulation portion 38 from the lower limit position to the upper limit position (step S2212), and sets the stopper portion downward movement flag, which was set to ON in step S2203, to OFF (step S2213). This returns the game ball accumulation portion 38 to a state in which it can accumulate game balls 99 in the accumulation lane 381.

<Step S2214>
In step S2214, the MPU 51 executes a 7-segment display control process to control the on/off state of the 7-segment display unit 39. That is, for each jackpot game, at the ending of the jackpot game after a specific period has elapsed, the MPU 51 executes a 7-segment display control process to control the on/off state of the 7-segment display unit 39 in accordance with the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the crane device during the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. Details of the 7-segment display control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45.

<Step S2215>
In step S2215, the MPU 51 executes ending additional image control processing for causing the symbol display unit 341 to display, at the ending of the jackpot game, an additional image that corresponds to the on/off state of the 7-segment display unit 39. This ending additional image control processing makes it possible to confirm the on/off state of the 7-segment display unit 39 also on the symbol display unit 341. Details of the 7-segment display unit control processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S2216>
If the stopper unit lowering flag is OFF (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot game presentation end flag is ON (step S2216). The jackpot game presentation end flag is a flag that ends the jackpot game presentation, and is set ON in step S2118 of the command determination process of FIG. 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot game presentation end flag is the timing to end the jackpot game presentation (ending presentation). Here, if the jackpot game presentation end flag is ON (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2217, and if the jackpot game presentation end flag is OFF (step S2216: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S2217>
If the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the lit segments A to G on the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2217). That is, when the jackpot game effect ends, the MPU 51 turns off all segments A to G on the 7-segment display unit 39. In other words, the segments A to G on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be lit only during the ending of the jackpot game.

Segments A through G of the seven-segment display unit 39 display all or part of the numbers corresponding to game setting values (non-set values) other than the game setting values (set values) that determine the probability of a jackpot being the result of a jackpot lottery on the gaming machine 10. Therefore, each time a jackpot game is played, the player can obtain information for identifying or guessing the non-set values at the end of that jackpot game. This allows the player to identify or guess the non-set values each time a jackpot game is played, allowing the player to enjoy identifying or guessing the non-set values during jackpot games. Furthermore, by obtaining information for identifying or guessing the non-set values for each jackpot game, as the number of jackpot games increases, for example, as the number of consecutive jackpot games increases, it becomes possible to identify all (five) non-set values, and in that case, it becomes possible to identify the set values. In other words, the player can identify the set values based on the identified non-set values, thereby making it possible to guess the set values during jackpot games, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

<Steps S2218 and S2219>
In step S2218, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to OFF (step S2218). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot type flag (5R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R probability variable jackpot flag, or 5R normal jackpot flag) to OFF (step S2219), and ends the setting value suggestion effect.

[7-segment display control process]
Here, FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display unit control process executed in step S2214 of the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Steps S2301 and S2302>
As shown in FIG. 41 , in the 7-segment display control process, the MPU 51 first obtains the value of the special out ball counter, which is added in step S2208 of the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40 and stored in RAM 512 (step S2301), and determines whether the value of this special out ball counter is 1 or greater (step S2302). The value of the special out ball counter is the number of special out balls that entered the variable winning opening 316 and entered the special out ball opening 373 of the Kroon device 37 in the jackpot opening/closing execution mode. If the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or greater (step S2302: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2303. If the value of the special out ball counter is not 1 or greater, i.e., 0 (step S2302: No), the MPU 51 terminates the 7-segment display control process because there is no need to light any of segments A to G of the 7-segment display 39.

<Steps S2303 to S2307>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 reads segment display unit control information from the 7-segment display unit control information storage area (see FIG. 42A) set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5 (step S2303). The segment display unit control information is information necessary for controlling the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period (the period during which the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball port 373 of the Kroon device 37 is accumulated). The MPU 51 then determines the control content for the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display unit control information read from the 7-segment display unit control information storage area in step S2303 (step S2304), and executes control of the 7-segment display unit 39 based on this control content (step S2305). Details of the determination and control of the control content for the 7-segment display unit 39 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. Furthermore, the MPU 51 updates the already displayed information storage area (see Figure 42 (A)) of the 7-segment display unit control information stored in the RAM 512 (step S2306), clears the value of the special out ball counter (step S2307), and terminates the 7-segment display unit control processing.

Here, Figure 42 is a diagram illustrating the 7-segment display control information storage area set in RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, Figure 42(A) is a diagram showing an example of the 7-segment display control information storage area, Figure 42(B) is a diagram showing an example of the control order storage area of the 7-segment display control information storage area, and Figure 42(C) is a diagram showing an example of the initial state (unupdated) of the already displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display control information storage area.

As shown in Figure 42 (A), the 7-segment display control information storage area includes a control order storage area shown in Figure 42 (B) and a previously displayed information storage area shown in Figure 42 (C).

As shown in Figure 42 (B), the control order memory area is an area that stores the order of numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period (the period during which the number of gaming balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37 is accumulated), and the order in which segments A to G are controlled when displaying each number. This control order memory area includes a number display order memory area and a segment control order memory area.

The number display order storage area stores the order of numbers (number display order) to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period (e.g., from the start of jackpot play for a jackpot in low probability mode to the end of the open/close execution mode for jackpot play for a normal jackpot). The number display order is determined in the display order setting process of FIG. 35 described above based on the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) set for a setting value that defines the probability of the jackpot lottery result being a jackpot. In the example number display order storage area shown in FIG. 42(B), display order A1 is set based on the number display order determination table for setting value 1 in the number display order setting process described above, and the number display order on the 7-segment display unit 39 for the predetermined period is stored as "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6." In other words, unless the setting is changed during the amusement hall's business hours, the number display order is fixed for each business day, and the number display order is fixed for a predetermined period during the same business day. In this way, by fixing the number display order for a predetermined period on a business day, numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the same order each time the predetermined period begins. Therefore, numbers that appear earlier in the number display order are more likely to be displayed, while numbers that appear later in the number display order are less likely to be displayed. For example, if the number display order is "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6," the numbers are displayed in this order, so "2" and "3" are more likely to be displayed, while "5" and "6" are less likely to be displayed. This allows the setting value to be guessed and identified while preventing the setting value from being easily identified, allowing players to enjoy guessing and identifying the setting value. Furthermore, by fixing the number display order for a business day, numbers that appear earlier in the number display order are more likely to be displayed, while numbers that appear later in the number display order are less likely to be displayed. This prevents a player from recognizing the low setting after only a few initial wins, for example, when the setting value is low (when the probability of winning a jackpot in low-probability mode is low). This prevents players from prematurely ending play on the gaming machine 10 they are currently using, and helps prevent a decline in the operating rate of that gaming machine 10.

Furthermore, the more specific periods occur within a predetermined period (the more consecutive jackpots), the more numbers are expected to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, the more consecutive jackpots occur, the more non-set values that can be identified among the multiple non-set values other than the set value. As a result, the more consecutive jackpots occur, the more information can be obtained to identify non-set values, thereby narrowing down the set value candidates. Furthermore, by having 35 or more game balls 99 enter the special outlet ball port 373 of the crane device 37 within a predetermined period, the player can identify all non-set values and, as a result, recognize the set values. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing while aiming to identify all non-set values, i.e., recognize the set values. Furthermore, the player can enjoy playing while focusing on whether the consecutive jackpots will continue (whether the jackpot type is a special jackpot or a regular jackpot), thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The number display order does not necessarily have to be fixed to the order set when the gaming machine 10 is powered on or the settings are changed; it may also be determined when a jackpot game begins for a jackpot (initial win) in low-probability mode. In this way, by determining the number display order when a jackpot game, such as an initial win, begins, the number display order is determined, for example, at predetermined intervals. This makes it difficult for players to guess the number display order, reducing variation in the ranking of numbers corresponding to non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. This makes it possible to identify all non-set values with a small number of initial wins, enabling early recognition of set values. As a result, players can enjoy playing the game while hoping for numbers not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 to be displayed, based on numbers that have previously been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, with the goal of identifying all non-set values and recognizing set values.

Meanwhile, the segment control order memory area stores the control order (segment control order) of segments A through G when displaying numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39. The segment control order is fixed as follows: Segment A → Segment B → Segment C → Segment D → Segment E → Segment F → Segment G. In other words, the segment control order is not determined based on events such as powering on the gaming machine 10, changing settings, or winning a jackpot, but is fixed as an order specific to the gaming machine 10. By fixing the segment control order as an order specific to the gaming machine 10, the player can grasp the control order of segments A through G when numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. This allows the player to grasp the numbers that will be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 even before the numbers are actually displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. This allows the player to enjoy guessing numbers that have not yet been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the control order of segments A through G, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, like the number display order, the segment control order may be fixed for the same business day by being determined when the gaming machine 10 is turned on or the setting value is changed, but it is also possible to determine it for each business day. In this case, it becomes more difficult to identify numbers that have never been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 compared to when the segment control order is fixed as an order unique to the gaming machine 10. This increases the difficulty until all non-set values are identified and the set value is recognized, so that, for example, if the set value is low (when the probability of a jackpot in low probability mode is low), the player can be prevented from prematurely realizing that the setting is low. This prevents the player from prematurely ending play on the gaming machine 10 that they are currently playing.

Furthermore, the segment control order may be determined when a jackpot game for a jackpot in low probability mode begins (when a specified period begins), as will be explained in the third embodiment below.

As shown in Figure 42 (C), the already displayed information storage area is an area that stores information about numbers that have already been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a specified period, numbers that are currently being displayed, and segments A to G that have already been selected for control. This already displayed information storage area stores already displayed number flag information, currently displayed number flag information, and already displayed segment flag information.

The already-displayed number flag information is information related to a flag indicating whether a number has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a specified period. This already-displayed number flag information includes a number 1 already-displayed flag, a number 2 already-displayed flag, a number 3 already-displayed flag, a number 4 already-displayed flag, a number 5 already-displayed flag, and a number 6 already-displayed flag. The number 1 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether the number 1 corresponding to the game setting value 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a specified period. When the number 1 already-displayed flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during the specified period, and when set to off, it indicates that the number 1 has not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during the specified period. The number 2 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether the number 2 corresponding to the game setting value 2 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a specified period. When set to on, the number 2 already displayed flag indicates that the number 2 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period, and when set to off, indicates that the number 2 has not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. The number 3 already displayed flag is a flag that indicates whether the number 3 corresponding to the game setting value 3 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. When set to on, the number 3 already displayed flag indicates that the number 3 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period, and when set to off, indicates that the number 3 has not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. The number 4 already displayed flag is a flag that indicates whether the number 4 corresponding to the game setting value 4 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. When set to on, the number 4 already displayed flag indicates that the number 4 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period, and when set to off, indicates that the number 4 has not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. The number 5 already displayed flag is a flag that indicates whether the number 5, which corresponds to the game setting value 5, has been displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. When this number 5 already displayed flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 5 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period, and when set to off, it indicates that the number 5 has not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. The number 6 already displayed flag is a flag that indicates whether the number 6, which corresponds to the game setting value 6, has been displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. When this number 6 already displayed flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 6 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period, and when set to off, it indicates that the number 6 has not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period.

The display target number flag information is a flag indicating whether a number is a target number for display on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a specified period. This display target number flag information includes a number 1 display target flag, a number 2 display target flag, a number 3 display target flag, a number 4 display target flag, a number 5 display target flag, and a number 6 display target flag. The number 1 display target flag is a flag indicating whether the number 1 corresponding to the game setting value 1 is a target number for display on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a specified period. When this number 1 display target flag is set on, it indicates that the number 1 is a target number for display on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when set off, it indicates that the number 1 is not a target number for display on the 7-segment display unit 39. The number 2 display target flag is a flag indicating whether the number 2 corresponding to the game setting value 2 is a target number for display on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a specified period. When the number 2 display target flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 2 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when set to off, it indicates that the number 2 is not a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39. The number 3 display target flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game setting value 3 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. When the number 3 display target flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 3 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when set to off, it indicates that the number 3 is not a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39. The number 4 display target flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the number 4 corresponding to the game setting value 4 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. When the number 4 display target flag is set to on, it indicates that the number 4 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when set to off, it indicates that the number 4 is not a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39. The number 5 display target flag is a flag that indicates whether the number 5, which corresponds to the game setting value 5, is a target to be displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. When this number 5 display target flag is set on, it indicates that the number 5 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when set off, it indicates that the number 5 is not a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. The number 6 display target flag is a flag that indicates whether the number 6, which corresponds to the game setting value 6, is a target to be displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period. When this number 6 display target flag is set on, it indicates that the number 6 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and when set off, it indicates that the number 6 is not a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

The already-targeted segment flag information is a flag indicating whether each of segments A through G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is subject to on/off control in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a specified period. This already-targeted segment flag information includes a segment A already-targeted flag, a segment B already-targeted flag, a segment C already-targeted flag, a segment D already-targeted flag, a segment E already-targeted flag, a segment F already-targeted flag, and a segment G already-targeted flag. The segment A already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether segment A of the 7-segment display unit 39 is subject to on/off control in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a specified period. When this segment A already-targeted flag is set to on, it indicates that segment A is subject to control in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a specified period, and when set to off, it indicates that segment A is not subject to control. The segment B already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether segment B of the 7-segment display unit 39 is subject to on/off control in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a specified period. When the Segment B Already Targeted Flag is set to on, it indicates that segment B is a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period, and when it is set to off, it indicates that segment B is not a control target. The Segment C Already Targeted Flag is a flag that indicates whether segment C of the 7-segment display unit 39 is a control target for lighting/extinguishing during the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period. When the Segment C Already Targeted Flag is set to on, it indicates that segment C is a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period, and when it is set to off, it indicates that segment C is not a control target. The Segment D Already Targeted Flag is a flag that indicates whether segment D of the 7-segment display unit 39 is a control target for lighting/extinguishing during the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period. When the Segment D Already Targeted Flag is set to on, it indicates that segment D is a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period, and when it is set to off, it indicates that segment D is not a control target. The Segment E Already Targeted Flag is a flag that indicates whether segment E of the 7-segment display unit 39 is a control target for lighting/extinguishing during the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period. When the Segment E Already Targeted Flag is set to on, it indicates that segment E is a target for control in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period, and when it is set to off, it indicates that segment E is not a target for control. The Segment F Already Targeted Flag is a flag that indicates whether segment F of the 7-segment display unit 39 is a target for on/off control in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period. When the Segment F Already Targeted Flag is set to on, it indicates that segment F is a target for control in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period, and when it is set to off, it indicates that segment F is not a target for control. The Segment G Already Targeted Flag is a flag that indicates whether segment G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is a target for on/off control in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period. When the Segment G Already Targeted Flag is set to on, it indicates that segment G is a target for control in the display control of the numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period, and when it is set to off, it indicates that segment G is not a target for control.

In the initial state of the already-displayed information storage area, all flags included in the already-displayed number flag information, display target number flag information, and already-target segment flag information are set to off. Here, the initial state indicates the state outside of the predetermined period, i.e., the state at the start of the jackpot game for a jackpot (initial jackpot) in low probability mode (the start of the predetermined period in which the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37 is accumulated). In this embodiment, all flags included in the already-displayed information storage area are set to off (cleared) in step S2405 of the ending additional image control processing in Figure 46 described below if the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), i.e., if it is a normal jackpot for which the end of the predetermined period is set.

Here, Figures 43 to 45 are diagrams showing examples of control (display examples) of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the 7-segment display unit control information storage area, and examples of updating the already-displayed information storage area. Below, with reference to Figures 43 to 45, we will explain examples of control (display examples) of the 7-segment display unit 39, as well as examples of updating the already-displayed information storage area in the 7-segment display unit control information storage area.

As described above, in the 7-segment display control process of FIG. 41, the control content of the 7-segment display 39 is determined (step S2304), and the 7-segment display 39 is controlled at the end of the jackpot game in accordance with that control content (step S2305). After that, each flag information stored in the already-displayed information storage area is updated (step S2306).

The control content of the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined according to the value of the special out ball counter (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kroon device 37 during the specific period set for the jackpot game) acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 41. For example, when the already-displayed information storage area is in its initial state (see FIG. 42(C)), if the value of the special out ball counter is less than seven, some of the seven segments A through G of the 7-segment display unit 39 will be controlled to light or extinguish. Specifically, if the value of the special out ball counter is 5 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kroon device 37 during the specific period is 5), and the contents of the control order storage area are in the state shown in FIG. 42(B) and the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in FIG. 42(C) (when all flags are set to off), the five segments A through E of the 7-segment display unit 39 will be controlled to light or extinguish. If the contents of the control sequence memory area are as shown in Figure 42 (B), the number 2 will be displayed first, so segment A will be lit, segment B will be lit, segment C will be unlit, segment D will be lit, and segment E will be lit. As a result, the 7-segment display unit 39 will change from the fully unlit state (uncontrolled state) in which all segments A to G are unlit as shown in Figure 43 (A) to the partially controlled state in which segments A, B, D, and E are lit as shown in Figure 43 (B).

The change from the uncontrolled state shown in Figure 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in Figure 43(B) may be made all at once, or it may be made in stages by turning on or off each of segments A to E as the controlled object in turn. Furthermore, when turning on or off each of segments A to E as the controlled object in turn, the controlled segments A to E may be made to blink or otherwise indicate that they are the controlled objects. Of course, it is not necessary to indicate the controlled segments clearly.

On the other hand, when control of the 7-segment display unit 39 is terminated, the already-displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the 7-segment display unit 39 changes from the uncontrolled state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. 43(B), the already-displayed information storage area is updated from the initial state in which all flags are set to OFF shown in FIG. 42(C) to the content shown in FIG. 43(C). Specifically, in the display state shown in FIG. 43(B), for the number 2 initially displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, five of the segments A through G, A through E, are subject to control, while segments F and G are not. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43(C), the already-displayed number flag information indicates that none of the numbers 1 through 6 are displayed, and therefore all of the following flags remain OFF: the number 1 already-displayed flag, the number 2 already-displayed flag, the number 3 already-displayed flag, the number 4 already-displayed flag, the number 5 already-displayed flag, and the number 6 already-displayed flag. Additionally, in the displayed number flag information, the displayed number 2 flag for the number 2, which is targeted for control across five segments A to E, is set to on. Additionally, in the already displayed segment flag information, since segments A to E are targeted for control, the segment A already targeted flag, segment B already targeted flag, segment C already targeted flag, segment D already targeted flag, and segment E already targeted flag for segments A to E are set to on.

Furthermore, when the already-displayed information storage area is in its initial state (see FIG. 42(C)), if the value of the special out ball counter obtained in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 41 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kroon device 37 during the specific period set for the jackpot game) exceeds seven, at least one number (e.g., 2) is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 10 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kroon device 37 during the specific period is 10), a total of 10 segments A through G are subject to control on the 7-segment display unit 39. In other words, seven (all) segments A through G are subject to control to be turned on and off on the 7-segment display unit 39, thereby displaying the first number in the display order on the 7-segment display unit 39, and three segments A through C are subject to control to be turned on and off for the second number in the display order. Specifically, when the contents of the control order storage area are as shown in FIG. 42(B) and the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state as shown in FIG. 42(C) (when all flags are set to off), the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 because the first number in the display order is 2, followed by the number 3. Therefore, the 7-segment display unit 39 changes from the uncontrolled state in which all segments A through G are turned off as shown in FIG. 44(A) to the all-segment controlled state in which segments A, B, D, E, and G are turned on and segments C and F are turned off as shown in FIG. 44(B), displaying the number 2 on the 7-segment display unit 39. Furthermore, the segment display unit 39 changes from the all-segment controlled state in which the number 2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 44(B) to the partial-segment controlled state in which segments A through C are controlled as shown in FIG. 44(C). In the example shown in FIG. 44(C), the second number to be displayed is 3, so segments A through C are turned on.

The change from the non-controlled state shown in Figure 44(A) to the all-segment controlled state shown in Figure 44(B), and the change from the all-segment controlled state shown in Figure 44(B) to the partial-segment controlled state shown in Figure 44(C) may be made all at once, or may be made in stages by sequentially lighting or extinguishing segments A through G or segments A through C. Furthermore, when lighting or extinguishing segments A through G or segments A through C sequentially, the segments being controlled may be made to blink or otherwise indicate that they are under control. Of course, it is not necessary to clearly indicate the segments being controlled.

In addition, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled, the already-displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the 7-segment display unit 39 changes from the uncontrolled state shown in FIG. 44(A), through the all-segment controlled state shown in FIG. 44(B), to the partial-segment controlled state shown in FIG. 44(C), the already-displayed information storage area is updated from the initial state shown in FIG. 42(C) in which all flags are set to OFF, through the contents shown in FIG. 45(A) and FIG. 45(B), and finally to the contents shown in FIG. 45(C). Specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 44(B), for the number 2 initially displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, all segments A through E of segments A through G are subject to control. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45(A), in the already-displayed segment flag information, all already-targeted flags for segments A through G are set to ON. When all the target flags for segments A through G are set to on, the control to display the number 2 has ended. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45(B), the number 2 already displayed flag is set to on in the already displayed number flag information. In the currently displayed number flag information, the currently displayed number 2 flag is set to off, while the currently displayed number 3 flag is set to on. Then, in the already displayed segment flag information, all the target flags for segments A through G are set to off. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 45(C), in the already displayed segment flag information, the segment A already targeted flag, segment B already targeted flag, and segment C already targeted flag for segments A through C are set to on. In other words, each time all the target flags in the already displayed segment flag information are set to on (each time seven segments A through G are targeted for control), the already displayed flag for the number that was the target for display in the already displayed number flag information is set to on, the display target flag for the number that was the target for display in the currently displayed number flag information is set to off, while the display target flag for the next number to be displayed is set to on.

As described above, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled in accordance with the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display unit control information, thereby displaying all or part of the numbers corresponding to game setting values (non-set values) other than the game setting values (set values) that determine the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery on the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot. This allows the player to identify or guess the non-set values based on the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39, and as a result, to recognize the set values.

Some gaming machines, like gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, have multiple setting values with different probabilities of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery, and the setting value can be selected by the gaming parlor. In this case, the gaming parlor will want to set the setting value low to reduce the expected value of ball payouts. Furthermore, if the setting value is set low, they tend to prefer gaming machines whose setting value is not known to players, to avoid players quitting play if they realize that the setting value is low.

On the other hand, players want to play on gaming machines 10 with higher expected payout values, and for gaming machines with set values, they want the gameplay to be such that they can guess (narrow down to multiple set values) or recognize the set value. In this way, gaming parlors and players tend to have conflicting expectations when it comes to gaming machines that suggest or clearly state game set values.

In contrast, in this embodiment, during a specific period from the start of the initial jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot open/close execution mode, among the game balls 99 that enter the variable prize winning opening 316, game balls (special out balls) that enter the special out ball opening 373 of the crane device 37 are retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention unit 38. Then, after the specific period has elapsed, the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) retained in the retention lane 381 is counted, and segments A through G of the 7-segment display unit 39 corresponding to the count are controlled. In other words, unless the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the game transitions to jackpot game, segments A through G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are not controlled or lit. Therefore, the setting value is not inferred or recognized unless the game transitions to jackpot game.

Furthermore, game balls 99 are unlikely to enter the special outlet ball opening 373 of the crane device 37. For example, one to two game balls 99 are expected to enter a single 16R jackpot game (approximately one for every 10R of round play). Therefore, it is difficult for the 7-segment display unit 39 to identify or estimate a non-set value during a single jackpot game. Meanwhile, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled based on the cumulative number of game balls 99 that have entered the special outlet ball opening 373 of the crane device 37 during a predetermined period from the start of the jackpot game (opening), which is triggered by a jackpot result in the low-probability mode, to the end of the opening/closing execution mode (start of the ending) during the normal jackpot game. In other words, if the first jackpot is a probability jackpot, the predetermined period will not end as long as consecutive jackpots continue in the high-probability mode, but will continue until the end of the opening/closing execution mode during the normal jackpot game when a normal jackpot is won. That is, in this embodiment, while the gameplay is such that it is not easy to recognize the non-set value and therefore the set value, the longer the jackpot series continues in the high-probability mode, the more game balls 99 are expected to enter the special outlet ball opening 373 of the crane device 37, making it possible to more accurately estimate the non-set value (set value). If 35 or more game balls 99 enter the special outlet ball opening 373 in a predetermined period, the non-set value (set value) can be reliably identified. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 displays information that allows the set value to be estimated based on the number of specific conditions that are met in a predetermined period, i.e., the number of game balls that enter the special outlet ball opening 373 of the crane device 37 in a predetermined period. Since the expected number of game balls 99 entering the special outlet ball opening 373 is low in the case of a single jackpot, the gameplay is such that it is difficult to estimate or recognize the non-set value (set value). On the other hand, in the case of consecutive jackpots, if the number of consecutive jackpots is small, it is difficult to guess or recognize the non-set value (set value). However, as the number of consecutive jackpots increases, the expected number of game balls 99 entering the special outlet ball opening 373 increases, resulting in a gameplay in which the difficulty of guessing the non-set value (set value) decreases. That is, in this embodiment, the set value can be guessed by identifying or guessing some or all of the multiple non-set values by stacking all or part of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. In this way, the gaming machine 10 meets the wishes of the arcade by preventing the set value from being easily identified or guessed (narrowed down), while also meeting the wishes of the player by enabling more accurate guessing of the non-set value (set value) through consecutive jackpots. This provides a gaming machine 10 that meets the wishes of both the arcade and the player.

In conventional slot machines, images suggesting or clearly indicating the setting value may be displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device on which game effects are executed. Images suggesting or clearly indicating the setting value are displayed, for example, on a jackpot confirmation screen, a jackpot start screen, a jackpot end screen, and start screens, continuation screens, and end screens for ART and AT, with the content of the displayed image being determined by lottery. Specifically, on an image display unit such as a liquid crystal display device, as a jackpot game end screen or the like, in addition to a default screen that does not suggest or clearly indicate the setting value, with a certain probability, a screen is presented that suggests or clearly indicates a specific setting value or higher (e.g., an intermediate setting value (e.g., setting value 4 to 6) or higher), a high setting value (e.g., setting value 5 or 6), an odd setting value (e.g., setting value 1, 3, or 5), an even setting value (e.g., setting value 2, 4, or 6), not a specific setting value (e.g., the negation of setting value 1), or the highest setting value (e.g., setting value 6), etc.

However, when suggesting or indicating a setting value in conventional slot machines, the probability of displaying a default screen that does not suggest or indicate a setting value is set high, and the probability of displaying a screen that suggests or indicates a setting value is set low, so that the setting value cannot be easily identified or guessed. In particular, the probability of suggesting or indicating a setting value that is advantageous to the player or indicating that a specific setting value is being specified is set low. Furthermore, suggestions of odd or even setting values tend to have low reliability, and the reliability is often set at around 60%, for example. Furthermore, while slot machines may suggest or indicate a high setting value, they do not suggest or indicate a negation of a high setting value (e.g., setting value 5 or 6), and in particular they do not suggest or indicate a negation of the highest setting value (e.g., setting value 6). In other words, slot machines do not present information that is disadvantageous to the player, such as negating a high setting value.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, information (non-set values) that allows the set value to be inferred is displayed as numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of specific conditions that are met during a specified period, i.e., the number of game balls that enter the special out ball port 373 of the Kroon device 37 during a specified period. In other words, by displaying the numbers for the non-set values one by one on the 7-segment display unit 39, it is possible to identify or infer some of the non-set values, thereby making it possible to infer the set value; and by displaying the numbers for all of the non-set values, all of the non-set values can be recognized, making it possible to identify the set value.

As such, this embodiment is fundamentally different from gaming machines such as slot machines, which suggest or clearly indicate a set value at a fixed rate. It allows the user to recognize a set value by identifying multiple non-set values based on the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the non-set value (set value) is clearly indicated or suggested depending on the number of specific conditions (game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373) that are met during jackpot play over a specified period of time. This also differs from conventional gaming machines, which suggest or clearly indicate set values at a fixed rate. Furthermore, this embodiment differs from conventional gaming machines, such as slot machines, in that the difficulty of identifying or guessing some or all of the multiple non-set values decreases as the number of consecutive jackpot wins increases.

In this embodiment, numerical information indicating multiple non-set values is presented depending on the number of specific conditions (game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373) that are met during jackpot play in a specified period. Therefore, unlike conventional gaming machines, the frequency with which information for identifying the set value is presented does not decrease. Instead, information for identifying the non-set value (set value) continues to be presented as long as the specified period continues (as long as consecutive jackpots continue), making guessing the set value even more enjoyable and increasing the excitement of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a specific condition is satisfied for the number of non-setting values within a predetermined period, all non-setting values can be identified. In other words, all non-setting values, including information unfavorable to the player, are presented to the player, regardless of whether the non-setting value is high or low. Thus, unlike conventional slot machines that suggest or explicitly indicate setting values, this embodiment presents even information unfavorable to the player, such as negating the highest setting value. This allows the player to obtain not only advantageous but also unfavorable information for identifying or guessing setting values, allowing them to decide whether to continue playing on the gaming machine 10 based on the unfavorable information. Meanwhile, in this embodiment, it is conceivable to set the numerical display order so that numbers corresponding to high setting values (e.g., setting values of 5 or higher) are displayed later in the order selected. Conversely, it is conceivable to set the numerical display order so that numbers corresponding to low setting values (e.g., setting values of 2 or lower) are displayed earlier in the order selected. By displaying numbers corresponding to low setting values earlier and numbers corresponding to high setting values later in the order selected, higher setting values are displayed later. This allows the player to anticipate the possibility that the set value will be a high value that is advantageous to the player until just before the player grasps the set value, allowing the player to enjoy guessing the non-set value (set value) while hoping that the set value may be high.

[Ending additional image control processing]
Here, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ending additional image control process executed in step S2215 in the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Steps S2401 to S2403>
As shown in FIG. 46 , in the ending additional image control process, in step S2401, the MPU 51 reads various information from the previously displayed information storage area updated in step S2306 of FIG. 41 , i.e., previously displayed number flag information, currently displayed number flag information, and previously displayed segment flag information updated as the current specific period elapses, and determines an additional image to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the end of the jackpot game based on this information (step S2402). Here, the additional image is an image that indicates the display content of the 7-segment display unit 39 and is an image that allows the identification or estimation of non-set values (see FIGS. 47 (B1), 47 (B2), and 47 (C)). The MPU 51 then transmits an additional image display command to the display control device 6 to cause the symbol display unit 341 to display the additional image determined in step S2402 in the ending effect. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 displays the additional image as part of the ending effect.

Here, Figure 47 is a diagram showing an example of screen transitions during the ending presentation of a jackpot game. Specifically, Figure 47 (A1) is an example of the screen of the symbol display unit 341 during the first half of the ending of a special jackpot game, and Figure 47 (A2) is an example of the screen of the symbol display unit 341 during the first half of the ending of a normal jackpot game. Also, Figures 47 (B1), 47 (B2), and 47 (C) are example screens (example setting value suggestion screens) of the symbol display unit 341 during the second half of the ending.

As shown in Figure 47 (A1), at the ending of a special jackpot game, an image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the first half of the ending presentation, indicating that a transition to a high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode will occur after the special jackpot game has ended. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 47 (B1), at the ending of a normal jackpot game, an image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the first half of the ending presentation, indicating that a transition to a low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode (time-saving mode) will occur after the normal jackpot game has ended. Note that in the first half of the ending presentation, in addition to an image indicating the game mode to which a transition will occur after the jackpot game has ended, images are also displayed that indicate the number of consecutive jackpot wins and the number of balls dispensed.

Meanwhile, in the latter half of the ending presentation of a jackpot game, an image including an additional image determined in step S2402 of the ending additional image control process of FIG. 46 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the result of the crane game using the crane device 37. As shown in FIGS. 47(B1), 47(B2), and 47(C), the additional image indicates the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period, and includes five setting value suggestion images that mimic the 7-segment display unit 39 on which numbers corresponding to non-set values can be displayed. Specifically, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the display state shown in FIG. 43(B), an additional image including an image that mimics the display state on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the latter half of the ending presentation, as shown in FIG. 47(B1). Furthermore, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the display state shown in FIG. 44(B) via FIG. 44(C), an additional image including a setting value suggestion image simulating the display state shown in FIG. 44(B) and a setting value suggestion image simulating the display state shown in FIG. 44(C) is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the second half of the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 47(B2). Furthermore, if all five numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 before the end of the specified period, an additional image including a setting value suggestion image simulating the state in which each number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the second half of the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 47(C). In the example shown in FIG. 47(C), an image is displayed indicating that the numbers "2" to "6" other than the number "1" are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. In this case, it is possible to identify that the non-set values are "2" to "6," and as a result, it is possible to recognize that the set value is "1."

In this way, in the second half of the jackpot game ending presentation, the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 up until the end of one predetermined period is displayed as an additional image including five setting value suggestion images modeled after the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, at the end of each jackpot game, the player can check information about non-set values that were displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 up until that jackpot game. This allows the player to review the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 even if they are unaware that information about non-set values will be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, if they miss the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39, or if they have forgotten the previous display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 during that predetermined period. Therefore, the player can identify or guess the non-set values and recognize or guess the set values at the end of each jackpot game based on the additional image that shows the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39.

Whether or not to display an additional image showing the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 up until the end of a specified period as the ending effect of a jackpot game on the symbol display unit 341 is a design matter, and it is also possible to not display an additional image on the symbol display unit 341 during the ending effect. If an additional image is not displayed during the ending effect, if there are numbers previously displayed during the specified period, it becomes difficult to identify or guess a non-set value based on the numbers previously displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and ultimately to guess or recognize a set value. In other words, not displaying an additional image during the ending effect increases the difficulty of identifying or guessing a non-set value (set value), thereby preventing the setting value of the gaming machine 10 from being recognized early, or at least preventing it from being recognized as not being a high setting value. This prevents play on the gaming machine 10 from being ended early, and suppresses a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

<Step S2404>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 46 , in step S2404, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot type that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot. Whether the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot can be determined based on whether a 5R normal jackpot flag that can be set to ON in step S2103 of FIG. 37 is ON. If the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2305, and if the jackpot type is not a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: No), the MPU 51 terminates the ending additional image control process.

<Step S2405>
If the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 initializes the already-displayed information storage area (sets all flags to OFF) and ends the ending additional image control process. That is, if the jackpot is a 5R normal jackpot in which the end of a predetermined period is set, the MPU 51 initializes the already-displayed information storage area.

As described above, in this embodiment, while it is possible to identify or guess the non-set value (set value), identifying or increasing the accuracy of guessing the non-set value (set value) requires a large number of game balls 99 to enter the special outlet ball port 373 of the crane device 37 over a specified period, making it difficult to identify the non-set value (set value). This offers the advantage to the amusement hall that the set value is not easily known to players. On the other hand, it offers the advantage to the player that the set value can be identified or guessed. Additionally, winning the jackpot lottery allows the set value to be identified or guessed, and the accuracy of the set value guess increases with the continuation of the special jackpot (consecutive jackpots). In some cases, the set value can be recognized, providing the gaming machine 10 with a gaming experience that meets the needs of both the amusement hall and the player, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, once a jackpot game has begun, unless there are special circumstances, the player will end play midway through the jackpot game, and if the high probability mode is active, the player will not end play during the high probability mode. Therefore, by setting the specified period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode, the player is prevented from ending play before the specified period ends. This prevents a player who does not know the timing (end of the specified period) at which the non-set value (set value) can be identified or guessed from ending play just before the non-set value (set value) becomes identifiable or guessable. Therefore, even a player who does not know the timing at which the non-set value (set value) can be identified or guessed can guess or recognize the non-set value (set value). In addition, this eliminates the so-called "hyena behavior" of other players who play aiming to identify or guess the non-set value (set value).

Furthermore, because the start of the specified period marks the start of the jackpot game, triggered by the first jackpot win in the low-probability mode, not only does it require at least one jackpot win before the non-set value (set value) can be identified or guessed, but even if the specified period begins, the high hurdle of identifying the non-set value (set value) as described above means that a considerable number of game balls 99 will be fired at the game board 31 and a considerable number of jackpot draws will be taken before the non-set value (set value) can be guessed or identified to some extent. Therefore, once the set value can be guessed or identified with a high degree of accuracy, it is likely that the player has reached a stage where the number of unit jackpot draws (ease of winning a jackpot draw) can also be adequately determined. As a result, when the non-set value (set value) can be guessed or identified with a high degree of accuracy, the player can judge the ball-out performance of the gaming machine 10 during play, including not only the non-set value (set value) but also the number of unit jackpot draws, thereby making it possible to decide whether to continue playing. For example, even if the set value is low, if the number of unit jackpot draws is high, it is possible to make a comprehensive decision to continue playing. On the other hand, even if the set value is high, if the number of unit jackpot draws is low, it is possible to make a comprehensive decision to abandon playing.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, information for identifying or guessing non-set values is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and the display history of this 7-segment display unit 39 over a predetermined period is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the end of each jackpot game. Therefore, at the end of each jackpot game, the player can check information about non-set values that was displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 up until that jackpot game. This allows the player to review the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 even if they are unaware that information about non-set values will be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, if they miss the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39, or if they have forgotten the previous display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 over the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can identify or guess non-set values at the end of each jackpot game based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39, and enjoy playing the game by recognizing or guessing set values.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the end of a jackpot game. However, the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 may also be displayed on a display unit such as the symbol display unit 341 after the end of a jackpot game, which sets the end of the predetermined period. In other words, the display history for a predetermined period may be displayed during a special period other than the specified period. For example, in a standby state in which neither variable play nor jackpot play is being executed, a predetermined operation on the gaming machine 10 by the player could be used to display the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 on a display unit such as the symbol display unit 341. In this way, by displaying the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 on the symbol display unit 341 after the end of a jackpot game, which sets the end of the predetermined period, it becomes possible to check the past display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 if the user has forgotten them. This makes it possible to identify or estimate non-set values based on the past display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39. Displaying the display history on the pattern display unit 341, etc., during standby mode, etc., will be explained in detail in the fourth embodiment described below.

In this way, making it possible to display the display history on the symbol display unit 341 or the like during standby mode, etc., has the advantage of making it possible to check the previous display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 if the user has forgotten it. On the other hand, if the display history can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like during standby mode, etc., anyone can check the display history by performing a specified operation on an empty gaming machine 10. In other words, it becomes possible to identify or guess non-set values (set values) by taking advantage of the benefits obtained by others, which would allow so-called hyena behavior. In contrast, this embodiment does not permit checking the display history for a specified period on the 7-segment display unit 39 after the end of a jackpot game, which sets the end of the specified period. In other words, the display of specific information indicating non-set values, including the display history for a specified period, is restricted outside of the specified period. Therefore, this embodiment can prevent hyena behavior, in which someone takes advantage of the benefits obtained by others to identify or guess non-set values (set values).

In addition, in this embodiment, if the first hit is a special jackpot, a predetermined period is set from the start of the first jackpot game to the normal jackpot game for the high-probability mode normal jackpot. However, a predetermined period may be set for each jackpot regardless of the type of jackpot. In other words, a predetermined period may be set for each jackpot game, regardless of whether it is a first hit or a consecutive hit. In this case, the predetermined period begins at the start of the jackpot game or the open/close execution mode, and ends at the end of the jackpot game or the open/close execution mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Instead of or in addition to displaying numbers corresponding to non-set values, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, numbers or letters corresponding to non-set values may be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and a non-set value indicating reach effect may be executed in the symbol display unit 341, which indicates the non-set value. As an example of a non-set value indicating reach effect, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a decorative symbol may be displayed with a single number corresponding to a non-set value. In this way, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a number corresponding to a non-set value is displayed in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and a non-set value indicating reach effect is executed in which the non-set value is indicated in the symbol display unit 341. This allows the player to enjoy variable play not only by determining whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot in variable play, but also by focusing on the numbers and the like stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and by focusing on the combination of decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the symbol display unit 341. Furthermore, when the non-set value indicating reach effect is executed as one of the reach effects, it is also possible to have the numbers stopped and displayed as misses in a reach for a decorative symbol of numbers corresponding to a set value, rather than as a doublet. For example, if the setting value is 1, the decorative symbols "222," "333," "444," "555," and "666" can stop and be displayed, but "111" will not, and a reach with a decorative symbol of 1 will always be a miss. In this way, by not displaying a repeat of the numbers corresponding to the setting value, it is usually desirable for the decorative symbol to stop and be displayed with a single number, but it is also desirable not to display a single number such as 5 or 6, which negates a high setting value, so it becomes possible to enjoy the reach effects from a different perspective than before.

It is also possible to have the display of numbers or the like corresponding to non-set values on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, or the non-set value indicating reach effect, executed only at specific timings. In this way, by limiting the display of numbers or the like corresponding to non-set values on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 to specific timings, or by executing the non-set value indicating reach effect, players can enjoy playing by focusing on the variable game that is executed at specific timings.

An example of a specific timing is when the first special symbol display unit 362, the second special symbol display unit 363, and the symbol display unit 341 indicate that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot during variable play in a high probability variable play state or a time-limited play state. By explicitly indicating or suggesting a non-set value during variable play in a high probability variable play state or a time-limited play state, the high-frequency support mode allows reserved balls to be consumed quickly, allowing players to enjoy variable play in a high probability variable play state or a time-limited play state, which can tend to be monotonous. Furthermore, the specific timing may be set when the number of variable play events executed after transitioning to a high probability variable play state or a time-limited play state falls within a predetermined number of times. For example, the predetermined number of times range may be set when the number of variable play events executed after transitioning to a high probability variable play state is small (e.g., 1 to 10 times) or large (e.g., 100 or more, 150 or more, 200 or more, etc.). That is, a non-set value may be indicated or suggested if a jackpot occurs early after transitioning to the variable probability game state, or if a player is stuck in a state where a large number of variable game plays are played before reaching a jackpot. In this case, the non-set value is indicated or suggested as a bonus for an early jackpot after the end of the jackpot game, or as a relief for being stuck. The specified number range may also be set if the number of variable game plays executed after transitioning to the time-saving game state is small (e.g., 1 to 10 times), or just before the end of the time-saving game state (e.g., 90 to 100 times). In this case, the non-set value is indicated or suggested as a bonus for an early jackpot after the end of the jackpot game, or for a jackpot just before the end of the time-saving game state.

Other Embodiments
Other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. In the following other embodiments, the same configurations and steps as those of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment will not be described. It should be noted that the configurations and processing functions of the first embodiment and the following other embodiments can be selected and combined as desired.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment described above, a specific period (the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening and closing execution mode) is set for each jackpot game executed within a predetermined period (the period from the start of the jackpot game for the first jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening and closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game for a normal jackpot), and based on the number of specific conditions met (the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37 within the specific period), at the end of the jackpot game for which the specific period is set, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values (set values) is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39.

When a specific period is set for each jackpot game executed within a predetermined period, as in the first embodiment described above, multiple specific periods corresponding to the number of consecutive jackpot games are set within the predetermined period. Therefore, during consecutive jackpot games, all or part of the specific information corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the end of each jackpot game. That is, during consecutive jackpot games, all or part of the specific information is presented multiple times. However, when all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the end of each jackpot game, i.e., when all or part of the specific information is presented multiple times, it becomes difficult to identify the non-set value (set value) based on the specific information presented at the end of the previous jackpot game unless the specific information presented at the end of the previous jackpot game has been stored or recorded. That is, if the specific information previously presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 has not been accurately stored or recorded, it becomes difficult to effectively identify or estimate the non-set value (set value). Therefore, in order to effectively identify or guess the non-set value (set value), a player must go through the trouble of accurately memorizing or recording the specific information previously presented on the seven-segment display unit 39, which may result in the player giving up on identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value). This undermines the significance of increasing the enjoyment of the game by being able to identify or guess the non-set value (set value).

In contrast, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, a specific period is not set within a predetermined period. Instead, specific information for identifying or guessing a non-set value (set value) is presented only once per predetermined period, based on the number of specific conditions satisfied during that period. In this embodiment, specific information for identifying or guessing a non-set value (set value) is presented only once per predetermined period, based on the number of specific conditions satisfied during that period. Therefore, this embodiment eliminates the inconvenience of presenting specific information multiple times during a predetermined period, as in the first embodiment described above. In other words, in this embodiment, specific information is presented only once per predetermined period, after the end of that period. Therefore, there is no specific information presented previously during that predetermined period, and there is no specific information for the player to memorize or record. This allows the player to identify or guess a non-set value (set value) by focusing on the specific information presented only once per predetermined period, thereby freeing the player from the hassle of accurately memorizing or recording the presented specific information. Therefore, by being able to easily and effectively identify or guess the non-set value (set value), players can enjoy playing the game while identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value), which increases the enjoyment of the game.

In one example of this embodiment, similar to the first embodiment described above, the specified period is the period from the start of jackpot play for a jackpot in low probability mode to the end of the open/close execution mode for normal jackpot play for a normal jackpot, and the specific condition is that a game ball enters the special outlet ball port of the Klue device. Also, in this example of this embodiment, similar to the first embodiment described above, specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, but the display timing (specified period) of the specific information is only at the ending of the 5R normal jackpot play (after the end of the specified period) for each specified period, when the end of the specified period is set. In other words, the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 only once after the end of the specified period. Therefore, in this embodiment, some steps of the setting value suggestion process, 7-segment display unit control process, and ending additional image control process differ from those in the first embodiment described above.

Here, Figure 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the setting value suggestion process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, Figure 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the 7-segment display control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of Figure 48, and Figure 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the ending additional image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of Figure 48. Below, this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figures 48 to 50, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
As shown in Figure 48, in the setting value suggestion process in this embodiment, when the ending of the jackpot game starts (step S2201: Yes), unlike the setting value suggestion process in the first embodiment (see Figure 40), provided that the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set (step S2501: Yes), the up and down movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 that receives the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37 is controlled, and the number of game balls 99 retained in the game ball retention portion 38 during the predetermined period is counted (steps S2202 to S2213). As a result, in this embodiment, when the predetermined period ends, in a 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37 during the predetermined period is counted in one go.

In addition, in the setting value suggestion process of this embodiment, if a 5R normal jackpot game is being played (step S2501: Yes), the up and down movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is controlled, and the number of game balls 99 retained in the game ball retention portion 38 over a predetermined period is counted (steps S2202 to S2213). As a result, the 7-segment display control process (step S2502) and the ending additional image control process (step S2503) are also executed based on the stopper portion down movement flag (step S2203), which is set on the condition that a 5R normal jackpot game is being played, for which the end of the predetermined period is set, and on the condition that a 5R normal jackpot game is being played (step S2501: Yes).

[7-segment display control process]
The 7-segment display control process in this embodiment is executed when the ending of a 5R normal jackpot game starts (when the open/close execution mode (predetermined period) ends), as described above. Also, as shown in FIG. 49 , the 7-segment display control process in this embodiment is basically the same as the 7-segment display control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 41 ). However, when the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or greater (step S2302: Yes), instead of reading out the control order of the 7-segment display control information and the already-displayed information (see FIG. 42 ), only the control order of the 7-segment display control information is read (step S2504). That is, in the 7-segment display control process in this embodiment, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled (presents specific information) only at the ending of a 5R normal jackpot game (after the end of the predetermined period), in which the end of the predetermined period is set for one predetermined period. Therefore, there is no need to read out the already-displayed information and control the 7-segment display unit 39.

[Ending additional image control processing]
As shown in Fig. 50, the ending additional image control process in this embodiment is basically the same as the ending additional image control process in the first embodiment described above (see Fig. 46), but step S2404 in the ending additional image control process in the first embodiment described above is omitted. That is, since the ending additional image control process in this embodiment is executed in response to a 5R normal jackpot (Yes in step S2501 of the setting value suggestion process in Fig. 48), initialization of the already-displayed information storage area is executed in step S2405 without having to determine whether or not a 5R normal jackpot has occurred.

As described above, in this embodiment, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to a non-set value (set value) is presented only once per specified period, based on the number of specific conditions satisfied during that period. Therefore, there is no specific information previously presented during that specified period, and there is no specific information for the player to memorize or record. This allows the player to identify or guess the non-set value (set value) by focusing on the specific information presented only once per specified period, thereby freeing the player from the hassle of accurately memorizing or recording the presented specific information. Therefore, by being able to easily and effectively identify or guess the non-set value (set value), the player can enjoy playing the game while identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value), thereby increasing the player's enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first embodiment described above are possible, to the extent applicable.

[Third embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which, based on the number of times a specific condition is satisfied during a specific period, all or part of specific information (numbers) for identifying or guessing multiple non-set values (set values) is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 after a specific period has elapsed (at the end of a jackpot game). Also, in the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which numbers corresponding to non-set values as specific information are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a number display order (see FIG. 36 ) that is determined when the gaming machine 10 is powered on or when a set value is changed. Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the number display order when displaying numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is fixed.

In the first embodiment described above, when multiple numbers corresponding to multiple non-set values as specific information are displayed in the number display order (see FIG. 36) determined when the gaming machine 10 is powered on or the set value is changed, the numbers are displayed in the same order unless the gaming machine 10 is powered off or the set value is changed. Furthermore, the control order of segments A through G when displaying each number on the 7-segment display unit 39 is fixed. Therefore, if the number of specific conditions satisfied in a specified period is fewer than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding specified period, only a smaller amount of specific information than that already presented will be obtained, and no new specific information can be obtained. As a result, if it is expected that only a small number of specific conditions will be satisfied in a specified number of times, such as in a jackpot game for a single jackpot, there is a concern that interest in whether specific conditions will be satisfied in the specified period, the number of specific conditions satisfied, and the specific information presented after the specified period has elapsed will decrease.

In contrast, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is met, the order in which specific information is presented (the order in which numbers are displayed and the order in which segments are displayed) is determined (changed). By determining the order in which specific information is presented when a predetermined condition is met, new specific information may be obtained even if fewer specific conditions are met in a given period than in the preceding period. Therefore, even if the number of specific conditions met in a given number of times is expected to be small, such as in a single jackpot game, it is possible to generate interest in whether specific conditions are met in a given period and how many specific conditions are met, and it is also possible to generate interest in the specific information presented after the specified period has elapsed. This makes it possible to more effectively increase the enjoyment of the game by presenting specific information that can identify or infer a non-set value (set value) depending on the number of specific conditions met.

Note that possible predetermined conditions for determining (changing) the order in which specific information is presented include, for example, winning a jackpot, the start of the opening of a jackpot game, the opening/closing execution mode, or the ending of a jackpot game. By setting predetermined conditions in this way, the order in which specific information is presented is determined (changed) each time a jackpot game is played. This prevents the order in which specific information is presented from becoming fixed, preventing the same specific information from being repeatedly presented or the presentation of specific information from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information each time a jackpot game is played. This can, for example, create interest in the order in which specific information is presented in a jackpot game, thereby increasing interest in the jackpot game.

Possible predetermined conditions include winning a specific jackpot (e.g., a probability variable jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a jackpot in low-probability mode), or starting the opening, opening/closing execution mode, or ending of a specific jackpot game (e.g., a jackpot game for a probability variable jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a jackpot in low-probability mode). By setting predetermined conditions in this way, the number of times the order in which specific information is presented is determined (changed) is reduced compared to when the predetermined conditions are not limited to a specific jackpot or jackpot game. This reduces the likelihood of new information being presented in response to previously presented specific information, making it more difficult to identify all non-set values (identifying set values), and preventing all non-set values from being identified prematurely (identifying set values). This prevents a player from prematurely ending play on the gaming machine 10 when the set value is low, for example.

Another possible predetermined condition is the start or end of a predetermined or specific period. By setting predetermined conditions in this way, the order in which specific information is presented is determined (changed) for each predetermined or specific period. As a result, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information for each predetermined or specific period. This makes it possible to create interest in the order in which specific information is presented, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Another possible predetermined condition is the determination or execution of a specific effect as a variable game effect. In this case, the specific effect may be set to either a non-reach effect or a reach effect. A typical example of the specific effect is a premium effect that confirms a jackpot or a guaranteed jackpot among the variable game effects. Furthermore, specific effects may include decorative symbols displayed in a specific combination on the symbol display unit 341, or a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display). For example, decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display unit 341 may stop at "777," a specific out-of-reach number such as "767," or a specific non-reach number (variable number) such as "367." In addition, when a development effect such as a super reach effect or a special reach effect is executed as a reach effect, a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) indicating that a development effect will be executed may be considered. A possible example of a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) indicating that a development effect will be executed is a "7 Development 7" where the left and right decorative symbols are displayed as temporary stop displays (intermediate stop displays) in a reach state, and a symbol such as "Development" is displayed as a center symbol indicating that a development effect will be executed. Even when predetermined conditions are set in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information for each predetermined period or specific period. This can create interest in the presentation order of the specific information, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, possible predetermined conditions include multiple consecutive single jackpots or multiple consecutive presentations of the same specific information. By setting predetermined conditions in this way, the presentation order of the specific information can be determined (changed) when it is difficult to obtain new specific information. This makes it easier to obtain new specific information, reducing boredom when new specific information is not available and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, if the specified conditions are met before the start of the specified period, priority may be given to the presentation order of the specific information determined (changed) for the specified condition that is met first, or to the presentation order of the specific information determined (changed) for the specified condition that is met last.

In one example of this embodiment, the display order of the numbers corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values serving as specific information and the segment display order when displaying each number are determined on the condition that jackpot play for a jackpot in low probability mode begins (the specified period begins, the initial jackpot play begins), and in accordance with these display orders, all or part of the numbers identifying the multiple non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the end of the 5R normal jackpot play (after the specified period has elapsed), when the end of the specified period is set.

Here, Figure 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the display order setting process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and Figure 52 is a diagram showing an example of a table referenced in the procedure for the display order setting process of Figure 51. Below, this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figures 51 and 52, focusing on the display order setting process, which is a difference from the first embodiment described above.

[Display order setting process]
<Step S2601>
51, in the display order setting process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a jackpot game effect start flag is set to ON (step S2601). The jackpot game effect start flag is a flag indicating that a jackpot game effect will start, and is set to ON in step S2108 of the command determination process of FIG. 37. If the jackpot game effect start flag is ON (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2602, and if the jackpot game effect start flag is OFF (step S2601: No), the MPU 51 terminates the display order setting process.

<Step S2602>
If the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game effect is a low-probability jackpot (step S2602). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot is the first jackpot and whether a predetermined period has begun. Whether the jackpot is a low-probability jackpot can be determined, for example, by including probability mode information in the jackpot game start command when the jackpot game is started, indicating whether the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game is a low-probability jackpot or a high-probability jackpot. When the jackpot game start command is sent from the main control device 4 to the audio/lamp control device 5, the command determination process of FIG. 37 sets a flag indicating a low-probability jackpot based on the probability mode information to on or off, and the MPU 51 checks the flag. The probability mode information may be set as a command separate from the jackpot game start command.

Then, if the jackpot is in low probability mode (step S2602: Yes), i.e., if the jackpot is the first jackpot (the jackpot that marks the beginning of a specified period), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2603. On the other hand, if the jackpot is not in low probability mode (step S2602: No), i.e., if the jackpot is in high probability mode (step S2602: No), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Steps S2603 to S2605>
If the jackpot is in the low probability mode (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 obtains the setting value from the RAM 512 (step S2603), and further determines the display order of the numbers corresponding to the multiple non-setting values on the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2604), sets the control order of segments A to G for each number (step S2605), and terminates the display order setting process.

Here, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the multiple non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table shown in FIG. 36, similar to step S2015 (see FIG. 35) of the display order setting process in the first embodiment described above. The determined number display order is also stored in RAM 512.

The control order of segments A to G for each number is determined based on the control order determination table for segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 shown in Figure 52. In this control order determination table, multiple control orders for segments A to G are defined based on the value of the control order type counter updated in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt process in Figure 35, and the probability of each control order being determined is set to be the same. The control order of segments A to G is then determined from multiple control orders to be the same for each number based on the value of the control order type counter when the control order of segments A to G for each number is set. The determined control order of segments A to G is stored in RAM 512.

In this embodiment, when numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, segments A to G are controlled in the same order for all numbers, but the control order for each number may be different. In other words, the control order for segments A to G may be determined individually for each of the multiple numbers corresponding to non-set values.

As described above, in this embodiment, the order in which numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined for each predetermined period. This determines the order in which specific information is presented when a predetermined condition is satisfied, making it possible to obtain new specific information even if fewer specific conditions are satisfied in a given period than in the previous predetermined period. Therefore, even in cases where a small number of specific conditions are expected to be satisfied in a given number of times, such as in a single jackpot game, it is possible to generate interest in whether or not specific conditions are satisfied in a specific period and how many specific conditions are satisfied, as well as in the specific information presented after the specific period has elapsed. This makes it possible to more effectively increase the enjoyment of the game by presenting specific information according to the number of specific conditions that can identify or infer non-set values (set values) that are satisfied.

In this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first and second embodiments described above are possible, to the extent applicable.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which, based on the number of times a specific condition is satisfied during a specific period, after the specific period has elapsed (at the end of the jackpot game), all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to a plurality of non-set values is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39, and the presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display unit 39 ends with the end of the jackpot game. In other words, in the first embodiment described above, all or part of the specific information is displayed during a predetermined specified period (after the specific period has elapsed).

However, if a player misses or forgets the presentation of specific information during the specified period, it is expected that the player will want to reconfirm the specific information in order to identify or infer multiple non-set values by taking into account the specific information displayed in the past. Furthermore, if a player is replaced, the new player will likely want to confirm the specific information displayed in the past. However, if the specific information is presented during the specified period, it will not be presented outside of the specified period, and so the new player will not be able to reconfirm the specific information.

In contrast, in this embodiment, it is possible to present all or part of the specific information previously presented during special periods other than the specified period. In this way, by making it possible to present specific information previously presented during special periods other than the specified period, players can check the specific information previously presented during special periods. In other words, if a player misses or forgets the presentation of specific information during a specified period, they can reconfirm the specific information previously displayed. Furthermore, if a player is replaced, the new player can check the specific information presented to previous players. This allows players to identify or guess multiple non-set values (set values) by taking into account the specific information presented to previous players, thereby improving the convenience of identifying or guessing non-set values (set values).

Here, an example of a special period is a standby period (a waiting state for customers) in which neither variable play nor jackpot play is being performed. By having the special period be a standby period in this way, it becomes possible to check specific information previously presented in a state in which no play is being performed. This prevents obstruction to the visibility of various effects performed by the symbol display unit 341 and the like as the game progresses, such as variable play effects and jackpot game effects.

In addition, when making it possible to present all or part of previously presented specific information during a standby state, it is possible to make it a condition that a specified input operation, such as a password input operation or a command input operation, be performed on a specific display screen that can be accessed during standby. Passwords and commands may be made available by displaying them on the symbol display unit 341 at the end of a jackpot game, for example, when a specified period ends. Furthermore, passwords and commands may be made available via so-called mobile linkage, in which a matrix-type two-dimensional code or the like is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 during the jackpot game, and this matrix-type two-dimensional code or the like is read using a mobile device such as a smartphone or mobile phone and transmitted from an external server to the mobile device.

In this way, by allowing players to present all or part of the specific information previously presented during the standby state on the condition that they perform a specified input operation such as a password input operation or command input operation, only players who are able to enter passwords or commands, i.e., only players who have been presented with all or part of the specific information, will be able to view all or part of the specific information previously presented during the standby state. This eliminates so-called hyena behavior and freeloading, whereby other players view all or part of the specific information from the past.

It is also possible to use a mobile device such as a smartphone or mobile phone to read a matrix-type two-dimensional code on a specific display screen that can be accessed in standby mode, thereby causing the mobile device to present all or part of the specific information that has been previously presented.

It is also conceivable that a special period could be set during a jackpot game, for example, during the opening, open/close execution mode, or ending. By setting a special period during a jackpot game in this way, past specific information is presented without the result of the jackpot lottery being clearly indicated or suggested. This prevents the presentation of specific information from interfering with the indication or suggestion of the jackpot lottery result. Furthermore, because jackpot games are played after the result of the jackpot lottery is clearly indicated as a jackpot through variable play, player interest tends to decline; however, by presenting specific information that was previously presented during such jackpot games, interest in the jackpot game is increased.

It is also conceivable that the special period could be set during variable play. Here, the total time the game is played (the time the gaming machine 10 is powered on minus the time in standby mode) is theoretically longer than the time the jackpot variable play is played. Therefore, by making it possible to present past specific information during variable play, it becomes possible to set more timings for presenting past specific information. However, when the special period is set during variable play, it is preferable to limit the presentation of specific information for a certain period before the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, for example, during a non-reach state where a reach effect is not being executed as a variable play effect, or when the change time is short. This prevents the decorative symbols from obstructing the visibility of the jackpot lottery result, which is clearly indicated or suggested.

Furthermore, the presentation of past specific information during the special period may be performed at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, or may be performed at the player's discretion.

When past specific information is presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, it is possible to present past specific information at a timing that the player does not expect. This gives the gaming machine 10 an element of surprise. Furthermore, because past specific information is presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10 without the player having to perform any operations on the gaming machine 10, even players with little knowledge of the gaming machine 10 can learn about specific information that has been presented in the past. This ensures fairness among players.

Examples of cases in which past specific information is presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10 include presenting previously presented specific information as a demonstration screen in a standby state, presenting previously presented specific information at a certain rate (including 100%) before a specific reach effect is scheduled to be executed in variable play, and determining to present previously presented specific information through a lottery held at a specific timing during variable play or jackpot play. When previously presented specific information is presented as a demonstration screen in a standby state, the player can select a gaming machine 10 to play on from available machines while taking into account the past specific information presented on the demonstration screen, thereby improving the freedom and convenience of selecting a gaming machine 10 to play on. Furthermore, when a specific reach effect is scheduled to be executed in variable play and previously presented specific information is presented before the execution of the reach effect, the presentation of the past specific information serves as a pre-announcement that the specific reach effect will be executed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of variable play. It is also conceivable that the presentation of past specific information in variable play can be implemented as an expectation suggestion effect (including a confirmation effect indicating a jackpot) that suggests the expectation (reliability) if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, or as a chance-up effect that increases the expectation (reliability). This also increases the interest in variable play. Furthermore, when previously presented specific information is presented by a lottery executed at a specific timing in variable play or jackpot play, the past specific information is presented at a specific random timing determined by the gaming machine 10, which can particularly add an element of surprise to the game. Furthermore, if the player knows the specific timing at which the specific information will be presented, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether the specific information will be presented at the specific timing, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

On the other hand, if the presentation of past specific information during a special period is executed at the player's discretion, the player can actively check past specific information at a timing of their choice during the special period, rather than passively waiting for the past specific information to be presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10. Therefore, when multiple non-set values (set values) are identified or inferred in consideration of past specific information, the timing of the presentation of past specific information is not restricted by the gaming machine 10, and the player's own will is reflected, improving convenience.

Here, an example of the presentation of past specific information during a special period being executed at the player's discretion is the presentation of previously presented specific information when the player performs a specified operation on the operation button 20, etc., during a special period set in standby mode, during variable play, or during a jackpot play.

In one example of this embodiment, at the end of a jackpot game (specified period), all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to multiple non-set values displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed, and during the standby period (special period), by performing a predetermined operation on the operation button 20 or the selection decision unit 21, all or part of the specific information (numbers) displayed at the end of the last three jackpot games is displayed on the pattern display unit 341. Note that in this example of the present embodiment, it is possible to display all or part of the specific information previously displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 on the pattern display unit 341 without having to enter a password, command, or the like.

This embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above, with reference to Figures 53 to 63.

Here, Figure 53 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and Figure 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in Figure 53.

As shown in Figure 53, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment further includes a selection determination unit 21 provided on the front frame 11.

The selection determination unit 21 is operated by the player and is a push button that, when pressed by the player in the standby state described below, changes the display screen (see Figure 60) on the symbol display unit 341. The selection determination unit 21 includes multiple selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

The multiple selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to provisionally select a desired item from options (items) on various screens, such as the top menu screen, during the standby screen transition process in Figures 61 and 62 described below (see Figure 60), and include an up selection button 211, a down selection button 212, a left selection button 213, and a right selection button 214. Here, provisional selection means that the provisional selection is confirmed (stored in RAM 512) by operating the confirm button 21B. Each of these selection buttons 211-214 includes an up selection operation switch 211a, a down selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch 211d, which switch the input signal to the voice lamp control device 5, as shown in Figure 54. These switches 211a-211d are connected to the input/output I/F of the voice lamp control device 5. Therefore, the voice and lamp control device 5 can determine whether each selection button 211-214 has been operated based on the input signals of each switch 211a-211d.

In addition, in this embodiment, when it is detected that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has begun, it is determined that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been performed. Of course, it may also be determined that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been performed when it is detected that an operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is continuing or has ended.

On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to confirm the provisionally selected item. The decision button 21B also has a decision operation switch 21Ba that switches the input signal to the voice and lamp control device 5, which will be described later. The decision operation switch 21Ba is connected to the input/output I/F of the voice and lamp control device 5. Therefore, the voice and lamp control device 5 can determine whether the decision operation switch 21Ba has been operated based on the input signal of the decision operation switch 21Ba.

In place of the multiple selection buttons 21A (211-214) and the decision button 21B, a touch panel that displays touch keys and accepts player operations on those touch keys may be provided as an operation means. Furthermore, in place of the multiple selection buttons 21A (211-214) and the decision button 21B, a translucent touch panel that accepts player operations may be provided on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. A jog dial may also be provided in place of the multiple selection buttons 21A (211-214). While the selection switches 211a-211d and the decision operation switch 21Ba are contact switches, they may also be, for example, piezoelectric elements, as long as they can be used to detect whether or not a player has operated them.

Here, Figure 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 shown in Figure 53.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the sub-timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, in addition to processing similar to the sub-timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment described above (steps S2000 to S2005), operation detection processing (step S2701) and standby state screen transition processing (step S2702) are executed.

[Operation detection process]
The operation detection process is a process for detecting whether or not an operation has been performed on the various buttons 20, 21A, 21B. Here, Fig. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of Fig. 55.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 executes operation button operation detection process (step S2801), operation detection pattern determination process (step S2802), selection button operation detection process (step S2803), selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), decision button operation detection process (step S2805), and decision operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806).

[Operation button operation detection process]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S2201 of the operation detection process), the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process is executed to sequentially update the operation history of the past three times. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 41, whereby whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated is determined at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt period of the sub-timer interrupt process. Here, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIG. 57.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
57, in step S2901, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. In step S2902, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. Then, in step S2903, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the third detection flag to the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a, and the operation detection process ends.

In this way, in the operation button operation detection process, steps S2901 to S2903 are executed, and the operation states of the most recent three operations at 1 msec intervals are stored in RAM 512 as the operation history of the operation button 20 as the first to third detection flags. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the operation state two operations ago is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern determination process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 57 , in the operation detection pattern determination process of step S2802 in the operation detection process, an operation pattern flag is set to determine the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. The operation pattern flags consist of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of on and off of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 is continuing (see FIG. 38A ). When only the second operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has started (see FIG. 38A ). When only the third operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has ended (see FIG. 38A ). When all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has not been performed (see FIG. 38A ). Here, Fig. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process. Also, Fig. 59(A) is a table showing the relationship between the detection pattern and the operation status for the operation button 20. Hereinafter, the operation button operation detection process will be described with reference to Fig. 58 and Fig. 59(A).

<Step S3001>
58, in step S3001, the MPU 41 determines whether a first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times previously is set to on. If the first operation detection flag is on (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3002, and if the first operation detection flag is off (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3005.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether a second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two operations ago is set to on. If the second operation detection flag is on (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3003. If the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
In step S3003, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is set to on. If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3004. If the third operation detection flag is off (step S3003: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and terminates the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation patterns "ON,""ON," and "ON" occur as three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON and the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF (see FIG. 59A ). The first operation pattern flag can be used as an indicator for determining whether the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 may set a continuation operation button operation command in the RAM 412 and transmit this operation button operation continuation command to the voice lamp control device 5. This allows the voice lamp control device 5 to determine that the operation of the operation button 20 is continuing, and therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the time for which the operation button 20 is being continuously operated based on the number of consecutive transmissions of the operation button operation continuation command. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 20 based on the time that the operation button 20 has been continuously operated, making it possible to execute an operation button performance based on a long press operation.

<Step S3005>
If the MPU 41 determines in step S3001 that the first operation detection flag is not on (step S3001: No), it determines whether the second operation detection flag, which indicates the operation state of the operation button 20 two operations ago, is on (step S3005). If the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3006, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3006>
In step S3006, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a third operation detection flag is on, which indicates the most recent operation state of the operation button 20. If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3007, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON and the first and third operation pattern flags to OFF. That is, when the operation patterns of "OFF,""ON," and "ON" occur as three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first and third operation pattern flags to OFF (see FIG. 59A ), and terminates the operation detection pattern determination process. The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the operation button 20 has been started). In this way, by determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation states of the operation button 20 for three times are reflected, thereby preventing erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as radio waves or static electricity, and preventing the start of operation of the operation button 20 from being reflected in the effect display at a timing unintended by the player.

<Step S3008>
If the MPU 41 determines in step S3002 that the second operation detection flag is not on (step S3002: No), it determines whether or not a third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is on (step S3008). If the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3009.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, and the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF (see FIG. 59A). The third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (whether operation of the operation button 20 has ended).

<Step S3010>
In step S3010, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF,""OFF," and "OFF," occurs as the three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third operation pattern flags to OFF (see FIG. 59A). Note that if all of the first to third operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in a non-operated state.

[Selection button operation detection process]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 56, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), the MPU 41 executes up selection button operation process, down selection button operation process, left selection button operation process, and right selection button operation process.

<Up selection button operation processing>
In the up selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the up selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the up selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57 , so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the up selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "up selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57 .

<Down selection button operation processing>
In the lower selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, the lower selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57 , so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the lower selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "lower selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57 .

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the left selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of Fig. 57, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the left selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "left selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of Fig. 57.

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the right selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57 , so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the right selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "right selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of Fig. 57 .

[Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), the MPU 41 executes an up selection operation detection pattern determination process, a down selection operation detection pattern determination process, a left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and a right selection operation detection pattern determination process.

<Up Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process>
In the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets an up operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the up selection button 211 from the operation history of the up selection button 211 determined based on the first up selection operation detection flag, the second up selection operation detection flag, and the third up selection operation detection flag. Here, the up selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58 , and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "up selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "up selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(B), in the up selection operation detection pattern determination process, if the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", "ON" occurs as three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the first up selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second up selection operation pattern flag and the third up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first up selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator for determining whether the operation state of the up selection button 211 is continuing.

In addition, when the operation patterns "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the second up selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first up selection operation pattern flag and the third up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second up selection operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the up selection button 211 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the up selection button 211 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the up selection button 211, the MPU 41 sets the third up selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first up selection operation pattern flag and the second up selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third up selection operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator for determining whether the up selection button 211 has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (whether operation of the up selection button 211 has ended).

In addition, if the three operation states of the up selection button 211 are "OFF," "OFF," "OFF," or any other operation pattern other than those described above, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third up selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that if all of the first to third up selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the up selection button 211 is in a non-operated state.

<Down Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process>
In the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a down operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the down selection button 212 from the operation history of the down selection button 212 determined based on the first down selection operation detection flag, the second down selection operation detection flag, and the down selection operation detection flag. Here, the down selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58 , and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "down selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "down selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), in the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, when the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", "ON" occurs as the operation state of the down selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets the first down selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second down selection operation pattern flag and the third down selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first down selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator for determining whether the operation state of the down selection button 212 is continuing.

In addition, when the operation patterns "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the lower selection button 212 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the lower selection button 212 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the lower selection button 212 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (whether operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended).

In addition, if the three operation patterns of the lower selection button 212 are "OFF," "OFF," "OFF," or any other operation pattern other than those described above, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third lower selection operation detection flags to OFF. Note that if all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in a non-operated state.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the left selection button 213 from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. Here, the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58 , and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "left selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" as the "left selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, if the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", "ON" occurs as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the first left selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first left selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator for determining whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continuing.

In addition, when the operation patterns "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the left selection button 213 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (whether operation of the left selection button 213 has ended).

Furthermore, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF," "OFF," and "OFF," occurs as the three operation states of the left selection button 213, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that if all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operated state.

<Right Selection Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 sets a right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the right selection button 214 from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58 , and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "right selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" can be read as the "right selection operation pattern flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of Fig. 58 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, if the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", "ON" occurs as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the first right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The first right selection operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator for determining whether the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continuing.

In addition, when the operation patterns "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the right selection button 214 has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (whether operation of the right selection button 214 has ended).

Furthermore, if an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF," "OFF," and "OFF," occurs as the three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that if all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in a non-operated state.

[Decision button operation detection process]
In the decision button operation detection process (step S2805 in FIG. 56 ), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the decision button 21B and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, the decision button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57 , and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the decision button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "decision button operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57 .

[Decision Operation Detection Pattern Determination Process]
In the deciding operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806 in FIG. 56 ), the MPU 41 sets an operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the deciding button 21B from the operation history of the deciding button 21B determined based on the first deciding operation detection flag, the second deciding operation detection flag, and the third deciding operation detection flag. Here, the deciding operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58 , and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the deciding operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" can be read as the "deciding operation detection flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (F), in the decision operation detection pattern determination process, if the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", "ON" occurs as three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the first decision operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second decision operation pattern flag and the third decision operation pattern flag to OFF. The first decision operation pattern flag can then be used as an indicator for determining whether the operation state of the decision button 21B is continuing.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as three operation states of the Confirm button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the second Confirm operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first and third Confirm operation pattern flags to OFF. The second Confirm operation pattern flag is used as an indicator for determining whether the Confirm button 21B has changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (whether operation of the Confirm button 21B has started).

Furthermore, when the operation patterns "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as three operation states of the Confirm button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the third Confirm operation pattern flag to ON and sets the first Confirm operation pattern flag and the second Confirm operation pattern flag to OFF. The third Confirm operation pattern flag is then used as an indicator for determining whether the Confirm button 21B has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (whether operation of the Confirm button 21B has ended).

Furthermore, if the three operation states of the decision button 21B are "OFF," "OFF," "OFF," or any other operation pattern other than those described above, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags to OFF. Note that if all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags are OFF, the MPU 41 determines that the decision button 21B is in a non-operated state.

[Standby screen transition process]
Returning to the explanation of Fig. 55, in the standby state screen transition process executed at 2702 of the sub-timer interrupt process, in the standby state where neither variable play nor jackpot play is being executed, the screen of the symbol display unit 341 is transitioned in response to the operation of the operation button 20, the selection button 21A or the decision button 21B, and a process is executed which enables the player to make various selections and settings. Here, Fig. 60 is a diagram showing an example of the screen transition in the symbol display unit 341 in the standby state.

As shown in Figure 60, when the display of the decorative symbols is stopped, if the reserved number N and reserved number M are "0", and the game does not transition to a jackpot game state, the display screen will remain in a state where the decorative symbols are stopped from changing. Then, if the player operates the operation button 20 after the display of the reserved number N and M is complete, the display screen will transition from the reserved number N to the top menu screen. This top menu screen includes multiple screen transition images and a cursor image.

The multiple screen transition images are images for selecting the destination display screen and include multiple selectable items (destination display screens). The multiple screen transition images include a 7-segment display history selection screen transition image for transitioning to a 7-segment display history selection screen displayed as "7-segment display history," a character selection screen transition image for transitioning to a character selection screen displayed as "Character selection," a character customization screen transition image for transitioning to a character customization screen displayed as "Character customization," and a change stop screen transition image for transitioning to a change stop screen displayed as "Back."

The cursor image indicates which of multiple selectable items is currently tentatively selected, and the item corresponding to the screen transition image to the right of the cursor image among the multiple screen transition images is the tentatively selected item. In the example shown in Figure 60, it indicates that "7-segment display history" is tentatively selected. Furthermore, the screen transition image corresponding to the tentatively selected item among the multiple screen transition images is displayed in a manner that makes it distinguishable from the other screen transition images to emphasize that it is tentatively selected. The tentatively selected item can be changed by operating the up selection button 211 or the down selection button 212.

On the top menu screen, operating the Confirm button 21B confirms the provisionally selected item (destination display screen) and transitions to the display screen corresponding to that item. For example, if the player selects the 7-segment display history selection screen transition image for "7-segment display history," operating the Confirm button 21B will transition the display screen from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen.

The 7-segment display history selection screen allows the user to transition to a history screen that displays the specific information displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a specified period. This history screen shows the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 for one of the three most recent specified periods, including a previous history screen that displays the specific information for the previous specified period, a second history screen that displays the specific information for the second specified period, and a third history screen that displays the specific information for the third specified period. Each history screen includes a history image in a format similar to the additional image (see Figures 47 (B1), 47 (B2), and 47 (C)) displayed on the symbol display unit 341 during the latter half of the ending of a jackpot game. The history image shows the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 up until the end of one specified period, and includes five setting value suggestion images that mimic the 7-segment display unit 39 on which numbers corresponding to non-setting values can be displayed. The example shown in Figure 60 shows that, during the previous specified period, a gaming ball 99 entered the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37, causing the number 2 to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, followed by segments A to C lighting up.

The 7-segment display history selection screen also includes a cursor image indicating a provisional selection; a previous history screen transition image for transitioning to the previous history screen displaying "History 1 (previous)"; a second history screen transition image for transitioning to the second history screen displaying "History 2 (previous)"; a third history screen transition image for transitioning to the third history screen displaying "History 3 (previous)"; and a variable stop screen transition image for transitioning to the variable stop screen displaying "End." Operating the Confirm button 21B on the 7-segment display history selection screen confirms the provisionally selected item (the destination display screen), and transitions to the display screen corresponding to that item. For example, if the player provisionally selects the previous history screen transition image for "History 1 (previous)," operating the Confirm button 21B transitions the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the previous history screen. Furthermore, if "History 2 (2 previous times)" is selected, the screen will transition from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 2 previous history screen, and if "History 3 (3 previous times)" is selected, the screen will transition from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 3 previous history screen. Furthermore, if "Exit" is selected, the screen will transition from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the top menu screen.

In this way, the player can select to move from the 7-segment display history selection screen to either the previous history screen, the previous two history screens, or the previous three history screens. In other words, the player can check the history information they want by moving to the history screen they want. This allows the player to effectively check the history while avoiding checking history information that has been checked previously or information with a small amount of information, making history checking more efficient.

In addition, in this embodiment, information for identifying non-set values at the end of a jackpot game is displayed on a 7-segment display unit 39, which is different from the symbol display unit 341 where decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, even when information for identifying non-set values is displayed, the visibility of the image effects executed on the symbol display unit 341 is not obstructed. Meanwhile, in the standby state, history information identical to the information displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the end is displayed on a symbol display unit 341, which is different from the 7-segment display unit 39. Here, since the symbol display unit 341 generally has a large display area, displaying the history information on the symbol display unit 341 improves the visibility of the history information. Furthermore, the symbol display unit 341 may be used to set various settings, such as effects and characters, executed on the gaming machine 10. Therefore, by displaying the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the end on the symbol display unit 341, it becomes possible to check the history information using operations similar to those used to set various settings, thereby improving the convenience of checking the history information.

In this embodiment, the player can switch to a history screen selected from multiple history screens, but it is also possible to display multiple pieces of history information simultaneously on a single screen. In this case, a large amount of history can be checked at once, allowing the presented content to be checked efficiently.

In addition, when the "Character Selection" character screen transition image is selected on the top menu screen, the display screen transitions to the character selection screen, and when the "Character Customization" character customization screen transition image is selected, the display screen transitions to the character customization screen. In other words, in this embodiment, it is possible to select characters that appear in variable game effects, etc., and customize the costumes, accessories, hairstyle, etc. of those characters.

In addition, if the "Back" image for transitioning to the stop-change screen is selected on the top menu screen, the display screen will transition to the stop-change screen.

In this way, in this embodiment, by operating the selection/determination unit 21 (selection button 21A and determination button 21B) in standby mode, the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 for the last three predetermined periods can be checked. This allows the player to recheck the past display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 if, for example, they miss or forget the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the end of a jackpot game. Furthermore, when a player is replaced, the new player can check the past display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39. This allows the player to identify or guess multiple non-set values (set values) by taking into account the past display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39, thereby improving the convenience of identifying or guessing non-set values (set values).

Here, Figures 61 and 62 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure for the standby state screen transition processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 55. Below, the procedure for the standby state screen transition processing executed in step S2702 of the sub-timer interrupt processing of Figure 55 will be explained with reference to Figures 61 and 62.

<Steps S3101 and S3102>
As shown in Fig. 61, in the standby state screen transition processing, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the standby state is in effect (steps S3101 and S3102). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines that the standby state is in effect if the variable game effect in progress flag, which is set to ON in step S2105 of the command determination processing in Fig. 37, is set to OFF (step S3101: No), and if the jackpot game effect in progress flag, which is set to ON when a display variable pattern command is sent to the display control device 6 in the jackpot game effect processing in step S2004 of the sub-timer interrupt processing in Fig. 34, is set to OFF (step S3102: No). On the other hand, the MPU 51 determines that the standby state is not in effect if the variable game effect in progress flag is set to ON (step S3101: Yes), or if the jackpot game effect in progress flag is set to ON (step S3102: Yes).

If the MPU 51 is in standby mode (No in both steps S3101 and S3102), it proceeds to step S3103; if the MPU 51 is not in standby mode (Yes in step S3101 or S3102), it terminates the standby mode screen transition process.

<Step S3103>
If the game is in a standby state (steps S3101 and S3102 are both No), the MPU 51 determines whether the variable stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103). The variable stop screen flag is a flag indicating that the display screen on the symbol display unit 341 is a variable stop screen. This variable stop screen flag is set to ON in step S3120 of FIG. 62 described below when the game is transitioned from a variable game state or a jackpot game state to a standby state, that is, when all screen flags other than the variable stop screen flag are set to OFF in the standby state. The variable stop screen flag is also set to ON when transitioning from a display screen other than the variable stop screen to the variable stop screen. Specifically, the fluctuation stop screen flag is also set to on when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the fluctuation stop screen in the top menu screen processing of step S3109 in Figure 62 described below, when the display screen is shifted from the one-time history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen in the one-time history screen processing of step S3113, when the display screen is shifted from the two-time history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen in the two-time history screen processing of step S3115, and when the display screen is shifted from the three-time history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen in the three-time history screen processing of step S3117. Note that the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to off in step S3107 when the display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen, and is set to off when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts.

If the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to on (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3104; if the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to off (step S3103: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3108 in FIG. 62.

<Step S3104>
If the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104). The second operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the operation button 20 has started, and is set to ON in step S3007 of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not an operation has been performed on the operation button 20 when the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen. If the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3105, and if the second operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3104: No), the MPU 51 terminates the standby state screen transition process.

<Steps S3105 to S3107>
If the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen to a top menu screen for various selections and settings (step S3105) (see FIG. 60). That is, if the operation button 20 is operated while the display screen is the fluctuation display screen, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen flag to ON, indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen (step S3106), and sets the variable stop screen flag to OFF, indicating that the display screen is the variable stop screen (step S3107), and ends the standby state screen transition process.

<Step S3108>
If the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: NO), as shown in Fig. 62, the MPU 51 determines whether a top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen is set to ON (step S3108). The top menu screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is to be transitioned from various screens, such as the fluctuation stop screen, to the top menu screen in the standby state (for example, step S3106 in Fig. 61). If the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: YES), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3109, and if the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: NO), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3110.

<Step S3109>
If the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 executes top menu screen processing (step S3109). In the top menu screen processing, the provisionally selected item is changed in response to an operation of the selection button 21A. In addition, in the top menu screen processing, when the decision button 21B is operated, the display screen is transitioned to a screen corresponding to the provisionally selected item, specifically, a fluctuation stop screen, a 7-segment display history selection screen, a character selection screen, or a character customization screen. In addition, when the MPU 51 transitions the display screen from the top menu screen to another screen, the MPU 51 sets the screen flag for the transition destination screen to ON, while setting the top menu screen flag to OFF.

<Step S3110>
If the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: NO), the MPU 51 determines whether a 7-segment history selection screen flag, which indicates that the display screen is the 7-segment display history selection screen, is set to ON (step S3110). The 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is transitioned from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen in the top menu screen processing of step S3109. If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON (step S3110: YES), the process proceeds to step S3111. If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to OFF (step S3110: NO), the process proceeds to step S3112.

<Step S3111>
If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes 7-segment history selection screen processing. The 7-segment history selection screen processing is processing that is executed when the 7-segment display history selection screen is displayed. Details of the 7-segment history selection screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

<Step S3112>
If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to OFF (step S3110: NO), the MPU 51 determines whether a previous history screen flag, which indicates that the display screen is the previous history screen, is set to ON (step S3112). The previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is switched from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the previous history screen in step S3212 of the 7-segment history selection screen processing in FIG. 63 , which will be described later. If the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: YES), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3113. If the previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: NO), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3114.

<Step S3113>
If the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the previous history screen process, when "Back" is selected, the display screen transitions from the previous history screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the previous history screen flag to OFF and sets the 7-segment display history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3114>
If the one-previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: NO), the MPU 51 determines whether a two-previous history screen flag, which indicates that the display screen is the two-previous history screen, is set to ON (step S3114). The two-previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is switched from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the two-previous history screen in step S3215 of the 7-segment display history selection screen processing in FIG. 63 (described later). If the two-previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: YES), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3115. If the two-previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114: NO), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3116.

<Step S3115>
If the two-previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 executes two-previous history screen processing and terminates the standby state screen transition processing. In the two-previous history screen processing, when "Back" is selected, the display screen transitions from the two-previous history screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the two-previous history screen flag to OFF and sets the 7-segment display history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3116>
If the second-previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114: NO), the MPU 51 determines whether the third-previous history screen flag, which indicates that the display screen is the third-previous history screen, is set to ON (step S3116). The sixth-previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is switched from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the third-previous history screen in step S3217 of the 7-segment display history selection screen processing in FIG. 63 (described later). If the third-previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3116: YES), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3117. If the third-previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3116: NO), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3118.

<Step S3117>
If the 3-previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes 3-previous history screen processing and terminates the standby state screen transition processing. In the 3-previous history screen processing, when "Back" is selected, the display screen transitions from the 3-previous history screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the 3-previous history screen flag to OFF and sets the 7-segment display history selection screen flag to ON.

<Steps S3118 and S3119>
If the three-previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3116: NO), the MPU 51 determines whether another screen flag (character selection screen flag or character customization screen flag) is set to ON (step S3118). The other screen flag is set to ON when the display screen transitions from the top menu screen to another screen during the top menu screen processing of step S3109. If the other screen flag is set to ON (step S3118: YES), the MPU 51 executes other screen processing corresponding to the other screen (step S3119) and terminates the standby state screen transition processing. On the other hand, if the other screen flag is set to OFF (step S3118: NO), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3120.

<Step S3120>
If the other screen flags are set to OFF (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 sets the variable stop screen flag to ON (step S3120) and terminates the standby state screen transition process. In other words, if the MPU 51 is in the standby state and all screen flags are OFF, the MPU 51 can determine that the display screen is the variable stop screen by transitioning from the variable game state or the jackpot game state to the standby state and setting the variable stop screen flag to ON.

[7-segment history selection screen processing]
In the 7-segment history selection screen processing executed in step S3111 of the standby state screen transition processing, processing is executed to transition the display screen from the 7-segment display unit history selection screen to a variable stop screen, a one-time history screen, a two-time history screen, or a three-time history screen in response to the player's operation of the selection determination unit 21 (selection button 21A and determination button 21B) (see FIG. 60). Here, FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the 7-segment history selection screen processing executed in the standby state screen transition processing of FIG.

<Step S3201>
63 , in the 7-segment history selection screen processing, the MPU 51 first determines whether the second up selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201). The second up selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the up selection button 211 has been started, and is set to ON in the up selection operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination processing in step S2804 of the operation detection processing in FIG. 56 . If the second up selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3202. If the second up selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3203.

<Step S3202>
If the second upper selection pattern flag is set to on (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process of changing the provisionally selected item (provisional selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the upper side. For example, if "History 2 (2 previous entries)" was provisionally selected before the second upper selection pattern flag was set to on, the provisional selection display is changed to "History 1 (1 previous entry)" (see FIG. 60 ). Note that if the upper selection button 211 is operated while "History 1 (1 previous entry)," which is displayed at the top of the option images, is provisionally selected, the provisional selection display may not be changed, or may be changed to "End," which is displayed at the bottom of the option images (see FIG. 60 ).

<Step S3203>
If the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: NO), i.e., if an operation of the upper selection button 211 has not been initiated, the MPU 51 determines whether the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203). The second lower selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation of the lower selection button 212 has been initiated, and is set to ON in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination process in step S2804 of the operation detection process of Fig. 56. If the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: YES), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3204. If the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: NO), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3205.

<Step S3204>
If the second lower selection pattern flag is set to on (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process of changing the provisionally selected item (provisional selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the lower side. For example, if "History 2 (2 previous entries)" was provisionally selected before the second upper selection pattern flag was set to on, the provisional selection display is changed to "History 3 (3 previous entries)" (see FIG. 60 ). Note that if the lower selection button 212 is operated when "End," which is displayed at the bottom of the option images, is provisionally selected, the provisional selection display may not be changed, or the provisional selection display may be changed to "History 1 (1 previous entry)," which is displayed at the top of the option images (see FIG. 60 ).

<Step S3205>
If the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: NO), the MPU 51 determines whether the second confirm operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205). The second confirm operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the confirm button 21B has started, and is set to ON in the confirm button operation detection pattern determination process executed in step S2806 of the operation detection process of FIG. 56 . That is, the MPU 51 determines whether an operation on the confirm button 21B has been performed when the display screen is the 7-segment display history selection screen. If the second confirm operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: YES), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3206. If the second confirm operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3205: NO), the MPU 51 terminates the standby state screen transition process.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
If the second confirm operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment history screen flag to OFF (step S3206) and determines whether the item provisionally selected when the confirm button 21B is operated is "End" (step S3207). If the item provisionally selected when the confirm button 21B is operated is "End" (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3208, and if the item provisionally selected when the confirm button 21B is operated is not "End" (step S3207: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3210.

<Steps S3208 and S3209>
If the provisionally selected item when the decision button 21B is operated is "End" (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 transitions the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen (step S3208) (see FIG. 60). Then, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation stop screen flag, which indicates that the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen, to ON (step S3209), and terminates the standby state screen transition process.

<Step S3210>
When the enter button 21B is operated and the provisionally selected item is not "End" (step S3207: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the provisionally selected item is "History 1 (previous)" (step S3210). If the provisionally selected item is "History 1 (previous)" (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3211, and if the provisionally selected item is not "History 1 (previous)" (step S3210: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3213.

<Steps S3211 and S3212>
If the provisionally selected item is "History 1 (previous)" (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the previous history screen (step S3211) (see FIG. 60), sets the previous history screen flag to on (step S3212), and terminates the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

<Step S3213>
When the enter button 21B is operated and the provisionally selected item is not "History 1 (1 previous)" (step S3210: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the provisionally selected item is "History 2 (2 previous)" (step S3213). If the provisionally selected item is "History 2 (2 previous)" (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3214, and if the provisionally selected item is not "History 2 (2 previous)" (step S3213: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3216.

<Steps S3214 and S3215>
If the provisionally selected item is "History 2 (2 previous times)" (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 2 previous history screen (step S3214) (see FIG. 60), sets the 2 previous history screen flag to on (step S3215), and terminates the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

<Steps S3216 and S3217>
If the provisionally selected item when the decision button 21B is operated is not "History 2 (2 previous times)" (step S3213: No), the MPU 51 can determine that the provisionally selected item is "History 3 (3 previous times)", and therefore changes the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 3 previous history screen (step S3216) (see FIG. 60), sets the 3 previous history screen flag to ON (step S3217), and terminates the 7-segment history selection screen processing.

In this way, on the 7-segment history screen executed in standby mode, the display screen can be switched from the 7-segment display history selection screen to any of the previous history screens, the previous history screen, and the previous history screen. This allows players to confirm all or part of the specific information corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball port 373 of the Kroon device 37 for the past three predetermined periods (see FIG. 60). This allows players to reconfirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 if they miss or forget the display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 at the end of a jackpot game. Furthermore, when a player is replaced, the new player can review the past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39. This allows players to identify or guess multiple non-set values (set values) by taking into account the past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39, thereby improving the convenience of identifying or guessing non-set values (set values).

In particular, in the standby state, unless a variable game is executed by shooting the game ball 99, the display screen will not transition from the history screen (the previous history screen, the previous history screen, and the previous history screen) to another screen, such as a variable stop screen, unless the player intentionally performs a screen transition operation. Therefore, by stopping the shooting of the game ball 99 and maintaining the standby state, the player is not subject to time constraints such as when specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the end of a jackpot game. This allows the player to carefully and deliberately take their time to review the specific information that was previously displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at their own pace. This allows the player to carefully consider at their own pace when identifying or guessing multiple non-set values (set values) based on past specific information, thereby improving the convenience of identifying or guessing multiple non-set values (set values).

In this embodiment, the past specific information that can be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the symbol display unit 341 by the player's operation (intention) in the standby state is for the past three predetermined periods, but there is no limit to the number of past specific information that can be displayed. In other words, it may be possible to check specific information for the past one, two, or four or more predetermined periods.

Furthermore, the display of past specific information is not limited to the symbol display unit 341, and may be performed by other display means as long as it has a display function. For example, past specific information may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, or on a display unit different from the symbol display unit 341 or the 7-segment display unit 39, such as a display unit provided separately for displaying past specific information. Furthermore, if there is a display unit provided separately from the symbol display unit 341 for executing part of an effect such as a variable game effect, it is also possible to display past information on that display unit.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to third embodiments described above are possible, to the extent applicable.

Fifth Embodiment
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which, based on the number of times a specific condition is satisfied during a specific period, after a specific period has elapsed (at the end of a jackpot game), all or part of the specific information corresponding to each of a plurality of non-set values (set values) is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39, and the presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display unit 39 ends with the end of the jackpot game. In other words, in the first embodiment described above, each time a specific period set in a predetermined period elapses, specific information is displayed for a specified period that is set after the specific period has elapsed.

When displaying numbers corresponding to multiple non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39, all segments A through G of the 7-segment display unit 39 become control targets, allowing the numbers to be identified (non-set values). Furthermore, the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be identified before all segments A through G become control targets. For example, if segments A through G are controlled in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, when segment A, the first control target, is turned off, the candidate numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are "1" and "4." Then, when segment F, the sixth control target, is turned on, the number "4" can be recognized, and when segment F is turned off, the number "1" can be recognized. In other words, the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when segment F, the sixth control target, becomes the control target, before all segments A through G become control targets. Furthermore, when segment A, the first control target, is turned on, the candidate numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are "2," "3," "5," and "6." When segment B, the second control target, is turned on, it can be determined to be either "2" or "3," and when segment B is turned off, it can be determined to be either "5" or "6." When segment C, the third control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "3," and when segment C is turned off, it can be recognized as "2." In other words, the numbers "2" or "3" can be recognized when segment C, the third control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become control targets. When segment E, the fifth control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "6," and when segment E is turned off, it can be recognized as "5." In other words, the numbers "5" or "6" can be recognized when segment E, the fifth control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become control targets. In other words, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized when segment C, the third control target, is turned on or off, the numbers "5" and "6" can be recognized when segment E, the fifth control target, is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when segment F, the sixth control target, is turned on or off.

However, in the first embodiment described above, segments A through G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all segments A through G have become the target of control. Therefore, even if a player is able to recognize a number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 before all segments A through G have become the target of control, control of segments A through G to display the next number to be displayed does not begin until all segments A through G have become the target of control. Therefore, even if a player recognizes a number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 before all segments A through G have become the target of control, information identifying the number already recognized by the player is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the next number to be displayed begins to be displayed. In other words, if segments A through G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all segments A through G have become the target of control, information unnecessary to the player may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, raising concerns that the player's interest in the game may decrease while such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

In addition, in the first embodiment described above, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled at the end of a jackpot game each time a specific period set for that jackpot game elapses, so all or part of the numbers (specific information) corresponding to each of the multiple non-set values are gradually displayed each time a specific period elapses. Therefore, if a number corresponding to one of the non-set values is displayed during an earlier specific period, it is possible that the player will forget that number. In this case, it becomes difficult to identify or guess the set value from the multiple non-set values.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the non-set value display means (lamp display unit) has multiple information display units (six individual lamp units) equal to or greater than the number of non-set values (five), and each information display unit displays information (numbers) identifying the non-set value. Each information display unit has two states: a display state (on state) in which specific information is displayed, and a non-display state (off state) in which specific information is not displayed. When an information display unit is in the display state, a non-set value can be identified by the specific information displayed on the information display unit. In this way, when the information display unit is in either the display state or the non-display state, a non-set value can be identified by the specific information presented on the information display unit in the display state. In other words, in this embodiment, only information that can identify a non-set value is displayed as specific information, and information that can be used to infer a non-set value is not displayed. Therefore, after specific information that can identify a non-set value is presented, specific information for inferring that non-set value is not unnecessarily presented, preventing a loss of interest in the game due to the presentation of unnecessary specific information.

There are no particular restrictions on the non-set value display means, but examples include a display device with a group of multiple lamps that can be turned on and off individually, a display device with multiple 7-segment displays, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot matrix display, and a plasma display. Also, a display device that displays a variably displayed decorative pattern could be used as the non-set value display means.

In addition, in this embodiment, a number of information display units corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied during a predetermined period are displayed, and the information display unit that was displayed first during at least the specified period remains displayed until the end of the jackpot game, which sets the end of the specified period. For example, an information display unit that was displayed during an earlier specified period within the same specified period also remains displayed during the subsequent specified period. In this way, an information display unit that was displayed during an earlier specified period within the same specified period also remains displayed during the subsequent specified period, allowing it to be checked at any time during at least the specified period. This prevents the specific information that was displayed during the earlier specified period within the same specified period from being forgotten, improving convenience when identifying multiple non-set values based on the specific information, and ultimately when identifying or inferring set values.

The information display unit that is displayed during a specific period may remain displayed at all times for the specified period and until the end of the jackpot game, which is set as the end of the specified period, or may remain displayed only during the jackpot game, or may remain displayed only for the specified period.

In one example of this embodiment, the lamp display unit has six individual lamp display units numbered 1 through 6. By winning the lamp lighting lottery, which is triggered by a gaming ball entering the special outlet ball hole of the Kroon device during a specific period, the individual lamp display units numbered with a number corresponding to a non-set value will be lit as soon as the lamp lighting lottery is won, without having to wait for the specific period to pass. Then, during the specified period for which the specific period is set, the lit state will remain until the jackpot game ends, which is the end of the specified period.

This embodiment will be described below with reference to Figures 64 to 71, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above. Note that Figures 69 to 71 show modified examples of this embodiment.

Here, Figure 64 is a front view showing an example of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, Figure 65 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 shown in Figure 64, and Figure 66 is a diagram showing an example of the lighting on/off of the lamp display unit 35.

As shown in FIG. 64, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment is provided with a special out ball discharge section 38A instead of the gaming ball retention section 38 of the first embodiment, and a lamp display section 35 is provided on the gaming board 31 instead of the 7-segment display section 39 of the first embodiment.

The special out ball discharge unit 38A discharges game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 of the crane device 37 to the back side of the game board 31. This special out ball discharge unit 38A has a configuration in which the stopper unit 383 is omitted from the game ball retention unit 38 of the first embodiment described above, and has a configuration similar to the game ball retention unit 38 except for the omission of the stopper unit 383. With this type of special out ball discharge unit 38A, game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 are discharged to the back side of the game board 31 without being retained (stopped) in the special out ball discharge unit 38A. Therefore, game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball port 373 are not detected by the special out ball sensor 384 after a specific period has elapsed, as in the first embodiment described above, but are detected by the special out ball sensor 384 every time a game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 373, even during the specific period.

The lamp display unit 35 displays specific information identifying non-set values and includes multiple (six) individual lamp units (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) that can be individually turned on and off. The first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are arranged in a row (linearly) in the left-right direction. As shown in Figure 65, the lamp display unit 35 is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5. As a result, as can be seen from Figure 66, the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 can be individually turned on and off.

The first individual lamp unit 351 is marked with the number 1, and when the first individual lamp unit 351 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game set value 1, and game set value 1 is negated as the set value. The second individual lamp unit 352 is marked with the number 2, and when the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game set value 2, and game set value 2 is negated as the set value. The third individual lamp unit 353 is marked with the number 3, and when the third individual lamp unit 353 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game set value 3, and game set value 3 is negated as the set value. The fourth individual lamp unit 354 is marked with the number 4, and when the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game set value 4, and game set value 4 is negated as the set value. The fifth individual lamp unit 355 is marked with the number 5, and when the fifth individual lamp unit 355 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game set value 5, and game set value 5 is negated as the set value. The sixth individual lamp unit 356 is marked with the number 6, and when the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is lit, one of the multiple non-set values is game set value 6, and game set value 6 is negated as the set value.

In other words, in the lamp display unit 35, the numbers attached to the individual lamp units 351-356 that are lit correspond to multiple non-set values, and the game set value corresponding to these numbers is rejected as the set value. When the five individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to all (five) non-set values are lit, one individual lamp unit 351-356 corresponding to the set value is turned off, and the number associated with the one individual lamp unit 351-356 that is turned off corresponds to the set value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(A), when the second through fifth individual lamp units 352-356 are lit and only the first individual lamp unit 351 is off, the non-set values are identified as 2-6 and the set value is 1. As shown in FIG. 66(B), when the first, third through sixth individual lamp units 351, 353-356 are lit and only the second individual lamp unit 352 is off, the non-set values are identified as 1, 3-6 and the set value is 2. As shown in FIG. 66(C), when the first, second, fourth through sixth individual lamp units 351, 352, 354-356 are lit and only the third individual lamp unit 353 is off, the non-set values are identified as 1, 2, 4-6 and the set value is 3. As shown in FIG. 66(D), when the first to third, fifth, and sixth individual lamp units 351 to 353, 355, and 356 are lit and only the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is off, the non-set values are identified as 1 to 3, 5, and 6, and the set value is identified as 4. As shown in FIG. 66(E), when the first to fourth and sixth individual lamp units 351 to 354 and 356 are lit and only the fifth individual lamp unit 355 is off, the non-set values are identified as 1 to 4 and 6, and the set value is identified as 5. As shown in FIG. 66(F), when the first to fifth individual lamp units 351 to 355 are lit and only the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is off, the non-set values are identified as 1 to 5, and the set value is identified as 6. The first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 are controlled by the set value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In the set value suggestion process of this embodiment, control is executed to turn on and off the lamp display unit 35 (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356), and a set value is suggested by identifying a non-set value based on the on or off state of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356. Here, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the set value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. In the set value suggestion process of this embodiment, control is executed to turn on and off the lamp display unit 35 (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356), and a set value is suggested by identifying a non-set value based on the on or off state of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356. The procedure for the set value suggestion process will be described below with reference to FIG. 67.

<Step S3301>
As shown in Fig. 67, in step S3301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending presentation start flag is set to ON. The ending presentation start flag is a flag that starts the ending presentation, and is set to ON in step S2116 of the command determination process in Fig. 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time for the ending presentation to start based on the ending presentation start flag. Here, if the ending presentation start flag is ON (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds with the process to step S3302, and if the ending presentation start flag is OFF (step S3301: No), the MPU 51 proceeds with the process to step S3311.

<Step S3302>
If the ending effect start flag is on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the special out ball detection flag is set to on (step S3302). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a gaming ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to on in step S2114 of the command determination process of Fig. 37. Here, if the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3303, and if the special out ball detection flag is off (step S3302: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S3303>
If the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), that is, if it is detected that the gaming ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the crane device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is held to determine whether or not to light up the individual lamp units 351 to 356. That is, every time a gaming ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373 of the crane device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is held to determine whether or not to light up the individual lamp units 351 to 356.

In the first embodiment described above, the set value can be recognized by displaying five numbers corresponding to multiple non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39 before the end of the 5R normal jackpot game, which sets the end of the specified period. To display five numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39, each of the seven segments A through G must be controlled five times, so a specific condition must be met 35 times (7 x 5 times). In other words, 35 game balls 99 must enter the special outlet ball port 373 of the crane device 37 during the specified period.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the first through sixth individual lamp units 351 through 356 of the lamp display unit 35 display information corresponding to non-set values, and the first through sixth individual lamp units 351 through 356 are controlled in only two states: on and off. Therefore, in order for the lamp display unit 35 to display five non-set values so that the set values can be recognized, it is sufficient for specific conditions to be met five or more times. Furthermore, this embodiment employs a crane device 37 similar to that used in the first embodiment. Therefore, if specific conditions for controlling the first through sixth individual lamp units 351 through 356 are set in the same manner as in the first embodiment, it is clear that the five individual lamp units 351 through 356 displaying non-set values will be lit with a small number of jackpots.

In this embodiment, the specific conditions for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351-356 are that a gaming ball 99 enters the special outlet ball port 373 of the crane device 37, as well as winning the lamp lighting lottery. In other words, by employing the lamp lighting lottery, the difficulty of achieving the specific conditions is adjusted, and the difficulty of identifying all of the multiple non-set values is adjusted. This adjusts the difficulty of lighting the five individual lamp units 351-356 that display numbers corresponding to the non-set values on the lamp display unit 35, preventing the five non-set values from being easily identified, i.e., preventing the set values from being easily recognized.

The probability of winning in the lamp lighting lottery is set so that the difficulty of controlling the lighting of the five individual lamp units 351-356 is the same or approximately the same as the difficulty of displaying five numbers using the 7-segment display unit 39 in the first embodiment described above. Furthermore, the probability of winning in the lamp lighting lottery may be the same for the five individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to multiple non-set values, or the probability of winning for at least one individual lamp unit 351-356 may be different from the other individual lamp units 351-356.

Setting the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery to the same value for each of the five individual lamp units 351-356 stabilizes the probability that individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to non-set values will light up, providing a gameplay feature. When setting the winning probability to the same value for each of the five individual lamp units 351-356, the winning probability is set to approximately 100 x (1/7)% (= 14.3%) (e.g., 10% to 20%). This is because, in the first embodiment described above, one number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 when seven game balls 99 enter the special outlet ball opening 373 of the crane device 37. Therefore, in this embodiment, when seven game balls 99 enter the special outlet ball opening 373, approximately one individual lamp unit 351-356 is lit on average. Furthermore, if the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to multiple non-set values, the winning probability is not limited to 10% to 20% and can be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, if the lottery condition that triggers the lamp lighting lottery to light one of the five individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to multiple non-set values is a different lottery condition from the game ball 99 entering the special outlet ball opening 373 of the crane device 37, the probability of winning the lamp lighting lottery can be set according to the difficulty of achieving this lottery condition. In other words, if the difficulty of achieving the lottery condition is low, the probability of winning the lamp lighting lottery can be set low, and the more difficult the lottery condition is to be achieved, the higher the probability of winning the lamp lighting lottery can be set. In this way, by setting the probability of winning the lamp lighting lottery according to the difficulty of achieving the lottery condition, the difficulty of achieving the specific condition required to light one individual lamp unit 351-356 can be made uniform regardless of the type of specific condition. This makes it possible to apply a variety of conditions as specific conditions (or more accurately, as lottery triggers).

On the other hand, if the winning probability for at least one individual lamp unit 351-356 is made different from the other individual lamp units 351-356, gameplay characteristics will be provided in which there is variation in the probability that the individual lamp unit 351-356 corresponding to the non-set value will be lit. When the winning probability for at least one individual lamp unit 351-356 is made different from the other individual lamp units 351-356, it is possible to set the winning probability lower for individual lamp units 351-356 that are later in the control order. As an example, the winning probabilities are set to 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, and 5%, starting with the individual lamp unit 351-356 that is earliest in the control order.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lamp lighting lottery has been won. If the lamp lighting lottery has been won (step S3304: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3305. If the lamp lighting lottery has not been won (step S3304: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value process.

<Step S3305>
If the lamp lighting lottery has been won (step S3304: Yes), the MPU 51 reads out information about the lamps that have already been lit (step S3305).

Here, the already-lit lamp information is information regarding the individual lamp units 351-356 that are currently lit, and includes already-lit lamp flag information, as shown in Figures 68(B) and 68(C). The already-lit lamp flag information consists of a first already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the first individual lamp unit 351 is lit, a second already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit, a third already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the third individual lamp unit 353 is lit, a fourth already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is lit, a fifth already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the fifth individual lamp unit 355 is lit, and a sixth already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is lit. Each already-lit lamp flag is set to on when the individual lamp unit 351-356 is lit, and set to off when the individual lamp unit is off. In the example shown in FIG. 68(B), all already-lit lamp flags are set to off (initial state), indicating that all of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are off. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 68(C), the second already-lit lamp flag is set to on, and the first, third to sixth already-lit lamp flags are set to off, indicating that the second individual lamp unit 352 is on, and the first, third to sixth individual lamp units 351, 353 to 356 are off.

<Step S3306>
In step S3306, the MPU 51 determines whether all of the lit lamp flags in the lit lamp information are set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether all of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that specify non-set values are lit. If all of the lit lamp flags in the lit lamp information are set to ON (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 51 terminates the setting value suggestion process. That is, if all of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that specify non-set values are lit, there are no other individual lamp units 351 to 356 that should be lit, and therefore the setting value suggestion process terminates. On the other hand, if any of the lit lamp flags in the lit lamp information are set to OFF (step S3306: No), the process proceeds to step S3307.

<Step S3307>
If the already-lit lamp information includes an already-lit lamp flag that is set to OFF (step S3306: No), the MPU 51 reads out the control order of the individual lamps (lamp control order) (step S3307).

Here, the lamp control order is set using a procedure similar to that of the display order setting process (see Figure 35) of the first embodiment described above. That is, when the power is turned on or the setting values are changed, the lamp control order is determined by referring to the lamp control order determination table based on the setting values stored in RAM 412. This lamp control order determination table is similar to the number display order determination table (see Figure 36) of the first embodiment described above, and the numbers in the number display order determination table can be thought of as numbers assigned to individual lamps. The number 1 in the number display order determination table of the first embodiment described above corresponds to the first individual lamp unit 351, and similarly, the numbers 2 to 6 in the number display order determination table of the first embodiment described above correspond to the second to sixth individual lamp units 352 to 356, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 68(A), when the setting value is 1 and display order A1 is determined, the control order of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is second individual lamp unit 352 → third individual lamp unit 353 → fourth individual lamp unit 354 → fifth individual lamp unit 355 → sixth individual lamp unit 356. Furthermore, in the number display order determination table in the first embodiment described above, the probability that each display order will be selected is the same, and in the lamp control order determination table in this embodiment, the probability that each lamp control order will be selected is also the same.

The lamp control order can be set when the power is turned on or the setting value is changed, but it can also be set when a specified period begins. Also, the lamp control order does not need to have the same probability of being selected.

<Steps S3308 to S3310>
In step S3308, the MPU 51 determines the individual lamp units 351-356 to be controlled based on the lamp control order read in step S3305 and the already-lit lamp information read in step S3307 (step S3308), and lights up the individual lamp units 351-356 (step S3309). That is, a lamp lighting lottery is held each time a gaming ball 99 enters the special outlet ball port 373 of the crane device 37, and if the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp units 351-356 are lit, thereby presenting specific information indicating a non-set value. The MPU 51 then updates the already-lit lamp information (step S3310) and terminates the setting value suggestion process. For example, when the second individual lamp unit 352 is turned on when all the already lit lamp flags are set to off (initial state) as in the example shown in Figure 68 (B) in the already lit lamp information, the second already lit lamp flag corresponding to the second individual lamp unit 352 is set to on as shown in Figure 68 (C).

As such, in this embodiment, a lamp lighting lottery is held each time a gaming ball 99 enters the special outlet ball port 373 of the crane device 37. If the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp units 351-356 are lit, making it possible to identify a non-set value. In other words, in this embodiment, the individual lamp units 351-356 are lit, making it possible to identify a non-set value even before the specific period has elapsed. In this way, by having the individual lamp units 351-356 in either the lit or unlit state, the non-set value can be identified by the number attached to the lit individual lamp unit 351-356. In other words, in this embodiment, only information that can identify a non-set value is presented by the lighting of the individual lamp units 351-356, and information that can be used to infer a non-set value is not presented. Therefore, after specific information that can identify a non-set value has been presented, specific information for inferring that non-set value is not unnecessarily presented, preventing a loss of interest in the game due to the presentation of unnecessary specific information.

<Step S3311>
If the ending effect start flag is OFF (step S3301: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game effect end flag is ON (step S3311). The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag that ends the jackpot game effect (ending effect), and is set ON in step S2118 of the command determination process of Fig. 37. Then, if the jackpot game effect end flag is ON (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3312, and if the jackpot game effect end flag is OFF (step S3311: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S3312>
If the jackpot game presentation end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot type to be ended is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312). Whether the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot can be determined based on whether the 5R normal jackpot flag, which can be set to on in step S2103 of FIG. 37, is on. If the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3313, and if the jackpot type is not a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: No), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
If the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off any individual lamp units 351-356 of the lamp display unit 35 that are lit (step S3313), clears (initializes) the lit lamp information, and terminates the setting value suggestion process. That is, the individual lamp units 351-356 of the lamp display unit 35 are turned off in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, which sets the end of a predetermined period. As a result, the lit individual lamp units 351-356 remain lit until the 5R normal jackpot game, which sets the end of a predetermined period, ends. Therefore, until the 5R normal jackpot game, which sets the end of a predetermined period, ends, it is possible to confirm that the individual lamp units 351-356 are lit, i.e., the specific information identifying the non-set value. Therefore, there is no risk of forgetting previously presented specific information during the same specified period, and convenience is improved when identifying multiple non-set values based on the specific information, and ultimately when identifying or inferring set values.

In this embodiment, if a player wins the lamp lighting lottery, which is executed when a gaming ball 99 enters the special outlet ball opening 373 of the crane device 37, the individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to non-set values in the lamp display unit 35 are lit. However, conducting the lamp lighting lottery is optional, and the individual lamp units 351-356 corresponding to non-set values may be lit when a gaming ball 99 enters the special outlet ball opening 373 without conducting the lamp lighting lottery, as in the first embodiment described above. In this way, if the lamp lighting lottery is not conducted, it is possible to adjust the probability of the individual lamp units 351-356 being lit by increasing the difficulty of the gaming ball 99 entering the special outlet ball opening 373 of the crane device 37, or by sorting the gaming ball 99 that enters the special outlet ball opening 373 into a route detected by the special outlet ball sensor 384 and a route not detected by the special outlet ball sensor 384.

As described above, in this embodiment, the individual lamp units 351-356 of the lamp display unit 35 that display non-set values are in one of two states: lit or unlit, and information identifying the non-set value is displayed based on the type (number) of the individual lamp units 351-356 that are lit. In other words, in this embodiment, only information that can identify the non-set value is displayed by the lighting of the individual lamp units 351-356, and information that can be used to infer the non-set value is not displayed. Therefore, after specific information that can identify a single non-set value is displayed, specific information for inferring that non-set value is not unnecessarily displayed, preventing a loss of interest in the game due to the display of unnecessary specific information.

Furthermore, the lit individual lamp units 351-356 are immediately lit by winning the lamp lighting lottery, which is executed when a gaming ball 99 enters the special outlet ball port 373 of the crane device 37. The lit individual lamp units 351-356 remain lit until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game, which sets the end of the predetermined period. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game, which sets the end of the predetermined period, the specific information identifying the non-set value can be confirmed at any time based on whether the individual lamp units 351-356 are lit. This prevents the player from forgetting the specific information presented in a previous specific period within the same predetermined period, improving convenience when identifying multiple non-set values based on the specific information, and ultimately when identifying or guessing the set value.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific conditions for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351-356 are that a gaming ball 99 enters the special outlet ball port 373 of the crane device 37, and that the lamp lighting lottery is won. This adjusts the difficulty of achieving the specific conditions based on the probability of winning the lamp lighting lottery, and adjusts the difficulty of identifying all of the multiple non-set values. Therefore, the difficulty of lighting each of the five individual lamp units 351-356 that display numbers corresponding to the non-set values on the lamp display unit 35 is adjusted, preventing the five non-set values from being easily identified, i.e., preventing the set values from being easily recognized.

The lamps are immediately lit by winning the lamp lighting lottery, which is executed when a gaming ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373 of the crane device 37; however, the fact that the lamp lighting lottery is being executed (that a gaming ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373) and the results of the lamp lighting lottery may be clearly displayed to the player on a display means other than the lamp display unit 35. For example, as shown in FIG. 69(A), the fact that the lamp lighting lottery is being executed (that a gaming ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the crane device 37) is clearly displayed to the player, the results of the lamp lighting lottery are clearly displayed to the player as shown in FIG. 69(B1) or FIG. 69(B2), and further, information regarding the lit individual lamp units 351-356 is clearly displayed on the pattern display unit 341 as shown in FIG. 69(C1) or FIG. 69(C2). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69(A), when a gaming ball 99 enters the special outlet ball opening 373 of the roulette device 37, there is a possibility that the individual lamp units 351-356 of the lamp display unit 35 will be lit; that is, an image is displayed to draw attention to the lamp display unit 35 (roulette). In this way, the symbol display unit 341 clearly indicates that a lamp lighting lottery will be executed (that the gaming ball 99 has entered the special outlet ball opening 373), so even if the player misses the gaming ball 99 entering the special outlet ball opening 373, they can still understand from the image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 that the gaming ball 99 has entered the special outlet ball opening 373, that there is a possibility that the individual lamp units 351-356 will be lit.

If the lamp lighting lottery is won, information regarding the individual lamp units 351-356 that will be lit is displayed, as shown in Figure 69 (B1). In the example shown, it is displayed that the second individual lamp unit 352 will be lit. In this way, by displaying the result of the lamp lighting lottery on the pattern display unit 341, it is possible to know whether the individual lamp units 351-356 will be lit not only on the lamp display unit 35 but also on the pattern display unit 341, thereby improving convenience.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 69 (C1), the symbol display unit 341 continuously displays information about the lit individual lamp units 351-356 during jackpot play (at least during the open/close execution mode). That is, the individual lamp units 351-356 of the lit individual lamp units 35 are displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Note that, for example, information about the lit individual lamp units 351-356 may be displayed during jackpot play (at least in the open/close execution mode) until the end of the 5R normal jackpot, for which the end of the predetermined period is set.

On the other hand, if the result of the lamp lighting lottery is a no-win, an image indicating that the result of the lamp lighting lottery is a no-win is displayed, as shown in Figure 69 (B1). In this way, while a jackpot game is being played (at least while the open/close execution mode is being played), information regarding the lit individual lamp units 351-356 is continuously displayed by the pattern display unit 341, allowing the lit individual lamp units 351-356 to be checked on the pattern display unit 341 without having to check the lamp display unit 35, thereby improving convenience.

Furthermore, the specific information indicating the non-set value may be presented only in the symbol display unit 341, rather than in the lamp display unit 35 provided separately from the symbol display unit 341. In other words, the specific information may be presented to the player only through the effects on the symbol display unit 341 related to the lamp lighting lottery during the jackpot game (open/close execution mode) described with reference to FIG. 69.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, an additional ending image for identifying a non-set value may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 during the ending presentation of a jackpot game. For example, as shown in FIG. 70, an image simulating the lamp display unit 35 is displayed as an additional ending image on the symbol display unit 341 during the ending of a jackpot game. In the example shown in FIG. 70(A), the lamp display unit 35 indicates that only the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit, while in the example shown in FIG. 70(B), the lamp display unit 35 indicates that the second to sixth individual lamp units 352 to 356 are lit and only the first individual lamp unit 351 is extinguished. In this way, by displaying the on/off state of the lamp display unit 35 by the symbol display unit 341 during the ending of a jackpot game, the on/off state of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that were lit up until the jackpot game can be confirmed, improving convenience.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lamp display unit 35 is configured with the individual lamp units 351-356 arranged in a row (line), but the lamp display unit 35 is not limited to a row of the individual lamp units 351-356, and other configurations can also be used. For example, it is possible to use a lamp display unit 35 in which the individual lamp units 351-356 are arranged in a ring as shown in Figure 71(A), or a lamp display unit 35 in which the individual lamp units 351-356 are arranged in a matrix as shown in Figure 71(B). Furthermore, the lamp display unit 35 may also be configured with the individual lamp units 351-356 arranged in a staggered pattern.

In addition, instead of the lamp display unit 35, a display device in which multiple 7-segment display devices are arranged in a row, ring, matrix, staggered pattern, etc. may be used.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first to fourth embodiments described above are possible, to the extent applicable.

[Summary of the Invention]
Below, an outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described. Note that, for the sake of convenience, reference numerals may be used to explain the correspondence between each reference numeral and each embodiment, but the invention related to the reference numeral is not limited to the specific configurations to which the reference numerals are assigned. Furthermore, it is possible to select and combine the respective configurations and processing functions described below in any desired manner.

[Appendix A1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each piece of numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
a numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is met;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the display means for a specified period of time. This allows the player to identify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and also allows the player to recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all of the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can understand the specific numerical information and enjoy guessing or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A1 is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix A3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A1 is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In a gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A2 or Supplementary Note A3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information, is displayed on the display means. This allows a player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when it is displayed on the display means, but also to infer specific numerical information based on the special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, players can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A4]
The display means (35, 39, 341) has a plurality of display areas in which the specific information is displayed,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A2 or Appendix A3, wherein the display control means (51) displays the special information in a part of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A4, the special information is displayed in some of the multiple display areas of the display means on which the specific information is displayed. In other words, the display area for the special information is shared with the display area for the specific information. This allows the specific information and the special information to be displayed on a common display means, simplifying the control for displaying the specific information and the special information and simplifying the configuration of the display means.

[Appendix A5]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A4, wherein the display means (39) has a plurality of light-emitting areas (segments A to G) as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A5, the display means has multiple light-emitting areas. Such display means can be realized using an easily available, low-cost display device, such as a seven-segment display device. This makes it possible to equip the gaming machine with display means that displays specific and special information while minimizing the complexity of the configuration and rising manufacturing costs.

[Appendix A6]
The display means (341) is capable of displaying an image,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A4, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (341) to display the specific information or the special information as an image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A6, the specific information and special information are displayed as images on the display means. Therefore, there are many options for the image types and display modes to be displayed as the specific information and special information, and the specific information and special information can be displayed in a variety of forms. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in identifying or guessing specific numerical information or predetermined numerical information based on the specific information and special information.

[Appendix A7]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A6 is characterized in that the image display means (341) is capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition judgment is displayed in a variable manner.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A7, specific information and special information are displayed on an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a pattern that suggests or clearly indicates the result of a transition determination. Therefore, when a variable display image is displayed on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using that image display means. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image can be displayed using the display means required for the gaming machine without the need for a separate display means for displaying specific information and special information.

[Appendix A8]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A7, wherein the specified period is set to a period that suggests or indicates the result of the transition determination.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A8, when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means, and the specified period during which the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means is set to a period that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination. This makes it possible to display the specific information along with the result of the transition determination. For example, when a variable pattern display image that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination is displayed on the image display means, it is also possible to simultaneously display the specific information on the image display means. This makes it possible to increase interest in the suggestion or clear indication of the result of the transition determination by displaying the specific information.

[Appendix A9]
A gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A3, characterized in that the specific condition is met when the gaming ball passes through a specific area (373).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A9, a specific condition can be met when the gaming ball passes through a specific area, allowing the player to easily understand that the specific condition has been met. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the specific condition has been met. Furthermore, when the gaming ball passes through a specific area, the display control means controls the specific information displayed on the display means. Therefore, even in situations where the game tends to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameplay by drawing attention to whether or not the gaming ball passes through a specific area.

[Appendix A10]
Further provided is a discharge port (373) for discharging the game balls on the back side of the game board (31) from which the game balls are shot out,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A9, characterized in that the specific area is the discharge outlet (373).

[Appendix A11]
It further comprises a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) from which prize balls are paid out when game balls enter the winning hole,
The outlets (373) include a first outlet (318) that discharges game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board (31), and a second outlet (373) that is different from the first outlet (318),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A10, characterized in that the specific area is the second discharge outlet (373).

[Appendix A12]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A11, characterized in that the second outlet (373) is capable of receiving balls during the special game.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes A10 to A12, when a specific condition is met in a special game, triggered by the game ball passing through the second outlet through which the game ball can enter, the content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, in special games where the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the playability by focusing on whether or not the game ball will enter the second outlet.

[Appendix A13]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A12, characterized in that the second discharge outlet (373) allows gaming balls that have passed through the variable winning opening (316) to pass through.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A13, when a specific condition is met in a special game, triggered by a gaming ball passing through a second outlet through which a gaming ball that has entered a variable winning opening can pass, the content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, in a special game, a gaming ball can be shot into the game area and enter a variable winning opening, causing the gaming ball to pass through the second outlet. Therefore, simply by playing the special game as usual, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring any special skill. This prevents players from avoiding playing the gaming machine because of the possibility of differences in skill, compared to when differences in skill may arise in order to get the gaming ball to enter the second outlet.

[Appendix A14]
The third outlet (378) through which the game ball entering the variable winning opening (316) can pass and which is different from the second outlet (373);
a distribution means (37) for distributing game balls entering the variable winning opening (316) to either the second discharge opening (373) or the third discharge opening (378);
The gaming machine described in Appendix A13, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A14, the distribution means distributes gaming balls to the second outlet and the third outlet, providing a gaming experience in which whether or not a specific condition is met depends on the distribution of gaming balls by the distribution means. This allows players to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the gaming balls in the distribution means in relation to whether or not a specific condition is met.

[Appendix A15]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix A1 to Appendix A3, characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific conditions are met during a predetermined period in which the start of the special game is set.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A15, if specific conditions are met during a predetermined period in which a special game is set to begin, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, players can enjoy guessing or determining specific numerical information, and ultimately guessing or determining specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met during the predetermined period. Furthermore, by setting the start of the predetermined period to be during a special game, players can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether specific conditions are met during the special game.

[Appendix A16]
The special game state is
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, a transition is made to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
and a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of determining by the transition determination means (41) to transition to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified, and the state is transitioned to a second game state (high probability mode),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A15 is characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A16, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the machine is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the machine will transition to the special game state at a lower probability than the second game state and the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game. In other words, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game for the so-called first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, and at least one opportunity to guess or identify the specific numerical information is guaranteed for each first win.

[Appendix A17]
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A15 or A16, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A17, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not certain conditions are met at least after the value-adding game begins.

[Appendix A18]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A15 to A17, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A18, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period begins and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. As a result, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in the special game in addition to the start, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is increased.

[Appendix A19]
The special game state is
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, a transition is made to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
and a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of determining by the transition determination means (41) to transition to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified, and the state is transitioned to a second game state (high probability mode),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A18 is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A19, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state, which transitions to the first game state after the special game ends. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination for the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, i.e., in the case of a single win where the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination for the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, i.e., in the case of a consecutive win where the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, but if the result of the transition determination for the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win where the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game, which ends the consecutive win. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set to span the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game transitions to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more often than a single win, and the more consecutive wins there are in a consecutive win, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the player is to obtain a specific condition. Not only does this increase the number of consecutive wins, but the player also benefits by obtaining more specific information that indicates specific numerical information, making it easier to guess or identify the specific numerical information and, ultimately, the predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A20]
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A18 or Appendix A19, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the value-granting game ends.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded, nor is the result of the transition determination announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A20, the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game. Therefore, if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize this blank period for the player to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during special games.

[Appendix A21]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A3, wherein the specified period is set to a period during which the special game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A21, when certain conditions are met, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means during a specified period set during the execution period of the special game. This allows the player to enjoy identifying specific numerical information, and ultimately guessing or identifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period (specified period) of the special game, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A22]
The special game has a value-imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value-imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) ends,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A21, wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded, nor is the result of the transition determination announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A22, the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game. Therefore, if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize this blank period for the player to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during special games.

[Appendix A23]
When the specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, the display control means (51) displays specific information (numbers) indicating at least the specific numerical information (non-set value) on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
The gaming machine according to Appendix A21 or Appendix A22, wherein the specified period is set at least after the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A23, if a specific condition is met within a predetermined period, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the specific condition is met within the predetermined period, and can enjoy the game by focusing on the specific information displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has elapsed. This increases the enjoyment of the game from the start of the predetermined period until the specific information is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed.

[Appendix A24]
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The special game state is
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, a transition is made to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
and a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of determining by the transition determination means (41) to transition to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified, and the state is transitioned to a second game state (high probability mode),
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is to be transitioned when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game,
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A21 to Appendix A23, characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state that is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A24, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the special game state to which the machine is transitioned when the result of the transition determination in the first game state indicates a transition to the special game state. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is the first win. Meanwhile, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the first special game state to which the machine is transitioned to the first game state after the completion of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the last special game to be executed, regardless of whether it is the first win or a series of wins. In this way, the predetermined period begins with the first win, ends with the last special game to be executed, and specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has elapsed. This provides a gaming experience that effectively utilizes the period during which the special game is executed to present specific information indicating specific numerical information to the player. Furthermore, in the case of a series of wins, it is also possible to present a quantity (amount) of information corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the series of wins all at once after the predetermined period has elapsed. This allows players to check a large amount of information about the specific information in a short period of time after the specified period has passed, improving convenience when identifying or inferring specific numerical information, and ultimately specific numerical information, based on specific information that indicates specific numerical information.

[Appendix A25]
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game to be started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the specific period has elapsed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A23 or Appendix A24, characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific conditions are met during the specific period.

The gaming machine according to Appendix A25 includes a specific period set for a special game that starts within a specified period. That is, if multiple special games start within a specified period, such as in a consecutive win, multiple special periods are set according to the number of special games that start within the specified period. In addition, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, if there are multiple specific periods within a specified period, it is determined whether a specific condition is met for each specific period, and if the specific condition is met during that specific period, the specific information is displayed on the display means each time the specific period elapses. This allows the player to focus on whether a specific condition is met for each special game, and if the specific condition is met, the player can focus on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the special games.

[Appendix A26]
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value-granting game ends,
The specific period includes a period during which the value-granting game is executed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A25, wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

In the gaming machine pertaining to Appendix A26, a determination is made as to whether specific conditions are met for each specific period including the value-awarding game, and if the specific conditions are met during that specific period, specific information is displayed in the ending that is executed after the value-awarding game ends. Therefore, the value-awarding game draws attention to whether specific conditions are met, and if the specific conditions are met, the ending following the end of the value-awarding game draws attention to the content of the specific information. This effectively utilizes the ending of the special game to add gameplay features that display specific information, and also draws attention to the progress of the game throughout the special game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A27]
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through a specific area (373) and wins a display lottery that is executed when the game ball passes through the specific area (373),
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A21 to A26, wherein the specified period is after the display lottery is won.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A27, specific information is displayed on the display means by winning a display lottery that is executed when a gaming ball passes through a specific area. By holding a display lottery as a condition for specific information to be displayed on the display means in this way, when a gaming ball passes through a specific area, players can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not they have won the display lottery (whether or not specific information is displayed), thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, when holding a display lottery as a condition for specific information to be displayed on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty and variability with which the specific condition is met (the difficulty and variability with which specific information is displayed). This allows for various gameplay aspects to be added to the display of specific information depending on the probability of winning the display lottery, the lottery method, etc.

[Appendix A28]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix A1 to Appendix A3, characterized in that when specific conditions are met within a specified period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information based on the number of specific conditions met within the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A28, when specific conditions are met within a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information based on the number of specific conditions met within the predetermined period is displayed on the display means. This allows the player to guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and by displaying all of the specific numerical information, the player can identify all of the specific numerical information. Furthermore, by identifying all of the specific numerical information, the player can recognize the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or identifying specific numerical information, and ultimately guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. In particular, because specific information indicating specific numerical information based on the number of specific conditions met within the predetermined period is displayed on the display means, the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on the number of specific conditions that are met, while hoping that many specific conditions will be met within the predetermined period.

[Appendix A29]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A28, wherein the display means is information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A29, the display means is information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the content displayed on the display means. This allows the player to easily grasp the specific information, which also makes it easier for the player to identify or infer the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix A30]
the specific information includes a plurality of pieces of individual information,
the information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of pieces of individual information;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A29, characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the number of individual information corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied during the specified period in the multiple display areas of the information display means.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A30, the specific information includes multiple individual pieces of information, and the information display means has multiple display areas for displaying the multiple individual pieces of information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display the multiple pieces of individual information necessary to identify the specific numerical information in any of the multiple display areas. This provides a gameplay feature that allows the difficulty of identifying or guessing the specific numerical information to be adjusted depending on which of the multiple pieces of individual information is displayed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix A31]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A30 is characterized in that each of the multiple display areas (segments A to G) displays individual information that corresponds to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A31, each of the multiple display areas displays corresponding individual information from the multiple pieces of individual information, making it possible to identify or guess the specific numerical information based on the correspondence. This allows the player to enjoy identifying or guessing the specific numerical information while looking forward to seeing which of the multiple pieces of individual information will be displayed when certain conditions are met.

[Appendix A32]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A30 or Appendix A31, wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light-emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A32, the information display means has multiple light-emitting areas. Such information display means can be realized using an easily available, low-cost display device, such as a seven-segment display device. This makes it possible to equip the gaming machine with information display means that displays specific information while minimizing the complexity of the configuration and rising manufacturing costs.

[Appendix A33]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A30 or A31, wherein the information display means (341) is capable of displaying the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A33, the information display means can display a specific image from which specific numerical information can be identified or guessed, providing a wide range of options for the appearance of the specific image and the process leading up to its display. Therefore, specific numerical information can be identified or guessed in a variety of patterns depending on the appearance of the specific image and the process leading up to its display. This improves the enjoyment of identifying or guessing specific numerical information.

[Appendix A34]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A33 is characterized in that the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition judgment is displayed in a variable manner.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A34, a specific image is displayed on an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a pattern that suggests or clearly indicates the result of a transition determination. Therefore, when a variable display image is displayed on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using that image display means. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs, as the specific image can be displayed using the display means required for the gaming machine without the need for a separate display means for displaying the specific image.

[Appendix A35]
The information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets using the plurality of display areas,
A gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A29 to Appendix A34, characterized in that the specific information is a number or an alphabet.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A35, the information display means is capable of displaying numbers or letters, and the specific information is displayed corresponding to the numbers or letters. This allows all or part of the specific information to be displayed as simple identification information such as numbers or letters, making it easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information, and allowing players to easily enjoy identifying or guessing the specific numerical information without requiring advanced gaming knowledge.

[Appendix A36]
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A29 is characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the specific information on the individual display units (351 to 356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information, depending on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A36, specific information is displayed in an individual display section corresponding to specific numerical information among multiple types of numerical information. That is, an individual display section in which specific information is displayed is specified for each type of specific numerical information. Therefore, specific information can be easily grasped by the type of individual display section in which the specific information is displayed, and specific numerical information can be easily identified. This increases convenience when identifying specific numerical information.

[Appendix A37]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A36 is characterized in that the display control means (51) controls the individual display units (351 to 356) to one of two states: a display state in which the specific information is displayed, and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A37, the individual display unit is controlled to one of two states: a display state or a non-display state. Therefore, specific numerical information can be easily identified based on the state of the individual display unit. This increases convenience when identifying specific numerical information.

[Appendix A38]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A36 or Appendix A37, wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, a ring, a matrix, or a staggered pattern.

[Appendix A39]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A36 to A38, characterized in that the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are a group of lamps.

The gaming machines described in Appendix A38 and Appendix A39 make it possible to form information display means simply and inexpensively.

[Appendix A40]
a display order determination means (51) for determining a display order in which the specific information is to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is met;
Furthermore,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix A1 to Appendix A3, characterized in that when the specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A40, the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a predetermined condition is met. In this way, the display order in which specific information is displayed is determined when a predetermined condition is met, preventing the display order of specific information from becoming constant. This prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly, and prevents the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A41]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the power of the gaming machine (10) is turned on.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A41, the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when the gaming machine is powered on. Incidentally, gaming machines are often powered on before the amusement parlor opens. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined when the gaming machine is powered on, and the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day. This prevents the display order of the specific information from becoming fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly on different business days and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A42]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (set value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A42, the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by storing predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A43]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period begins.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A43, the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a predetermined period begins. This determines the display order of specific information for each predetermined period. This prevents the display order of specific information from becoming fixed, preventing the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A44]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A44, the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a special game is started. This determines the display order of specific information for each special game. This prevents the display order of specific information from becoming fixed, preventing the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A45]
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-adding game is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A45, the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a value-awarding game is started. This determines the display order of specific information for each value-awarding game. This prevents the display order of specific information from becoming fixed, preventing the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A46]
a display content storage means (512) for storing display content of the specific information to be displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
an operating means (21) operated by a player to display the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) during a special period (e.g., a standby period) different from the specified period;
a second display control means (51) for causing the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (21) by a player during the special period;
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A46, the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operating means during a special period different from the specified period. This allows the player to cause the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period to be displayed on the second display means by operating the operating means during the special period. Therefore, if the player wants to check the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period, for example, if the player has forgotten the display content or if a player is being replaced, the player can check the display content during the special period. As a result, by checking the display content of the specified period during the special period, the player can identify or infer the specific numerical information, and can decide whether or not to play on the gaming machine based on that identification or inference.

[Appendix A47]
The game system further includes a notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A46, wherein the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A47, the special period during which the display content can be confirmed during the specified period is set to a period during which neither special games nor notification games are being played. This allows players to carefully and thoroughly check the display content at their own pace, without being subject to time constraints, and decide whether or not to play on the gaming machine.

[Appendix A48]
the display content storage means (512) is capable of storing display contents of a plurality of pieces of the specific information displayed during a plurality of different specified periods,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A46 or Appendix A47 is characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays at least one of the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content memory means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined operation is performed by a player on the operation means (21) during the special period.

[Appendix A49]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A48 is characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays on the second display means (35, 39, 341) the display content selected by the player during the special period from the display contents of the multiple specific information by the player performing a predetermined operation on the operation means (21).

[Appendix A50]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A49 is characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays two or more of the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content memory means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined operation is performed by a player on the operation means (21) during the special period.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes A48 to A50, at least one of the display contents of multiple specific information displayed over multiple specified periods can be displayed on the second display means. For example, the second display means can display a display content selected by the player from the display contents of multiple specific information stored in the display content storage means (512). In this case, the player can select the display content to be displayed on the second display means from the display contents of multiple specific information, allowing the player to view the display content they desire. This allows the display content to be viewed effectively while avoiding viewing previously viewed information or information with a small amount of information, thereby enabling efficient viewing of the display content. Furthermore, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be viewed at once, allowing the presented content to be viewed efficiently in this case as well.

[Appendix A51]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A46 to A50, characterized in that the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix A52]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A51, characterized in that the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means that displays a variable pattern (decorative pattern) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition judgment.

The gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes A51 and A52 are equipped with a first display means displayed during a specified period and a second display means displayed during a special period, and specific information is displayed by different display means during the specified period and the special period. Therefore, if information other than specific information is displayed on the second display means during the specified period, the display can be prevented from being obstructed. For example, if the second display means is a variable display image display means, the visibility of the image (e.g., image effects) displayed on this variable display image display means is prevented from being obstructed. On the other hand, during a special period (e.g., a standby state), the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by a second display means, such as a variable display image display means that displays a variable pattern. Generally, variable display image display means have a large display area, and therefore, when the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented on the variable display image display means, visibility is improved. Furthermore, the variable display image display means may be used to set various settings, such as effects and characters, executed on the gaming machine. Therefore, if the display content of specific information during a specified period is presented by the variable display image display means, it becomes possible to have the display content of specific information during a specified period presented by the variable display image display means through operations similar to those used to make various settings. This improves convenience when displaying the display content of specific information on the variable display image display means during a special period.

[Appendix A53]
the specific information includes a plurality of specific information;
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix A1 to Appendix A3, characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A53, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order that makes it easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order that makes it easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous decision is high, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A54]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A53 is characterized in that the display control means (51) displays all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order on the display means during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A54, if the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, allowing the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix A54 differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that information negating high settings such as the highest setting value is not presented.

[Appendix A55]
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information items during the predetermined period;
The display system further comprises a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A53 is characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order storage means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A55, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in one display order selected from multiple display orders that specify the priority of the display order of multiple pieces of specific information. Therefore, depending on the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, make it harder for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, or prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed in a specific display order. This makes it possible to display multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rates of multiple display orders, thereby preventing the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A56]
the plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A55, wherein the display order selection means (51) selects one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A56, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in a display order selected from multiple display orders based on predetermined numerical information. In other words, since multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, a display order can be set for each piece of predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous decision corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple pieces of specific information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A57]
The gaming machine according to appendix A56, wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders with different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selection means (51).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A57, it is also possible to make a specific display sequence easier to select, and harder to select. In other words, unlike when all display sequences have the same probability of being selected, it is possible to make it easier to identify specific non-set values, and conversely, more difficult to identify specific non-set values. This makes it possible to adjust the likelihood of a high or low setting value, etc.

[Appendix A58]
the plurality of display orders includes a first display order in which the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest advantageous determination probability among the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is the lowest;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A57 is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the first display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the first display order.

In a gaming machine according to Appendix A58, the first display order, which has the lowest priority, is likely to be selected for specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of a favorable judgment among multiple favorable judgment probabilities corresponding to multiple specific information. In other words, excluding the favorable judgment probability corresponding to predetermined numerical information, specific information indicating the specific numerical information with the lowest probability of a favorable judgment and the most unfavorable to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, because the specific numerical information that is the most unfavorable to the player is displayed last, the possibility of the most unfavorable probability of a favorable judgment for the player and an even more favorable probability of a favorable judgment for the player remains until the last specific information is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp that the favorable probability of a favorable judgment is the most unfavorable to the player, which prevents early termination of play on the gaming machine and prevents a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

[Appendix A59]
The specific information includes first specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of favorable determination among a plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the highest probability of favorable determination among the plurality of favorable determination probabilities,
the plurality of display orders includes a second display order in which the first identification information and the second identification information have the lowest two priorities,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A57 is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the second display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the second display order.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A59, the second display order, which has a low priority, is likely to be selected for specific numerical information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of a favorable outcome among the multiple favorable outcome probabilities corresponding to the multiple specific information. Therefore, as with the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A58, it is difficult for a player to grasp that the favorable outcome probability is the most unfavorable to the player, thereby preventing early termination of play on the gaming machine and reducing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the second display order has a low priority for specific numerical information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the highest probability of a favorable outcome among the multiple favorable outcome probabilities corresponding to the multiple specific information. Therefore, it is difficult for a player to grasp not only the unfavorable outcome probability but also the favorable outcome probability for the player. In this way, the low priority of two specific numerical information indicating two specific numerical information corresponding to an unfavorable outcome probability and an advantageous outcome probability for the player makes it difficult for a player to determine until the end which of the two opposing favorable outcome probabilities is favorable to the player, thereby increasing interest in the specific information displayed on the display means.

[Appendix A60]
The plurality of display orders include a third display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable determination probability higher than the first favorable determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable determination probability lower than the first favorable determination probability,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A57 is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the third display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the third display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A60, the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of an advantageous determination higher than the first probability of an advantageous determination is set higher, with a lower selection rate for the third display order than for specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of an advantageous determination lower than the first probability of an advantageous determination. By setting such a high selection rate for the third display order, the player can be made to expect that the probability of an advantageous determination will be higher than the actual first probability of an advantageous determination up until just before the first probability of an advantageous determination is grasped. This allows the player to enjoy guessing specific information (predetermined information) while hoping for a high probability of an advantageous determination up until just before the first probability of an advantageous determination is grasped.

[Appendix A61]
The plurality of display orders include a fourth display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable determination probability lower than the first favorable determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable determination probability higher than the first favorable determination probability,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A57 is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the fourth display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the fourth display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A61, the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of an advantageous determination lower than the first probability of an advantageous determination is set higher, with a lower selection rate for the fourth display order than for specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of an advantageous determination higher than the first probability of an advantageous determination. By setting such a high selection rate for the fourth display order, specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of an advantageous determination lower than the first probability of an advantageous determination is left as hidden specific information immediately before the first probability of an advantageous determination is determined. As a result, the final candidates for the first probability of an advantageous determination are the actual first probability of an advantageous determination and specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of an advantageous determination lower than the first probability of an advantageous determination. As a result, the player ultimately determines the predetermined numerical information corresponding to the advantageous first probability of an advantageous determination as the first probability of an advantageous determination (predetermined numerical information), thereby enhancing the enjoyment felt when the set value is determined.

[Appendix A62]
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A3, further comprising a display restriction means (51) that restricts the specific information from being displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during periods other than the specified period.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix A62, the display of specific information on the display means is restricted outside of the specified period. Therefore, the display of specific information is executed as a bonus for players who perform a game that satisfies the specific conditions for displaying that specific information. This prevents other players from taking advantage of the bonus obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information that can be used to identify or guess the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A63]
The game system further includes a notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
A gaming machine as described in Appendix A62, characterized in that the period other than the specified period is a standby period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A63, the display of specific information on the display means is restricted during a standby period when neither a special game nor an announcement game is being executed. Here, player changes generally occur during the standby period. Therefore, by restricting the display of specific information on the display means during the standby period, it is possible to more reliably prevent other players from taking advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information that can be used to identify or guess the specific numerical information.

[Appendix A64]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A62 or Appendix A63, characterized in that the display restriction means (51) restricts the display of the specific information that was previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period, during periods other than the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A64, during periods other than the specified period, the display of specific information previously displayed on the display means during the specified period is restricted. In other words, specific information is only displayed during the specified period, and the display of the display history of past specific information is also restricted outside the specified period. This makes it impossible to check specific information previously displayed based on the display history, more reliably preventing other players from taking advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information to identify or guess specific numerical information based on the display history.

[Appendix A65]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix A1 to Appendix A3, characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information (numbers) on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a first display order when a first specific condition is met within a predetermined period, and displays the multiple specific information (numbers) on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a first display order different from the first display order when a second specific condition different from the first specific condition is met.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A65, when a first specific condition is met, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a first display order, and when a second specific condition is met, multiple pieces of specific information (numbers) are displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of the multiple pieces of specific information is set according to the type of specific condition that is met. This makes it difficult for players to recognize the display order of the multiple pieces of specific information, preventing multiple pieces of specific numerical information from being easily identified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents players from quickly realizing that the probability of a winning combination is low when the probability of a winning combination corresponds to a low probability of winning. As a result, even when the probability of a winning combination is low, early termination of play on the gaming machine is prevented, preventing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

[Appendix A66]
the first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41);
The gaming machine described in Appendix A65, characterized in that the second specific condition includes that second predetermined numerical information (setting value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from the multiple types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A66, the first specific condition includes first predetermined numerical information being stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition includes second predetermined numerical information being stored in the numerical information storage means. In other words, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is determined based on the predetermined numerical information, and multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a specified period in accordance with that display order. In other words, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each piece of specific numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous decision corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple pieces of specific information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A67]
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information items during the predetermined period when the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied;
The display system further comprises a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A65 or Appendix A66, characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A67, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in one display order selected from multiple display orders that specify the priority of the display order of multiple pieces of specific information. Therefore, depending on the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, make it harder for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, or prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed in a specific display order. This makes it possible to display multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rates of multiple display orders, thereby preventing the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A68]
the plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine described in Appendix A67, wherein the display order selection means (51) selects one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A68, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in a display order selected from multiple display orders based on predetermined numerical information. In other words, since multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, a display order can be set for each piece of predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous decision corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple pieces of specific information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A69]
The device further includes a second display control means (41) for causing a second display means (45) to display predetermined information (numbers) indicating the predetermined numerical information,
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to a player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted,
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3, characterized in that the predetermined information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A69, specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means, which is located in a position visible to the player, and the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45), which is located in a position where the player's visibility is limited. That is, when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the first display means, which is located in a position visible to the player, for a specified period of time. This allows the player to identify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and also allows the player to recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can understand the specific numerical information and enjoy guessing or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, by displaying the predetermined information on the second display means in a position that limits player visibility, it is possible to prevent players from understanding the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during business hours. On the other hand, the predetermined information can be understood by the amusement hall outside of business hours. This allows the amusement hall to check the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means outside of business hours, and if the predetermined numerical information is to be changed, the predetermined information showing the changed predetermined numerical information can be checked, simplifying the process of changing the predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A70]
It further comprises a game board (31) from which the game balls are shot out,
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine described in Appendix A69, wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A70, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than predetermined numerical information is displayed on a first display means provided on the front side of the gaming board, and predetermined information indicating predetermined numerical information is displayed on a second display means provided on the rear side of the gaming board. Therefore, the specific information displayed on the first display means is easy to view, and visibility of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be easily restricted.

[Appendix A71]
The game board (31) is fixed to a frame body (12) so as to be openable and closable,
The gaming machine described in Appendix A70, wherein the second display means (45) is provided in a position that is visible when the gaming board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A71, a second display means is provided on the back side of the gaming board, which is fixed to the frame so that it can be opened and closed. Therefore, closing the gaming board prevents the player from seeing the predetermined information displayed on the second display means, while opening the gaming board allows the gaming parlor to check the predetermined information displayed on the second display means. This makes it possible to achieve both a state in which the predetermined information on the second display means is visible and a state in which visibility is restricted, through the simple act of opening and closing the gaming board.

[Appendix A72]
The second display control means (41)
The second display means (45) is controllable between a display state in which the predetermined numerical information is displayed and a non-display state in which the predetermined numerical information is not displayed,
When a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31), the game board (31) is controlled from the non-display state to the display state,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A70 or Appendix A71, characterized in that when a second operation is performed on the specific operating means (46), the gaming machine is controlled from the display state to the non-display state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A72, by operating a specific operating means provided on the back side of the gaming board, it is possible to select between a display state in which predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the gaming hall's business hours, it is possible to reliably prevent players from understanding the predetermined information on the second display means, even when the gaming board is opened due to a ball jam or other problem in the gaming machine.

[Appendix B1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each piece of numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
a numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is met;
Equipped with
The specific condition can be established when the game ball passes through a specific area (373),
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, a specific condition can be fulfilled when the gaming ball passes through a specific area, allowing the player to easily understand that the specific condition has been fulfilled. This allows the player to enjoy whether or not the specific condition has been fulfilled. Furthermore, when the gaming ball passes through a specific area, the display control means controls the specific information displayed on the display means. Therefore, even in situations where the game tends to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameplay by drawing attention to whether or not the gaming ball passes through a specific area.

[Appendix B2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1 is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix B3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1 is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In a gaming machine according to Appendix B2 or Appendix B3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information, is displayed on the display means. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when it is displayed on the display means, but also to infer specific numerical information based on the special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix B4]
Further provided is a discharge port (373) for discharging the game balls on the back side of the game board (31) from which the game balls are shot out,
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix B1 to Appendix B3, characterized in that the specific area is the discharge outlet (373).

[Appendix B5]
It further comprises a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) from which prize balls are paid out when game balls enter the winning hole,
The outlets (373) include a first outlet (318) that discharges game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board (31), and a second outlet (373) that is different from the first outlet (318),
The gaming machine described in Appendix B4, characterized in that the specific area is the second discharge outlet (373).

[Appendix B6]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B5, characterized in that the second outlet (373) is capable of receiving balls during the special game.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes B4 to B6, when a specific condition is met in a special game, triggered by a game ball passing through the second outlet through which the game ball can enter, the content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, in special games where the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve playability by focusing on whether or not the game ball will enter the second outlet.

[Appendix B7]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game,
The gaming machine described in Appendix B6 is characterized in that the second discharge outlet (373) allows gaming balls that have passed through the variable winning opening (316) to pass through.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B7, when a specific condition is met triggered by a gaming ball passing through a second outlet through which a gaming ball that has entered a variable winning opening can pass during a special game, the content of the specific information displayed on the display means is controlled. Therefore, by shooting a gaming ball into the game area during a special game and causing it to enter a variable winning opening, the gaming ball can pass through the second outlet. Therefore, simply by playing the special game as usual, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring any special skill. This prevents players from avoiding playing the gaming machine due to the possibility of differences in skill, compared to when differences in skill may arise in order to get a gaming ball to enter the second outlet.

[Appendix B8]
The third outlet (378) through which the game ball entering the variable winning opening (316) can pass and which is different from the second outlet (373);
a distribution means (37) for distributing game balls entering the variable winning opening (316) to either the second discharge opening (373) or the third discharge opening (378);
The gaming machine described in Appendix B7 further comprises:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B8, the distribution means distributes gaming balls to the second outlet and the third outlet, providing a gaming experience in which whether or not a specific condition is met depends on the distribution of gaming balls by the distribution means. This allows players to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the gaming balls in the distribution means in relation to whether or not a specific condition is met.

[Appendix B9]
the specific information includes a plurality of specific information;
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix B1 to Appendix B8, characterized in that when specific conditions are met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B9, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order that makes it easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order that makes it easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous decision is high, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix B10]
The gaming machine described in Appendix B9 is characterized in that the display control means (51) displays all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order on the display means during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B10, if the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, allowing the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix B10 differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that information negating high set values such as the highest set value is not presented.

[Appendix C1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each piece of numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
a numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is satisfied during the specified period;
Equipped with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
A gaming machine characterized in that the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, if specific conditions are met during a predetermined period in which a special game is set to begin, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, players can enjoy identifying specific numerical information, and even guessing or identifying specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met during a predetermined period. Furthermore, by setting the beginning of the predetermined period to be a special game, players can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not specific conditions are met during the special game.

[Appendix C2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1 is characterized in that, when the specific condition is met, the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix C1 is characterized in that, when the specific condition is met, the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In a gaming machine according to Appendix C2 or Appendix C3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information, is displayed on the display means. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when it is displayed on the display means, but also to infer specific numerical information based on the special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix C4]
The special game state is
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, a transition is made to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
and a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of determining by the transition determination means (41) to transition to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified, and the state is transitioned to a second game state (high probability mode),
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix C1 to Appendix C3, characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C4, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the machine is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the machine will transition to the special game state at a lower probability than the second game state and the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game. In other words, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game for the so-called first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, and at least one opportunity to guess or identify the specific numerical information is guaranteed for each first win.

[Appendix C5]
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
A gaming machine described in any one of appendices C1 to C4, characterized in that the start of the specified period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C5, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not certain conditions are met at least after the value-adding game begins.

[Appendix C6]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C5, characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C6, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period begins and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. As a result, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in the special game in addition to the start, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is increased.

[Appendix C7]
The special game state is
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, a transition is made to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
and a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of determining by the transition determination means (41) to transition to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified, and the state is transitioned to a second game state (high probability mode),
The gaming machine described in Appendix C6 is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C7, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state, which transitions to the first game state after the special game ends. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination for the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, i.e., in the case of a single win where the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination for the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, i.e., in the case of a consecutive win where the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, but if the result of the transition determination for the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win where the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game, which ends the consecutive win. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set to span the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game transitions to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more often than a single win, and the more consecutive wins there are in a consecutive win, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the player is to obtain a specific condition. Not only does this increase the number of consecutive wins, but the player also benefits by obtaining more specific information that indicates specific numerical information, making it easier to guess or identify the specific numerical information and, ultimately, the predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix C8]
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value-granting game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix C6 or C7, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded, nor is the result of the transition determination announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix C8, the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game. Therefore, if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize this blank period for the player to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during special games.

[Appendix C9]
the specific information includes a plurality of specific information;
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix C1 to Appendix C8, characterized in that when specific conditions are met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C9, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order that makes it easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order that makes it easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous decision is high, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix C10]
The gaming machine described in Appendix C9 is characterized in that the display control means (51) displays all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order on the display means during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C10, if the number of times a specific condition is met within a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, allowing the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether the number of times a specific condition is met within a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix C10 differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that information negating high set values such as the highest set value is not presented.

[Appendix D1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each piece of numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
a numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is met;
Equipped with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
The specified period is set to the period during which the special game is performed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, specific information indicating specific numerical information when specific conditions are met is displayed on the display means during a specified period set during the execution period of the special game. This allows the player to enjoy identifying specific numerical information, and ultimately guessing or identifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period (specified period) of the special game, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix D2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix D1 is characterized in that, when the specific condition is met, the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

[Appendix D3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix D1 is characterized in that, when the specific condition is met, the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In a gaming machine according to Appendix D2 or Appendix D3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information, is displayed on the display means. This allows a player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when it is displayed on the display means, but also to infer specific numerical information based on the special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, players can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix D4]
The special game has a value-imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value-imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) ends,
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D3, wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded, nor is the result of the transition determination announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix D4, the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize this blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during special games.

[Appendix D5]
When the specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, the display control means (51) displays specific information (numbers) indicating at least the specific numerical information (non-set value) on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D4, characterized in that the specified period is set at least after the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D5, if a specific condition is met within a predetermined period, specific information showing specific numerical information is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not the specific condition is met within the predetermined period, and can enjoy the game by focusing on the specific information displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has elapsed. This increases the enjoyment of the game from the start of the predetermined period until the specific information is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed.

[Appendix D6]
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The special game state is
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, a transition is made to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
and a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of determining by the transition determination means (41) to transition to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified, and the state is transitioned to a second game state (high probability mode),
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the game is to be transitioned when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game,
The gaming machine described in Appendix D5 is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D6, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the special game state to which the machine is transitioned when the result of the transition determination in the first game state indicates a transition to the special game state. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is the first win. Meanwhile, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the first special game state to which the machine is transitioned to the first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the last special game to be executed, regardless of whether it is the first win or a series of wins. In this way, the predetermined period begins with the first win, ends with the last special game to be executed, and specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has elapsed. This allows for gameplay that effectively utilizes the period during which the special game is executed to present specific information indicating specific numerical information to the player. Furthermore, in the case of a series of wins, it is also possible to present a quantity (amount) of information corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the series of wins all at once after the predetermined period has elapsed. This allows players to check a large amount of information about the specific information in a short period of time after the specified period has passed, improving convenience when identifying or inferring specific numerical information, and ultimately specific numerical information, based on specific information that indicates specific numerical information.

[Appendix D7]
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game to be started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the specific period has elapsed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix D5 or Appendix D6, characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific conditions are met during the specific period.

The gaming machine according to Appendix D7 includes a specific period set for a special game that starts within a specified period. That is, if multiple special games start within a specified period, such as in a consecutive win, multiple special periods are set according to the number of special games that start within the specified period. In addition, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, if there are multiple specific periods within a specified period, it is determined whether specific conditions are met for each specific period, and if the specific conditions are met within that specific period, the specific information is displayed on the display means each time the specific period elapses. This allows the player to focus on whether specific conditions are met for each special game, and if the specific conditions are met, to focus on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the special games.

[Appendix D8]
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value-granting game ends,
The specific period includes a period during which the value-granting game is executed,
The gaming machine described in Appendix D7, wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D8, a determination is made as to whether specific conditions are met for each specific period including the value-awarding game, and if the specific conditions are met during that specific period, specific information is displayed in the ending that is executed after the value-awarding game ends. Therefore, the value-awarding game draws attention to whether specific conditions are met, and if the specific conditions are met, the ending following the end of the value-awarding game draws attention to the content of the specific information. This effectively utilizes the ending of the special game to add gameplay that displays specific information, and also draws attention to the progress of the game throughout the special game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix D9]
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through a specific area (373) and wins a display lottery that is executed when the game ball passes through the specific area (373),
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D8, wherein the specified period is after the display lottery is won.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D9, specific information is displayed on the display means by winning a display lottery that is executed when a gaming ball passes through a specific area. By holding a display lottery as a condition for specific information to be displayed on the display means in this way, when a gaming ball passes through a specific area, players can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not they have won the display lottery (whether or not specific information is displayed), thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, when holding a display lottery as a condition for specific information to be displayed on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty and variability with which the specific condition is met (the difficulty and variability with which specific information is displayed). This allows for a variety of gameplay features to be added regarding the display of specific information depending on the probability of winning the display lottery, the lottery method, etc.

[Appendix D10]
the specific information includes a plurality of specific information;
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices D1 to D9, characterized in that when specific conditions are met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D10, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order that makes it easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order that makes it easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous decision is high, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix D11]
The gaming machine described in Appendix D10 is characterized in that the display control means (51) displays all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order on the display means during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D11, if the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, allowing the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix D11 differs from conventional slot machines in that it is possible to display all of the multiple pieces of specific information (non-set values) on the display means, in that it does not present information that negates high set values, such as the highest set value.

[Appendix E1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each piece of numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
a numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, when specific conditions are met within a predetermined period, specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, based on the number of specific conditions met within the predetermined period; and
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, when specific conditions are met within a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions met within the predetermined period. This allows the player to guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and when all of the specific information is displayed, the player can identify all of the specific numerical information. It is also possible to recognize the specific numerical information when all of the specific numerical information is identified. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or identifying specific numerical information, and ultimately guessing or identifying the specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment of the game. In particular, because the specific specific information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions met within the predetermined period, the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on the number of specific conditions that are met, while hoping that many specific conditions will be met within the predetermined period.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1 is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix E3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1 is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In a gaming machine according to Appendix E2 or Appendix E3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information, is displayed on the display means. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when it is displayed on the display means, but also to infer specific numerical information based on the special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix E4]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E3, characterized in that the display means is information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E4, the display means is information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the content displayed on the display means. This allows the player to easily grasp the specific information, which also makes it easier for the player to identify or infer the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix E5]
the specific information includes a plurality of pieces of individual information,
the information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of pieces of individual information;
The gaming machine described in Appendix E4 is characterized in that the display control means (51) displays a number of individual pieces of information corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied during the specified period in the multiple display areas of the information display means.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E5, the specific information includes multiple individual pieces of information, and the information display means has multiple display areas for displaying the multiple individual pieces of information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display the multiple pieces of individual information necessary to identify the specific numerical information in any of the multiple display areas. This provides a gameplay feature that allows the difficulty of identifying or guessing the specific numerical information to be adjusted depending on which of the multiple pieces of individual information is displayed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix E6]
A gaming machine as described in Appendix E5, characterized in that each of the multiple display areas (segments A to G) displays individual information that corresponds to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E6, each of the multiple display areas displays corresponding individual information from the multiple pieces of individual information, making it possible to identify or guess the specific numerical information based on the correspondence. This allows the player to enjoy identifying or guessing the specific numerical information while looking forward to seeing which of the multiple pieces of individual information will be displayed when certain conditions are met.

[Appendix E7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E5 or Appendix E6, wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light-emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E7, the information display means has multiple light-emitting areas. Such information display means can be realized using an easily available, low-cost display device, such as a seven-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with information display means that displays specific information while minimizing the complexity of the configuration and rising manufacturing costs.

[Appendix E8]
The gaming machine according to appendix E5 or E6, wherein the information display means (341) is capable of displaying the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E8, the information display means can display a specific image from which specific numerical information can be identified or guessed, providing many options for the appearance of the specific image and the process leading up to its display. Therefore, specific numerical information can be identified or guessed in a variety of patterns depending on the appearance of the specific image and the process leading up to its display. This improves the enjoyment of identifying or guessing specific numerical information.

[Appendix E9]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E8 is characterized in that the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition judgment is displayed in a variable manner.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E9, a specific image is displayed on image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a pattern that suggests or clearly indicates the result of a transition determination. Therefore, when a variable display image is displayed on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed using that image display means. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs, as the specific image can be displayed using the display means required for the gaming machine without the need for a separate display means for displaying the specific image.

[Appendix E10]
The information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets using the plurality of display areas,
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix E5 to Appendix E9, characterized in that the specific information is a number or an alphabet.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E10, the information display means is capable of displaying numbers or letters, and the specific information is displayed corresponding to the numbers or letters. As a result, all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers or letters, making it easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information, and allowing players to easily enjoy identifying or guessing the specific numerical information without requiring advanced gaming knowledge.

[Appendix E11]
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine described in Appendix E4 is characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the specific information on the individual display unit (351 to 356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the multiple types of numerical information, depending on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E11, specific information is displayed in an individual display section corresponding to specific numerical information among multiple types of numerical information. That is, an individual display section in which specific information is displayed is specified for each type of specific numerical information. Therefore, specific information can be easily grasped by the type of individual display section in which the specific information is displayed, and specific numerical information can be easily identified. This increases convenience when identifying specific numerical information.

[Appendix E12]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E11 is characterized in that the display control means (51) controls the individual display units (351 to 356) to one of two states: a display state in which the specific information is displayed, and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E12, the individual display unit is controlled to one of two states: a display state or a non-display state. Therefore, specific numerical information can be easily identified based on the state of the individual display unit. This increases convenience when identifying specific numerical information.

[Appendix E13]
The gaming machine according to appendix E11 or E12, wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, a ring, a matrix, or a staggered pattern.

[Appendix E14]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices E11 to E13, wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are a group of lamps.

The gaming machines described in Appendix E13 and Appendix E14 make it possible to form information display means simply and inexpensively.

[Appendix E15]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E14, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E15, if specific conditions are met during a predetermined period in which a special game is set to begin, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, players can enjoy guessing or determining specific numerical information, and ultimately guessing or determining specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met during the predetermined period. Furthermore, by setting the start of the predetermined period to be during a special game, players can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether specific conditions are met during the special game.

[Appendix E16]
The special game state is
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, a transition is made to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
and a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of determining by the transition determination means (41) to transition to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified, and the state is transitioned to a second game state (high probability mode),
A gaming machine as described in Appendix E15, characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E16, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the machine is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the machine will transition to the special game state at a lower probability than the second game state and the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game. In other words, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game for the first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, ensuring at least one opportunity to guess or identify the specific numerical information, and therefore the specific numerical information, for each first win.

[Appendix E17]
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to appendix E15 or E16, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-granting game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E17, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not certain conditions are met at least after the value-adding game begins.

[Appendix E18]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices E15 to E17, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E18, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period begins and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. As a result, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in the special game in addition to the start, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is increased.

[Appendix E19]
The special game state is
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, a transition is made to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
and a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of determining by the transition determination means (41) to transition to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified, and the state is transitioned to a second game state (high probability mode),
The gaming machine described in Appendix E18 is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E19, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state, which transitions to the first game state after the special game ends. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination for the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, i.e., in the case of a single win where the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination for the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, i.e., in the case of a consecutive win where the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, but if the result of the transition determination for the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win where the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game, which ends the consecutive win. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set to span the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game transitions to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more often than a single win, and the more consecutive wins there are in a consecutive win, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the player is to obtain a specific value, and the more specific information they can obtain to identify specific numerical information, making it easier to guess or identify specific numerical information and, ultimately, specific numerical information.

[Appendix E20]
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value-granting game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix E18 or E19, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded, nor is the result of the transition determination announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Appendix E20, the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, so if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize this blank period for the player and display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during special games.

[Appendix E21]
the specific information includes a plurality of specific information;
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix E1 to Appendix E20, characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E21, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order that makes it easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order that makes it easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous decision is high, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix E22]
The gaming machine described in Appendix E21 is characterized in that the display control means (51) displays all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order on the display means during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E22, if the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, allowing the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix E22 differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that information negating high settings such as the highest setting value is not presented.

[Appendix F1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each piece of numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
a numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is met during the specified period;
a display order determination means (51) for determining a display order in which the specific information is to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is met;
Equipped with
When the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information during the specified period based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51);
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1, the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a predetermined condition is met. In this way, the display order in which specific information is displayed is determined when a predetermined condition is met, preventing the display order of specific information from becoming constant. This prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly, and prevents the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix F1 is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix F3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix F1 is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In gaming machines according to Supplementary Note F2 or Supplementary Note F3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information, is displayed on the display means. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when it is displayed on the display means, but also to infer specific numerical information based on the special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix F4]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the power of the gaming machine (10) is turned on.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F4, the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when the gaming machine is powered on. Incidentally, gaming machines are often powered on before the amusement parlor opens. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined when the gaming machine is powered on, and the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day. This prevents the display order of the specific information from becoming fixed, and therefore prevents the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly on different business days and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F5]
A gaming machine described in any one of appendices F1 to F3, characterized in that the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (set value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F5, the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by storing predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F6]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period has started.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F6, the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a predetermined period begins. This determines the display order of specific information for each predetermined period. This prevents the display order of specific information from becoming fixed, preventing the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F7]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F7, the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a special game is started. This determines the display order of specific information for each special game. This prevents the display order of specific information from becoming fixed, preventing the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F8]
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-adding game is started.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F8, the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a value-awarding game is started. This determines the display order of specific information for each value-awarding game. This prevents the display order of specific information from becoming fixed, preventing the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly or the display of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F9]
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information items during the predetermined period when the predetermined condition is met;
a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51);
Furthermore,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices F1 to F8, characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F9, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in one display order selected from multiple display orders that specify the priority of the display order of multiple pieces of specific information. Therefore, depending on the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, make it harder for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, or prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed in a specific display order. This makes it possible to display multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rates of multiple display orders, thereby preventing the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F10]
the plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine according to appendix F9, wherein the display order selection means (51) selects one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F10, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in a display order selected from multiple display orders based on predetermined numerical information. In other words, multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, and therefore a display order can be set for each piece of predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous decision corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple pieces of specific information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix F11]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F10, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F11, if specific conditions are met during a predetermined period in which a special game is set to begin, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, players can enjoy guessing or determining specific numerical information, and ultimately guessing or determining specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met during the predetermined period. Furthermore, by setting the start of the predetermined period to be a special game, players can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether specific conditions are met during the special game.

[Appendix F12]
The special game state is
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, a transition is made to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
and a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of determining by the transition determination means (41) to transition to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified, and the state is transitioned to a second game state (high probability mode),
The gaming machine described in Appendix F11, characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F12, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the machine is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the machine will transition to the special game state at a lower probability than the second game state and the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game. In other words, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game for the first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, ensuring at least one opportunity to guess or identify the specific numerical information, and therefore the specific numerical information, for each first win.

[Appendix F13]
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to appendix F11 or F12, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix F13, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not certain conditions are met at least after the value-adding game begins.

[Appendix F14]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F11 to F13, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F14, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period begins and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. As a result, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in the special game in addition to the start, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is increased.

[Appendix F15]
The special game state is
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, a transition is made to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
and a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of determining by the transition determination means (41) to transition to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified, and the state is transitioned to a second game state (high probability mode),
The gaming machine described in Appendix F14 is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F15, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state, which transitions to the first game state after the special game ends. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination for the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, i.e., in the case of a single win where the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination for the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, i.e., in the case of a consecutive win where the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, but if the result of the transition determination for the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win where the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game, which ends the consecutive win. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set to span the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game transitions to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more often than a single win, and the more consecutive wins there are in a consecutive win, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the player is to obtain a specific condition. Not only does this increase the number of consecutive wins, but the player also benefits by obtaining more specific information that indicates specific numerical information, making it easier to guess or identify the specific numerical information and, ultimately, the predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix F16]
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value-granting game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix F14 or F15, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded, nor is the result of the transition determination announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine described in Appendix F16, the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game. Therefore, if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize this blank period for the player to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during special games.

[Appendix F17]
the specific information includes a plurality of specific information;
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices F1 to F16, characterized in that when specific conditions are met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F17, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order that makes it easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order that makes it easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous decision is high, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F18]
The gaming machine described in Appendix F17 is characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F18, if the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, allowing the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix F18 differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that information negating high settings such as the highest setting value is not presented.

[Appendix G1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each piece of numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
a numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a first display control means (51) for, when a specific condition is met, causing a first display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing;
a display content storage means (512) for storing display content of the specific information to be displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
an operating means (21) operated by a player to display the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) during a special period (e.g., a standby period) different from the specified period;
a second display control means (51) for causing the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (21) by a player during the special period;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G1, the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operating means during a special period different from the specified period. This allows the player to cause the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period to be displayed on the second display means by operating the operating means during the special period. Therefore, if the player wants to check the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period, for example, if the player has forgotten the display content or if a player is being replaced, the player can check the display content during the special period. As a result, by checking the display content of the specified period during the special period, the player can identify or infer the specific numerical information, and can decide whether or not to play on the gaming machine based on that identification or inference.

[Appendix G2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1 is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix G3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix G1 is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating part of the multiple types of numerical information on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G2 or Supplementary Note G3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information, is displayed on the first display means. This allows the player not only to identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when it is displayed on the first display means, but also to infer specific numerical information based on the special information when it is displayed on the first display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix G4]
The game system further includes a notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
A gaming machine described in any one of appendices G1 to G3, characterized in that the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

In gaming machines according to Appendix G4, the special period during which the display content can be confirmed during the specified period is set to a period during which neither special games nor notification games are being played. This allows players to carefully and thoroughly check the display content at their own pace, without being subject to time constraints, and decide whether or not to play on the gaming machine.

[Appendix G5]
the display content storage means (512) is capable of storing display contents of a plurality of pieces of the specific information displayed during a plurality of different specified periods,
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix G1 to Appendix G4, characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays at least one of the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content memory means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined operation is performed by a player on the operation means (21) during the special period.

[Appendix G6]
The gaming machine described in Appendix G5 is characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays on the second display means (35, 39, 341) the display content selected by the player during the special period from the display contents of the plurality of specific information by the player performing a predetermined operation on the operation means (21).

[Appendix G7]
The gaming machine described in Appendix G5 is characterized in that the display content display control means (51) displays two or more of the display contents of the multiple specific information stored in the display content memory means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined operation is performed by a player on the operation means (21) during the special period.

In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes G5 to G7, at least one of the display contents of multiple specific information displayed over multiple specified periods can be displayed on the second display means. For example, the second display means can display a display content selected by the player from the display contents of multiple specific information stored in the display content storage means (512). In this case, the player can select the display content to be displayed on the second display means from the display contents of multiple specific information, allowing the player to view the display content they desire at their own discretion. This allows the display content to be viewed effectively while avoiding viewing previously viewed information or information with a small amount of information, thereby enabling efficient viewing of the display content. Furthermore, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, multiple display contents can be viewed at once, allowing the presented content to be viewed efficiently in this case as well.

[Appendix G8]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G7, characterized in that the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix G9]
The gaming machine described in Appendix G8 is characterized in that the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means that displays a variable pattern (decorative pattern) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition judgment.

The gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes G8 and G9 are equipped with a first display means displayed during a specified period and a second display means displayed during a special period, and specific information is displayed by different display means during the specified period and the special period. Therefore, if information other than specific information is displayed on the second display means during the specified period, the display can be prevented from being obstructed. For example, if the second display means is a variable display image display means, the visibility of the image (e.g., image effects) displayed on this variable display image display means is prevented from being obstructed. On the other hand, during a special period (e.g., a standby state), the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented by a second display means, such as a variable display image display means that displays a variable pattern. Generally, variable display image display means have a large display area, and therefore, when the display content of the specific information during the specified period is presented on the variable display image display means, visibility is improved. Furthermore, the variable display image display means may be used to set various settings, such as effects and characters, executed on the gaming machine. Therefore, if the display content of specific information during a specified period is presented by the variable display image display means, it becomes possible to have the display content of specific information during a specified period presented by the variable display image display means through operations similar to those used to make various settings. This improves convenience when displaying the display content of specific information on the variable display image display means during a special period.

[Appendix G10]
the specific information includes a plurality of specific information;
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices G1 to G9, characterized in that when specific conditions are met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G10, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order that makes it easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order that makes it easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous decision is high, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix G11]
The gaming machine described in Appendix G10 is characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G11, if the number of times a specific condition is met within a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, allowing the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether the number of times a specific condition is met within a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix G11 differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the multiple pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that information negating high settings such as the highest setting value is not presented.

[Appendix H1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each piece of numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
a numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for, when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), a plurality of specific information (numbers) indicating a plurality of specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information in a distinguishable manner during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing;
Equipped with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information for the specified period in a predetermined display order;
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order that makes it easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order that makes it easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous decision is high, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix H2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix H1 is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix H3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix H1 is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In gaming machines according to Supplementary Note H2 or Supplementary Note H3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information, is displayed on the display means. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when it is displayed on the display means, but also to infer specific numerical information based on the special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix H4]
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information items during the predetermined period;
The display system further comprises a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix H1 to Appendix H3, characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H4, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in one display order selected from multiple display orders that specify the priority of the display order of multiple pieces of specific information. Therefore, depending on the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, make it harder for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, or prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed in a specific display order. This makes it possible to display multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rates of multiple display orders, thereby preventing the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix H5]
the plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine described in Appendix H4 is characterized in that it selects one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H5, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in a display order selected from multiple display orders based on predetermined numerical information. In other words, since multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, a display order can be set for each piece of predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous decision corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple pieces of specific information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix H6]
The gaming machine according to appendix H5, wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders with different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selection means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H6, it is also possible to make it easier to select a specific display order, and harder to select a specific display order. In other words, unlike when all display orders have the same probability of being selected, it is possible to make it easier to identify a specific non-set value, and conversely, to make it more difficult to identify a specific non-set value. This makes it possible to adjust the likelihood of a high or low setting value, etc.

[Appendix H7]
the plurality of display orders includes a first display order in which the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest advantageous determination probability among the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is the lowest;
The gaming machine described in Appendix H6 is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the first display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the first display order.

In a gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H7, the first display order, which has the lowest priority, is likely to be selected for specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of a favorable judgment among multiple favorable judgment probabilities corresponding to multiple specific information. In other words, excluding the favorable judgment probability corresponding to predetermined numerical information, specific information indicating the specific numerical information with the lowest probability of a favorable judgment and the most unfavorable to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, because the specific numerical information that is the most unfavorable to the player is displayed last, the possibility of the most unfavorable probability of a favorable judgment for the player and a more favorable probability of a favorable judgment for the player remains until the last specific information is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp that the favorable probability of a favorable judgment is the most unfavorable to the player, which prevents early termination of play on the gaming machine and prevents a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

[Appendix H8]
The specific information includes first specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of favorable determination among a plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the highest probability of favorable determination among the plurality of favorable determination probabilities,
the plurality of display orders includes a second display order in which the first identification information and the second identification information have the lowest two priorities,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H6 is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the second display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the second display order.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H8, the second display order, which has a low priority, is likely to be selected for specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the lowest probability of a favorable judgment among multiple favorable judgment probabilities corresponding to multiple specific information. Therefore, as with the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H6, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the favorable judgment probability is the most unfavorable to the player, which prevents early termination of play on the gaming machine and reduces a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine. Furthermore, in the second display order, the priority is low for specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the highest probability of a favorable judgment among multiple favorable judgment probabilities corresponding to multiple specific information. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp not only the unfavorable probability of a favorable judgment, but also the favorable probability of a favorable judgment to the player. In this way, the low priority of two specific information indicating two specific numerical information corresponding to an unfavorable probability of a favorable judgment and an advantageous probability of a favorable judgment to the player makes it difficult for the player to determine until the end which of the two opposing favorable judgment probabilities is favorable to the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the specific information displayed on the display means.

[Appendix H9]
The plurality of display orders include a third display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable determination probability higher than the first favorable determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable determination probability lower than the first favorable determination probability,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H6 is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the third display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the third display order.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H9, the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of an advantageous determination higher than the first probability of an advantageous determination is set higher, with a lower selection rate for the third display order than for specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of an advantageous determination lower than the first probability of an advantageous determination. By setting such a high selection rate for the third display order, the player can be made to expect that the probability of an advantageous determination will be higher than the actual first probability of an advantageous determination up until just before the first probability of an advantageous determination is grasped. This allows the player to enjoy guessing specific information (predetermined information) while hoping for a high probability of an advantageous determination up until just before the first probability of an advantageous determination is grasped.

[Appendix H10]
The plurality of display orders include a fourth display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable determination probability lower than the first favorable determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is lower than the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable determination probability higher than the first favorable determination probability,
The gaming machine described in Appendix H6 is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of the fourth display order being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the fourth display order.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H10, the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of an advantageous determination lower than the first probability of an advantageous determination is set higher, with a lower selection rate for the fourth display order than for specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of an advantageous determination higher than the first probability of an advantageous determination. By setting such a high selection rate for the fourth display order, specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of an advantageous determination lower than the first probability of an advantageous determination is left as hidden specific information immediately before the first probability of an advantageous determination is determined. As a result, the final candidates for the first probability of an advantageous determination are the actual first probability of an advantageous determination and specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a probability of an advantageous determination lower than the first probability of an advantageous determination. As a result, the player ultimately determines the predetermined numerical information corresponding to the advantageous first probability of an advantageous determination as the first probability of an advantageous determination (predetermined numerical information), thereby enhancing the enjoyment felt when the set value is determined.

[Appendix H11]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H10, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H11, if specific conditions are met during a predetermined period in which a special game is set to begin, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, players can enjoy guessing or determining specific numerical information, and ultimately guessing or determining specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met during a predetermined period. Furthermore, by setting the beginning of the predetermined period to be a special game, players can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether specific conditions are met during the special game.

[Appendix H12]
The special game state is
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, a transition is made to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
and a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of determining by the transition determination means (41) to transition to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified, and the state is transitioned to a second game state (high probability mode),
The gaming machine described in Appendix H11, characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H12, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the machine is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the machine will transition to the special game state at a lower probability than the second game state and the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game. In other words, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game for the first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, ensuring at least one opportunity to guess or identify specific numerical information for each first win.

[Appendix H13]
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to Appendix H11 or H12, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-granting game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix H13, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not certain conditions are met at least after the value-adding game begins.

[Appendix H14]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H11 to H13, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H14, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period begins and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. As a result, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in the special game in addition to the start, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is increased.

[Appendix H15]
The special game state is
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, a transition is made to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
and a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of determining by the transition determination means (41) to transition to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified, and the state is transitioned to a second game state (high probability mode),
The gaming machine described in Appendix H14 is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H15, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state, which transitions to the first game state after the special game ends. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination for the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, i.e., in the case of a single win where the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination for the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, i.e., in the case of a consecutive win where the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, but if the result of the transition determination for the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win where the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game, which ends the consecutive win. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set to span the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game transitions to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more often than a single win, and the more consecutive wins there are in a consecutive win, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the player is to obtain a specific condition. Not only does this increase the number of consecutive wins, but the player also benefits by obtaining more specific information that indicates specific numerical information, making it easier to guess or identify the specific numerical information and, ultimately, the predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix H16]
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to Appendix H14 or H15, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the value-granting game ends.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded, nor is the result of the transition determination announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H16, the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game. Therefore, if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize this blank period for the player to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during special games.

[Appendix H17]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices H1 to H16, characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means to display all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order during the specified period if the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H17, if the number of times a specific condition is met within a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, allowing the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether the number of times a specific condition is met within a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H17 differs from conventional slot machines in that it is possible to display all of the multiple pieces of specific information (non-set values) on the display means, in that it does not present information that negates high settings such as the highest setting value.

[Appendix I1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each piece of numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
a numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for displaying, on a display means (35, 39, 341), specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing when a specific condition is met;
a display restriction means (51) for restricting the specific information from being displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during a period other than the specified period;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine described in Appendix I1, the display of specific information on the display means is restricted during periods other than the specified period. Therefore, the display of specific information is executed as a bonus for players who have performed a game that meets the specific conditions for displaying that specific information. This prevents other players from taking advantage of the bonus obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information that can be used to identify or guess the specific numerical information.

[Appendix I2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix I1 is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix I3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix I1 is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I2 or Appendix I3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information, is displayed on the display means. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when it is displayed on the display means, but also to infer specific numerical information based on the special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix I4]
The game system further includes a notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
A gaming machine described in any one of Appendix I1 to Appendix I3, characterized in that the period other than the specified period is a standby period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I4, the display of specific information on the display means is restricted during a standby period when neither a special game nor an announcement game is being executed. Here, player changes generally occur during the standby period. Therefore, by restricting the display of specific information on the display means during the standby period, it is possible to more reliably prevent other players from taking advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information that can be used to identify or guess specific numerical information.

[Appendix I5]
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix I1 to Appendix I4, characterized in that the display restriction means (51) restricts the display of the specific information that was previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period, during a period other than the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I5, during periods other than the specified period, the display of specific information previously displayed on the display means during the specified period is restricted. In other words, specific information is only displayed during the specified period, and the display of the display history of past specific information is also restricted outside the specified period. This makes it impossible to check specific information previously displayed based on the display history, more reliably preventing other players from taking advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information to identify or guess specific numerical information based on the display history.

[Appendix I6]
the specific information includes a plurality of specific information;
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix I1 to Appendix I5, characterized in that when specific conditions are met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I6, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order that makes it easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order that makes it easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous decision is high, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix I7]
The gaming machine described in Appendix I6 is characterized in that the display control means (51) displays all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order on the display means during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I7, if the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, allowing the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix I7 differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that information negating high set values such as the highest set value is not presented.

[Appendix J1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each piece of numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
a numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a display control means (51) for, when a first specific condition or a second specific condition different from the second specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, causing a display means (35, 39, 341) to display, in a distinguishable manner, a plurality of pieces of specific information (numbers) indicating a plurality of pieces of specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing;
Equipped with
the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a first display order when the first specific condition is met, and causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a second display order different from the first display order when the second specific condition is met;
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1, when a first specific condition is met, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a first display order, and when a second specific condition is met, multiple pieces of specific information (numbers) are displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of the multiple pieces of specific information is set according to the type of specific condition that is met. This makes it difficult for players to recognize the display order of the multiple pieces of specific information, preventing multiple pieces of specific numerical information from being easily identified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents players from quickly realizing that the probability of a winning combination is low when that combination corresponds to a low probability of a winning combination. As a result, even when the probability of a winning combination is low, early termination of play on the gaming machine is prevented, preventing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

[Appendix J2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1 is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix J3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix J1 is characterized in that the display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In gaming machines according to Supplementary Note J2 or Supplementary Note J3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information, or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information, is displayed on the display means. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when it is displayed on the display means, but also to infer specific numerical information based on the special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix J4]
the first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41);
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices J1 to J3, characterized in that the second specific condition includes that second predetermined numerical information (setting value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from the multiple types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J4, the first specific condition includes first predetermined numerical information being stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition includes second predetermined numerical information being stored in the numerical information storage means. In other words, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order is determined by the predetermined numerical information, and multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means for a specified period of time according to that display order. In other words, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each piece of predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous decision corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple pieces of specific information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J5]
a display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information items during the predetermined period when the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied;
The display system further comprises a selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices J1 to J4, characterized in that the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the single display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J5, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in one display order selected from multiple display orders that specify the priority of the display order of multiple pieces of specific information. Therefore, depending on the display orders included in the multiple display orders and their selection rates, it is possible to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, make it harder for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, or prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed in a specific display order. This makes it possible to display multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rates of multiple display orders, thereby preventing the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix J6]
the plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information;
The gaming machine according to appendix J5, wherein the display order selection means (51) selects one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J6, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a specified period in a display order selected from multiple display orders based on predetermined numerical information. In other words, multiple display orders can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, and therefore a display order can be set for each piece of predetermined numerical information. This makes it possible to set the display order based on whether the probability of an advantageous decision corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and also makes it possible to characterize the display of multiple pieces of specific information for each piece of predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J7]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1 to J6, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J7, if specific conditions are met during a predetermined period in which a special game is set to begin, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, players can enjoy guessing or determining specific numerical information, and ultimately guessing or determining specific numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met during a predetermined period. Furthermore, by setting the beginning of the predetermined period to be a special game, players can enjoy playing the game while focusing on whether or not specific conditions are met during the special game.

[Appendix J8]
The special game state is
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, a transition is made to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
and a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of determining by the transition determination means (41) to transition to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified, and the state is transitioned to a second game state (high probability mode),
The gaming machine described in Appendix J7 is characterized in that the start of the specified period is set to the special game to which the game is transitioned when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to transition to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J8, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to which the machine is transitioned when the transition determination means determines that the machine will transition to the special game state at a lower probability than the second game state and the result of the transition determination is to transition to the special game. In other words, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game for the first win. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first win, regardless of whether it is a single win or a consecutive win, ensuring at least one opportunity to guess or identify the specific numerical information, and therefore the specific numerical information, for each first win.

[Appendix J9]
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player,
The gaming machine described in Appendix J7 or Appendix J8, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-granting game.

In the gaming machine described in Appendix J9, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so players can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not certain conditions are met at least after the value-adding game begins.

[Appendix J10]
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices J7 to J9, characterized in that the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J10, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game. That is, the predetermined period begins and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the transition determination is not announced in the special game. As a result, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. In response to this, by setting the end of the predetermined period in the special game in addition to the start, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is increased.

[Appendix J11]
The special game state is
a first special game state (5R normal jackpot) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, a transition is made to a first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified;
and a second special game state (5R probability variable jackpot game state and 16R probability variable jackpot game state) in which, after the special game in the special game state is ended, the probability of determining by the transition determination means (41) to transition to the special game state is higher than that of the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified, and the state is transitioned to a second game state (high probability mode),
The gaming machine described in Appendix J10 is characterized in that the end of the specified period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state which is transitioned to the first game state after the special game in the special game state ends.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J11, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state, which transitions to the first game state after the special game ends. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination for the first game state is to transition to the first special game state, i.e., in the case of a single win where the first win transitions to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination for the first game state is to transition to the second special game state, i.e., in the case of a consecutive win where the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period does not end in the special game executed in the second special game state, but if the result of the transition determination for the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the predetermined period ends in the special game executed in the first special game state. In other words, in the case of a consecutive win where the first win transitions to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game, which ends the consecutive win. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive win, the predetermined period is set to span the first special game at the end of the consecutive win, so the predetermined period is longer than in a single win, and the more times the game transitions to the second special game state, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, a consecutive win is more likely to satisfy a specific condition more often than a single win, and the more consecutive wins there are in a consecutive win, the more likely the specific condition will be satisfied. As a result, the more consecutive wins there are, the more likely the player is to obtain a specific condition. Not only does this increase the number of consecutive wins, but the player also benefits by obtaining more specific information that indicates specific numerical information, making it easier to guess or identify the specific numerical information and, ultimately, the predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J12]
The special game has a value-granting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that grant game value to a player, and an ending that is executed after the value-granting game ends,
The gaming machine according to appendix J10 or J11, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

However, between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game, no game value is awarded, nor is the result of the transition determination announced. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-granting game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. In contrast, in the gaming machine described in Appendix J12, the end of the specified period is set between the end of the value-granting game and the end of the special game. Therefore, if certain conditions are met during the specified period, it is possible to utilize this blank period for the player to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner during special games.

[Appendix J13]
the specific information includes a plurality of specific information;
A gaming machine described in any of Appendices J1 to J12, characterized in that when specific conditions are met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J13, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, to an order that makes it easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or an order that makes it easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous decision is high or low, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix J14]
The gaming machine described in Appendix J13 is characterized in that the display control means (51) displays all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order on the display means during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J14, if the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, allowing the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix J14 differs from conventional slot machines in that it is possible to display all of the multiple pieces of specific information (non-set values) on the display means, in that it does not present information that negates high set values, such as the highest set value.

[Appendix K1]
transition determination means (41) for making a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player is executed based on the establishment of a determination condition;
A storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
A selection means (41) for selecting each piece of numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
a numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
a first display control means (51) for, when a specific condition is met, causing a first display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing;
a second display control means (41) for causing a second display means (45) to display predetermined information (numbers) indicating the predetermined numerical information;
Equipped with
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to a player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K1, specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means, which is located in a position visible to the player, and the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45), which is located in a position where the player's visibility is limited. That is, when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the first display means, which is located in a position visible to the player, for a specified period of time. This allows the player to identify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and also allows the player to recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can understand the specific numerical information and enjoy guessing or identifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, by displaying the predetermined information on the second display means in a position that limits player visibility, it is possible to prevent players from understanding the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during business hours. On the other hand, the predetermined information can be understood by the amusement hall outside of business hours. This allows the amusement hall to check the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means outside of business hours, and if the predetermined numerical information is to be changed, the predetermined information showing the changed predetermined numerical information can be checked, simplifying the process of changing the predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix K2]
The gaming machine described in Appendix K1 is characterized in that the first display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the multiple types of numerical information on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix K3]
The gaming machine described in Appendix K1 is characterized in that the first display control means (51) is capable of displaying the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating part of the multiple types of numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K2 or Appendix K3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show multiple types of numerical information or special information that shows part of multiple types of numerical information is displayed on the first display means. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on the specific information when it is displayed on the display means, but also to infer specific numerical information based on the special information when it is displayed on the display means. Therefore, even when specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy inferring specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix K4]
It further comprises a game board (31) from which the game balls are shot out,
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1 to K3, wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K4, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than predetermined numerical information is displayed on a first display means provided on the front side of the gaming board, and predetermined information indicating predetermined numerical information is displayed on a second display means provided on the rear side of the gaming board. Therefore, the specific information displayed on the first display means is easy to see, and it is easy to restrict the visibility of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means.

[Appendix K5]
The game board (31) is fixed to a frame body (12) so as to be openable and closable,
The gaming machine described in Appendix K4, wherein the second display means (45) is provided in a position that is visible when the gaming board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K5, a second display means is provided on the back side of the gaming board, which is fixed to the frame so that it can be opened and closed. Therefore, closing the gaming board prevents the player from seeing the predetermined information displayed on the second display means, while opening the gaming board allows the gaming parlor to check the predetermined information displayed on the second display means. This makes it possible to achieve both a state in which the predetermined information on the second display means is visible and a state in which visibility is restricted, through the simple act of opening and closing the gaming board.

[Appendix K6]
The second display control means (41)
The second display means (45) is controllable between a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed,
When a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31), the game board (31) is controlled from the non-display state to the display state,
The gaming machine according to appendix K4 or K5, characterized in that when a second operation is performed on the specific operating means (46), the display state is changed to the non-display state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K6, by operating a specific operating means provided on the back side of the gaming board, it is possible to select between a display state in which predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the gaming hall's business hours, it is possible to reliably prevent players from understanding the predetermined information through the second display means, even when the gaming board is opened due to a ball jam or other problem in the gaming machine.

[Appendix K7]
the specific information includes a plurality of specific information;
A gaming machine described in any of Appendix K1 to Appendix K6, characterized in that when a specific condition is met during a specified period, the display control means (51) displays the multiple specific information for the specified period on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a specified display order.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K7, multiple pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order that makes it easy to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to narrow down or recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order that makes it easy to determine whether the probability of an advantageous decision is high, or conversely, an order that makes it difficult to determine whether the probability is high or low. In this way, multiple pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of multiple pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix K8]
The gaming machine described in Appendix K7 is characterized in that the display control means (51) displays all of the multiple specific information in the specified display order on the display means during the specified period when the number of times the specific condition is met during the specified period exceeds a specified number of times.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K8, if the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds a specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. In this way, if a specific condition is met more than the specified number of times, all of the multiple specific information items are displayed on the display means in a specified display order, allowing the player to grasp the specified numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game by focusing on whether the number of times a specific condition is met in a specified period exceeds the specified number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix K8 differs from conventional slot machines in that all of the specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means, in that information negating high set values such as the highest set value is not presented.

10: Gaming machine 31: Gaming board 316: Variable winning slot 341: Pattern display unit 35: Lamp display unit 351: First individual lamp unit 352: Second individual lamp unit 353: Third individual lamp unit 354: Fourth individual lamp unit 355: Fifth individual lamp unit 356: Sixth individual lamp unit 37: Crane device 373: Special out ball port 38: Gaming ball retention unit 381: Retention lane 383: Stopper unit 384: Special out ball sensor 39: 7-segment display units A to G: Segment 4: Main control unit 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
45: Setting value display section 46: Setting value change operation section 47: ROM
5: Audio and lamp control device 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM
6: Display control device

Claims (1)

an information acquisition means for acquiring special information when an acquisition condition is met;
transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to a player is executed, based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Equipped with
The transition determination means is configured to make the transition determination in any one of a plurality of transition determination states each having a different transition rate for transitioning to the special game state,
a storage means for storing each piece of numerical information corresponding to the plurality of transition determination states;
a setting means for setting which of the numerical information is used in the transition determination state to perform the transition determination;
a display control means for displaying a display corresponding to any one of the transition determination states set by the setting means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display control means
a numerical information storage means for storing one predetermined numerical information set from a plurality of types of numerical information;
and a means for displaying, one by one, in a predetermined area of the display means, a plurality of types of specific information displayed using numbers or letters corresponding to specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information, during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing,
This gaming machine is
During the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed in the predetermined area of the display means,
a display order of the plurality of types of specific information to be displayed in the predetermined area of the display means during the specified period is set based on the type of the predetermined numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means ,
When at least a gaming ball enters a specific area and a specific condition is established, one of the plurality of types of specific information is displayed in the predetermined area of the display means in accordance with the display order;
a counting means for counting the number of game balls entering the specific area;
a means for controlling the display of different numerical values on the display means in accordance with the counted number;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a predetermined gaming condition is met based on a predetermined gaming operation by a player in a predetermined gaming state, the multiple types of specific information displayed during the specified period in the past are configured to be visible .